Home

EB8000 Serial User Guide

1. 617 D WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 When LB 9049 watch dog function is enabled if there s a failure in communication for i Series HMI system will reboot 10 seconds later i 2 LB 9059 Demonstration Project 3 LB 9064 Demonstration Project 4 When users would like to have the object s text to show multi language except for using Label Library it needs to use the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode The value of LW 9134 can be set from 0 to 7 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different Languages The way of using LW 9134 will differ if the languages are not all chosen when compiling the downloaded file For example If 5 languages are defined by user in Label Library as Language 1 Traditional Chinese Language 2 Simplified Chinese Language 3 English Language 4 French and Language 5 Japanese If only Language 1 3 5 are downloaded by user the corresponding language of the value in LW 9134 will be O gt Language 1 Traditional Chinese 1 gt Language 3 English 2 gt Language 5 Japanese Want to know how to swith languages using Option List object toghther with LW 9134 Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 618 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 23 Remote Print Backup Server LB 10069 forced to reconnect remote printer backup server when IP changed on line set ON LW 9770 16bit remote
2. C6 illegal expression without matching if Missing expression in if statement C7 illegal expression no then without matching if Missing then in if statement C8 illegal expression no end if Missing end if C9 illegal end if without matching if Unfinished If statement before End If C10 illegal else The format of if statement is if logic expression then else if logic expression then end if Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C17 illegal expression no for without matching next for statement error missing for before next C18 illegal variable type not integer or char Should be integer or char variable 530 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C19 variable type error Missing assign statement C20 must be keyword to or down Missing keyword to or down C21 illegal expression no next The format of for statement is for variable initial value to end value step next variable Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C22 wend statement contains no while While statement error missing while before Wend C23 illegal expression without matching wend The format of While statement is while logic expression wend Any format other
3. Add ASCII in pu La and Function Keyl objects in window 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro _1 l iiti ee ee ee ee ek ee E Object settings Object 1 Function KeyLA l Operu ais Macro Object 2 ASCII ipu La 555 Lid s WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PL name Lacal HMI wt Setting i Addres PLC name Local HMI y Device type Ly ww Address o System tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Object 3 ASCII Input ASCII Input Object s Properties Use UNICODE Revers highlow byte PLL name Local HMI wt Setting Address Li v 50 Address PLC name Local HMI w Device type Lw E Address 50 System tag User defined tag Address Format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register _ Tag Library Object 4 ASCII Display 556 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PLL name Local HMI Address L v 100 Addres PLC name Local HMI hall Device type L i al Address 100 System tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Mo of word z0 simulation Follow the steps b
4. 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 10501 16bit PLC 1 turn around delay unit ms ORW RW RW Lw 10502 16bit W PLC 1 send ACK delay unit ms LW 10503 16bit IW 0502 aw RW PLC 1 parameter 1 ORW RW RW 16bit PLC 1 parameter 2 R R 16bit PLC 2 timeout unit 100ms R W i i i r Nr Nr R W R W R W W w Rw 16bit PLC 2 turn around delay unit ms ORW RW RW 16bit PLC 2 send ACK delay unit ms 16bit PLC 2 parameter 1 16bit PLC 2 parameter 2 LW 10517 16bit PLC 4 send ACK delay unit ms R W R W R SIEMENS S7 400 Link type LW 10518 16bit PLC 4 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R W R W rack LW 10519 16bit PLC 4 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R W R W CPU slot LW 10520 16bit PLC 5 timeout unit 100ms R W LW 10521 16bit PLC 5 turn around delay unit ms ORW RW RW R W R LW 10522 16bit PLC 5 send ACK delay unit ms R W R W R W SIEMENS S7 400 Link type LW 10523 16bit PLC 5 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R W R W rack LW 10524 16bit PLC 5 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R W R W CPU slot LW 10525 16bit PLC 6 timeout unit 100ms R W LW 10526 16bit PLC 6 turn around delay unit ms R W anne R W R R W LW 10527 16bit PLC 6 send ACK delay unit ms n SIEMENS S7 400 Link type LW 10528 16bit PLC 6 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 4
5. Project protection G series only v Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294901 750 Jf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Use LW 9046 9047 to change HMI key LE9046 indicates check result hey error when stabus is on Users can use LW9046 LW9047 32 bit to set the HMI key The value can t be read or written into these two registers even by remote HMI While using this function user can set the password project key password range 0 4294901750 and the XOB file can only be executed on specific HMI whose HMI Key is the same as Project key If Project Key is different from HMI key the system will turn LB9046 ON HMI needs to be rebooted while setting HMI key every time Project Protection 1 senes supports only This function supports a project can be executed only on a specific HML Project fs AMI Project Key PIMA Key HMI Key must be the same as Project Key for normal comimmication 0 Set Project Key in System Parameters General page of EBS000 Use LW 9046 32 Bit to set HMI Key LW 9046 is write only The status of LB 9046 will becomes ON if HMI Key is different from Project Key HMI Key fo range 0 4294901750 ce Easy View 697 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 30 5 Project password MTP file Users can set password to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab Enabling this password m
6. 11 2 Examples of Index Register The following examples show how to use index registers The Read address is set to LW100 and Index register is not checked In this way the read address won t change while running the project Read address PLC name Local HMI Press Setting Address PLC name Local HMI v Device type i LW ad Address Format DODD range 0 10500 Index register But in another case as below Index register is checked and the chosen index register is INDEX3 In this way the read address will change to LW 100 INDEX3 INDEX 3 represents value in address LW9203 In other words if value in LW9023 is 5 the read address in this case will be LW 100 5 LW105 156 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address ID 3 16 bit Unsigned Addres PLE name Eam fali Device ype i L Address format DODDO range 0 10500 Index INDEX 3 16 bit V Index register 16 bit Unsigned w For example as below set Index 3 as 0 which means the value in address LW9203 is 0 Under this situation the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 are the same as those of the LW100 and LW101 Object A LW 100 Index 3 Index 3 Ly We nview 157 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual At this time the settings of read address of Object A PLC name Loca
7. Address_ offset is the address offset in the PLC For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RI 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 lf address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address offset PLC type FATEK Fe Series W 1 10 FATER_FB s0 PLC I F RS 232 m PLC default station no 2 COM ICOM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the read_ data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_ data read char 8 char 8 are bool bit tt bool e bit Ta 1 short 16 bit a short 16 bit pg int 32 bit od 4 N m 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual int 32 bit nein err When a GetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically convert the data For example macro_command main float f GetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 f will contain
8. Sa Processors SCSI and RAID controllers Send viden and name controllers It can be found that the virtual COM port be changed to COM 9 in Project Manager Virtual COM Port PG lt gt PLO COMM 684 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 1 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode After installing virtual serial port driver users should follow four steps to use Ethernet mode of pass through Step 1 Set IP of the HMI connected with PLC For example HMI IP is 192 168 1 206 Step 2 Assign serial port properties of the port connects HMI with PLC For example COM2 use RS232 is used to connect PLC Step 3 Click Apply and these settings will be updated PC Applicaton 7 Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM J C install Uninstall i Apply P l n l 7 Step 4 685 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual In the PC application the number of the serial port must be the same as the virtual one For example using a Mitsubishi application if the virtual serial port is COM 7 please open PC side I F Serial setting COM port to select COM 7 as follows Transfer Setup g CCIECont MNETAI CC Link HETAOG moduk modole ochwle FA USE A W SP FRSU 0S8 BD DESBIGOT tunperent mode hd USE Balti por PLC direct coupled setting COM port Cicom7 Comnection tet Transmssion speed 1152Kbps HE TMOG BBE se ime hee HETAOG Accessing hi
9. result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on The first character is put into result start the second character is put into result start 1 and the last character is put into result start len 1 Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result1 4 short result2 4 source 5678 DEC2ASCIll source result1 0 4 result1 0 is 5 result1 1 is 6 result1 2 is 7 result1 3 is 8 the length of the string result1 is 4 bytes 1 4 DEC2ASCIll source result2 0 4 result2 O is 5 result2 1 is 6 result2 2 is 7 result2 3 is 8 the length of the string result2 is 8 bytes 2 4 end macro command HEX2ASCII HEX2ASCllI source result start len Description Transforms a hexadecimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on results type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len an
10. 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 i i 1 continue end if i i 1 if c 200 then SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 break end if wend end macro command 7 Array macro_command main int a 25 b 25 i b 0 13 538 Lig WE NTEK for 0 to b 0 step 1 ali 20 1 10 next i setData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 13 end macro_command 539 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 12 Macro TRACE Function 1 TRACE function is added to MACRO and can be used with EasyDiagnoser for viewing current content of the variable used The following illustrates how to use TRACE function in MACRO First of all add macro_1 in the project and in macro_1 add TRACE LW d a Yd indicates to display current value of LW in decimal The content of macro_1 is as the following macro_command main short a GetData a Local HMI LW 0 1 a at 1 SetData a Local HMI LW 0 1 TRACE LWO d a end macro_command For the detailed usage of TRACE function please refer to the illustration in the following paragraph 540 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Macro a macro command main Short a GetData a Local HMI LW 1 a a 1 SetData a Local HMI LW 1 TRACE LWO d aj end macro command Macro undi Secondly add Numeric Display and Function Key objects in window 10 o
11. Attribute No of word 1 Mode External trigger Ww Trigger mode ON OFF np Trigger address 323 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 24 Backup Overview The backup function can store the recipe data RW RW_A event log and sampling data to USB device or Remote backup server The LB 9039 represents the backup status when backup operation is in progress the status of LB 9039 is ON Configuration Click Backup Object icon on the toolbar the Backup Object dialogue box will show up See the pictures below 324 2 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual New Backup Object Eg General Security Shape Label Description POJICE ORW OREW A Historical event log Historical data sampling Backup postion USB 1 CSB 2 OSD card Note Use L W 9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printen backup server to stove data to a remote PL Enable the server in System Parameter Printen Backup Server settogs nave format Format MTS000 Event Log File Mevt Range Stat Today Yesterday min Trigger Mode External trigger bit Condition OFF gt ON wal Trigger address Setting Description RW RW_A Historical event log Historical data sampling Select one from the above for the source There may be several data sampling objects registered in the project If you select H
12. Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual gt MT500 Settings Step 1 In EB500 System Parameter Setting set Multiple HMI Slave HMI HMI link speed 115200 Note Set the same Baud Rate in MT500 and MT8000 oystem Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux PLC type MITSUBISHI FXOwFE2 k HMI model MTSIOTMTEDST 640 x480 v FLC LF port Bad rate Data bits Parity stop bits Parameter 1 Tum around delay Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 HMI station no PLC station na Multiple HMI ERT HMI HMI link speed 115200 Connect LF Local IF address server IF address e e subnetwork mask wo f E Default route IF address FLC time out constant gec 3 PLC block pack Step 2 Double click on PLC Address View exe to check PLC ID No and fill in Parameter 1 of MT8000 678 WonHM Word FLO _ I gg9g s000 WonkGM RWI aa er o BHMD WorkGM M EW dd Jess 0 Note There will always be a PLC selected in EB500 system parameters setting in this case even to read write MT8000 Local Data only the ID of selected PLC in EB500 syst
13. Reboot HMI after download Checking this HMI will reboot after finishing downloading Automatically using current If this is checked system will download project to settings to download after HMI according to last settings compiling Click Download to start downloading the project 41 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 4 Hardware Settings 4 1 I O Ports of HMI 4 1 1 USB Port Support devices with USB interface such as mouse keyboard USB stick printer etc 4 1 2 Ethernet Port Connect devices with Ethernet communication interface such as PLC laptop etc support exchanging data via Network 4 1 3 CF Card or SD Card Download Upload project via CF Card or SD Card including Recipe transfer Event Log Data Log etc 4 1 4 Serial I O Port COM ports RS 232 RS485 2W 4W can be connected to PLC or other peripheral devices Here we view RS 422 the same as RS 485 4 wire Please refer to the PLC connection 42 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual guide to make sure that PLC and HMI are correctly connected Meanwhile please make sure all DIP switches at the back of HMI are pulled down means off the default value In addition Weintek provides MT8 COM1 Multi Connector cable and MT8 COM3 Multi Connector cable to expand one COM port to multiple independent COM ports so that the convenience and efficiency of the operation can be improved 4 2 HMI Syst
14. This function converts a decimal string to floats It converts the decimal string in source parameter into float and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than 0 to 9 or it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 10 12 345 float result bool success success1 StringDecAsc2Float src1 0O result success1 true result1 is 12 345 float result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Float 1 234567890 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 which might result in loss of precision char src3 2 4b float result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Float src3 0 result3 success3 false because src3 contains characters other than O to 9 or I 489 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual O mamao command OOOO O StringFloat2DecAsc Syntax success StringFloat2DecAsc source destination start Description This function converts a float to a decimal string It converts the float in source
15. dialogue box appears similarly click the Alarm display icon on the toolbar the Alarm display dialogue box appears fill in the setting in the General tab and press the OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below 308 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Alarm Bar Object Alam shape Font Include categories o thn o ize d larm Event Log object Transparent Frome a Backeround a Format ort O Time ascending Time desending Order amp Characters Dilys Event tigger date Event trigger date Event tigger time Event trigger time Event mesage Event message If Display chars is 0 it means that the system will display all of characters Date MM DD YY w Tome HH MM SS al Setting Description Include Select category of events that belongs to the alarm display or alarm categories bar object category of an event is set in event log 309 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example if the category of an alarm bar is set to 2 4 it will display all the alarm messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter Scroll Speed Set the scroll speed of alarm bar Set frame and background color of alarm bar a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the l
16. 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 613 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read Write Control Local Remote HMI HMI R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 10067 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10068 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC mos ji IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10069 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote LW 10300 16bit remote PLC 1 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10301 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP1 IP address maor IP0 IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10302 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP2 IP address mee IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10303 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP3 IP address mes IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10304 16bit remote PLC 1 s port no EAE AES LW 10305 16bit remote PLC 2 s IPO IP address eee rie CIEIE2 L
17. 3666 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3665 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3664 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3663 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3662 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3662 3661 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 ae ie ee Sper tten teman ata ranean tren tinnanrt at BIND T d Aino UF Profile Set color of frame and background If it is set as transparent the frame and color background will be ignored Time and Date Time ascending Time ascending means to put the earlier data in the top and the latest data in the bottom 4 oaar eor 2 T Z 00 24 28 1610907 4 4 0 24 29 16 09 07 EZEZ 3 Co 0 24 30 16 09 07 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Time descending Time descending means to put the latest data in the top and the earlier data in the bottom Le 4780 22 23 54 16 09 07 3 2 4779 23 53 16 09 07 l AFT ID T ATRIOS 2 a 4 History The history files are named with date code The history control is used to Control select the designated history data files for display In case the value of history control is O the latest file is selected If it is 1 the second latest file is selected and so on Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of History control Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 276 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew History Data Display Object Hh General Data
18. 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 5 Pass Through The pass through function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI In this function the HMI acts as a converter Pass through provides two types of modes Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through button on Project Manager to start the settings For more information please refer to related chapter 2 5 1 Ethernet 27 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pass through Ethernet O com port Virtual COM Port PG lt gt PLO coms PLO Connection Port HM lt gt PLC H Al IP 192 169 200 Stop Pass through CO 1 v Uninstall 2 5 2 COM port 28 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pass through Ethernet com port Hbl IF Get Hh Communication Parameters Hdl work mode Unknown source COM Port PG He Oh 1 Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Mone Stop bits Destination COM Por HM PLO Cob 2 il Baud rate gA00 Data bits Parity none Stop bits Start Pass through Stop Pass through 29 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder8000 Project In this Chapter we will take Mitsubishi PLC as an example to illustrate how to create and compile a new EB8000 project to simulate it on PC and to download the project to HMI 3 1 Create a New Project First of all click New icon on the toolbar to create a new pr
19. A new Picture Library TEST will be added to the Picture Library dialogue At this moment there is no Picture in the library 401 We WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Library TEST ste oft 2 3jf4 s td Total states 0 0 0 Graph name Image size 0 0 0 0 Step 2 Prepare the pictures to be added suppose the two graphs below are used to represent state 0 and state 1 respectively Click Import Picture and a dialogue appears as below Set Picture no and Picture name for it and then click Next Import Pice Picture Picture no Picture name F YELLOYY Step 3 When the dialogue below is shown select the source of picture for state 0 and select the correct transparent color In the example below the blue color RGB 0 0 255 is a transparent color After the settings of the state O are completed click Next button to continue the settings of the other state 402 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Get Piche Picture file State T C Documents and Settings bmp State Width 105 Height 104 Size 329 18bytes e Transparent T 0 255 E lt Before choosing transparent color check Transparent box first and then left click on location to be of the graph At this time EB8000 will automatically display RGB value of the transparent color Take above as an example the actual shape shown as below Step 4 Likewise select the sou
20. After setting completed click OK EasyDiagnoser operation window appears as below Ww Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Options Help Cmd PID Device St Index Address Length Time Error Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 15 15 22 Looking for the target FMI 15 15 22 Connection established with the target HMI i 41 Local Hhil a LB 00562 1 o 0 Local Htl LB 00574 1 BY 32 SIEMENS S7300 Mi 00000 fF 4 68 14 SIEMENS 57300 E D8610 00000 14 728 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 33 2 EasyDiagnoser Settings t Alt D Cit Altt P Cot Alt tt Alt Options ptos Help iy Status Bay Update Package List F5 Show Object ID HM Clear Activity List Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel U Weintek MT Diagnostic Click Device Bar to display Device window Click Package Bar to display Package window Click Logger Bar to display Logger window Click Output Bar to display Output window Toolbars Display toolbar icons of Device Bar Package Bar Logger Bar Output Bar W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser Show Status Bar At the bottom of EasyDiagnoser window display information of CAP NUM and SCRL Update Package List When users change window in HMI update the Polling Package information of current window with t
21. Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 3 5 The checksum bytes 13 and 14 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 12 30 41 52 44 30 31 30 30 30 33 03 22E 713 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2E 32 4 1 2 Reply The reply length is L N 4 8 Where N the number of requested devices If the command is successful the reply length will be at least 12 bytes but could be as long as 404 bytes It consists of the STX followed by four bytes for each requested device then the ETX and Checksum H Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes en 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 L 7 Station Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data N 1 Byte Byte L 2 L 41 L The example above returns the following assuming the HMI contains the following data Address Data The following is the packet sent from the HMI 02H 30H 41H 52H 44H 30H 30H 34H 42H 31H 46H 36H 46H 33H 46H 43H 31H 714 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 03H 43H 32H The values in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 L 2 In the event of an error the reply is NAK Station R D Err Code 32 4 2 WD Batch Write 32 4 2 1 Request This command writes up to 99 consecutive 16 bit items to the LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 4 14 W
22. CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 526 E WE NTEK HIBYTE checksum command 7 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro_command The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of 0x_1 The request uses Write Single Coil Ox5 command Request Function code iByte 0x05 Response Function code 1Byte 0x05 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error 0x85 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 The complete macro is as follows Write Single Coil ON macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short i return_ value FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0O 0 32 527 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 Ox5 function code write single coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force Ox_1 on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7
23. Extended Memory Printer Backup Server j General Svetem Setting l Security E5 Filh Device Properties Kame Barcode USB COM O l OHMI PLC Location aes The settings are detailed respectively below Barcode Device Settings COM COM a a Baud rate 9600 0 oy Data bits Settings Parity No Tse a start code Stop bits 1 Bit start code Terminator CRLF OSTHETE Other 0 O None JE E E 4 14 570 We WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Barcode Device Settings COM aa Read byte limit Loo o M me l ai Baud rate Data bits Pae Use a start code oae tart code 23 Tenninator CRLF OSTZETX Other 0 O None a COM Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits When use COM interface please set the communication parameters of barcode device accordingly When USB interface is used the parameters needn t to be set Read byte limit This function will restrict the number of byte to read in order to prevent barcode device from reading too much data The range is 10 512 For example When Read byte limit is set to 10 if the data the barcode device should read 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 0x33 0x38 12 bytes Only the first 10 bytes will be read in this case 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 Use a
24. If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 716 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 3 RR Random Read 32 4 3 1 Request This command reads up to 99 independently addressed 16 bit items from the LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 4 8 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 12 bytes long but can be up to 402 bytes long H Bytes Bytes Bytes yis Bipi 2 3 4 5 6 9 L 7 10 1 STX Statio Addr Addr Addr 3 AddrN ETX Check s bil had Mad al a F 79 Rl id Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the first address from which to retrieve data Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 13 This is the second address from which to retrieve data Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 14 L 7 The remaining addresses from which to retrieve data Each address must be 4 bytes long 717 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 32 4 3 2 Reply If successful the reply length is L N 4 8 Where N the number of requested devices If successful the reply length will be at least 12 bytes but can be up to 406 bytes It consists of the STX followed by four bytes for each requested dev
25. OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 return_value read response end macro_command 528 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 10 Compiler Error Message 1 Error Message Format error c error description is the error message number Example error C37 undeclared identifier When there are compile errors the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number 2 Error Description C1 syntax error identifier There are many possibilities to cause compiler error For example macro_command main char i 123xyz this is an unsupported variable name end macro_command C2 identifier used without having been initialized Macro must define the size of an array during declaration For example macro_command main char int gli i must be a numeric constant end macro_command C3 redefinition error identifier The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique For example macro_command main int g 10 gt g error end macro_command 529 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C4 function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function For example sub int if error C5 parentheses have not come in pairs Statement missing or Y For example macro command main missing
26. RT 5 1 end macro_command device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is 474 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_offset is the address offset in the PLC For example SetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 lf address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example SetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address_ offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the send_data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_ data send char 8 0 2 boote oao o
27. Shane Label Read address PLO name MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 WF Setting Invert signal Write addres PLC name MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 w Setting Write when button is released aerate Swithsbie SHORF Macro 32 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual A project with an object is completed as shown below EasyHuilder 8000 MTF 10 WINDOW 010 EB File Edit View Option Drew Objects Libary Tools Window Help SER S ee ee a 7 SP CO Oe Al Tonos 10 WINDOW_O10 x p 3 Fast Selection L A Common Window 5 PLC Respons 6 HMI Connection c T Password Restriction S 10 WINDOW 010 i T80 8 1 Y 1 Be 11 aul Es E 9 H me p lt og h EEE ila F ic the EL pa e Ah Left alignment MTEI 640 x 48 33 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 2 Save and Compile the Project In the menu select File then select Save file will be saved as mtp file After file is saved select Tools then select Compile to compile the project and check if the project can run correctly A xob file will be obtained after correctly compiling A xob file is needed while downloading to HMI Compie an A successfully compiled file will get the dialog as below Project name C Documents and Settings Nicolas MTP 1omtp OB fle name C Documents and Settings Nicolas MTP 1 ob ZOB password used in decomp
28. Upload Password Password for uploading the project Download Password Password for downloading the project Upload History Password Password for uploading the historical data Password confirmation 50 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual d History For clearing the history data in HMI Recipe Eventlog and Datalog system settings e Miscellaneous Use the rolling bottom on the screen to adjust the brightness of LCD 51 We WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual system settings ras Security Misc ory ime r setting Backligh Network Time Date NAUAN Brightness Download settin Cancel f Upgrade firmware For users to upgrade firmware or to enable portrait mode Supported only by series System settings Da Network Time Date Securit Firmware setting tg Upgrade OO pununnununnununnununnununnnnnnn punusuunusnununnnnnunnnnnnnnnn tt will pe effect at next reboot Cancel unnunnnnnunnununnununnnn ee eee eee eee eee eee 52 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual g CF card Status When new external device is detected this function will be enabled Netword Time Date Secunty History Backl CF card Download Upload Download Project Upload Project Restart Project and_exit_ h VNC server Allows users to monitor and control the remote HMI throu
29. Users can also set address in Limits tab while adding a new object Please refer to the following dialog 3 Dynamit limit There following table shows the read address of low limit and high limit The Address means the registers address If the register is LW100 the Address is 100 Data format Low limit s read High limit s read address address 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 To select the attribute of scale label on meter display ocal label J Use scale label Font Arial Color 7 No of decimal O 261 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 17 Trend Display Overview Trend display object can use the curve to represent the data recorded by data sampling object The sampling operation is conducted by data sampling objects The trend display object display the result of sampling The following picture shows an example of trend display object 17 32 41 12 03 06 MARANA DAN pv Configuration Click the Trend Display icon on the toolbar and the Trend Display Objects Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press the OK button and a new Trend Display Object will be created See the picture below W age The following picture shows the General tab in the Trend Display Objects Properties dialogue box 262 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Trend Display Object General Trend Channel Shane Descript
30. gt event is acknowledged 2 gt event returns to normal Within Select the range of time period for example Select Yesterday in Start and select 2 day s It means to save the files yesterday and the day before yesterday Select All to save all the files available in the system Range tart Today O Yesterday Within Athabute 327 L WE NTEK Attribute EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual There are two ways to activate Backup function a Touch trigger Touch the object to activate backup operation b External trigger bit Register a bit device to trigger the backup operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate backup operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate backup operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate backup operation Trigger address When use External trigger assign an appropriate bit device as shown below Trigger Mode Extemal trigger bit Condition OFF OH Trigeer address PLO name kaei HMI tyt Setting Address LG c External trigger word When selecting External trigger word users can specify the number of days to backup data using Trigger address 328 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Trigger Mode Extermal tigger word Trigger addres PL name Local HMI Address Ly Trigger address usage suppose the curre
31. s Manual 34 4 Miscellaneous e Revising member data Directly double click on the data member to be revised in the main window or click on the data member then press Edit e Deleting data member Select the data to be deleted then click Delete For deleting all data members press and hold Delete button on the keyboard then click the Delete button in the main editing window e Adjusting the order of data members After selecting a single data member use the move up and move down buttons in main window to adjust the order This makes selecting items in EB8000 easier e Deleting data type In the list on the left side of the main window select the data type to be deleted then press Delete on the keyboard A confirming window pops up click Yes to start deleting e Saving the result of revision After revising Save button in main window must be clicked Restart EB8000 the result of revision can be viewed e To Re edit For giving up all revision done and to re edit click Reload button in main window 748 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 34 5 Module Defined Here is an example showing how to define a default structure for a module In I O Configuration of RSLogix contains setting of I O module a rO Configuration Backplane Compactbogix System Aa 1769 L32E L32E 1769 L32E Ethemet Port LocalENB gt Ethermet pais compactBus Local a 1 1769 10164 A 2 1769 10327 f 2 1769 OB
32. s Manual Read Write Control Local Remote HMI HMI R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 596 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 12 Index Register Read Write Control Address Description 16bit address index 0 16bit address index 1 16bit address index 2 16bit address index 3 16bit address index 4 LW 9206 16bit address index 6 LW 9207 16bit address index 7 LW 9208 16bit address index 8 LW 9205 16bit address index 5 RW RM RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Lw 9209 16bit address index Rw Lw 9210 16bit address index 10 Rw 1w 9211 16bit address index 11 Rw Lw 9212 16bit address index 12 Rw 1w 9213 16bit address index 13 Rw LW 9214 16bit address index 14 RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW HMI R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W LW 9215 16bit address index 15 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W 32bit address index 17 32bit address index 18 32bit address index 19 32bit addres
33. security Shape Content Setting Description The picture shows the Font tab of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII display object Users can set the font font size font color and aligning mode A thaibute Font Comic mans Me v Color mize 12 v Alien Left v 224 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Align There are two aligning modes Left and Right The picture below shows how each mode performs Left alignment ab bde Right alignment ab bde Size Set font size 225 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 11 Indirect Window Overview Indirect Window object is to define a popup window location position size and a word device When the content of the word device is written a valid window number the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the value of the word device is reset 0 The system will only take action when the content of word device is changed 0 valid window number nonzero 0 A B valid window number Configuration Click the Indirect Window icon on the toolbar and the New Indirect Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items click OK button a new Indirect Window Object will be created See the pictures below a u z Indirect Window 226 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Ind
34. several selections are available as follows Under the condition system will read values from Read address and compare them with the trigger conditions to decide if an event is to be triggered If the trigger condition is set as or lt gt In tolerance and Out tolerance need be set while In tolerance is used as trigger condition and Out tolerance is used as system s normal condition Example 1 Condition Trigger it value is In tolerance Chit tolerance The illustration above indicates that if the value of Read address is greater or equal to 29 30 1 or less or equal to 31 30 1 the event 111 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual will be triggered 29 lt Read address value lt 31 After the event is triggered only when the value of Read address is greater than 32 30 2 or less than 28 30 2 will the system return to normal condition Read address value lt 28 or Read address value gt 32 Example 2 Condition Triger it value is e Take another example above it indicates that the event is triggered when the value of Read address is less than 29 30 1 or greater than 31 30 1 Read address value lt 29 or Read address value gt 31 When the event is triggered system returns to normal condition only when the value of Read address is greater or equal to 28 30 2 or less or equal to 32 30 2 28 lt Read address value lt 32 Mess
35. zi Char name 20 admin 3 Char password e20 123456 4 char name input 20 z char password input z20 6 char message Success 40 success Access Accepted 7 char message fall 40 Fail Access Denied g char message clear 40 g bool name match false 10 bool password match false iL 12 StringGet name input 0 Local HMI LW 20 13 stringset password input 0 Local HMI LW 50 20 14 name match stringtompare name input 0 name 0 15i password match stringCompare password input 0 password 16 iz FILL message clear O 0x20 40 FILL with white space 15 stringset message clear 0 Local HMI LW 100 40 15 if name mateh true and password mateh true then 20 stringset message success 0 Local HMI LW LOO 40 21 elise 22 stringset message fail 0 Local HMI LW 100 40 23 L end if 24 end macro conmand 554 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The first two StringGet functions will read the strings input by users and store them into arrayS named name_input and password_input separately Use the function StringCompare to check if the input account name and password are matched If the account name is matched name_match is set true if the password is matched password match is set true If both name_match and password match are true output the string Success Access Accepted Otherwise output the string Fail Access Denied
36. 3 480x234 bmp 2S m 640x480 bmp 4 480x272 bmp 800x480 bmp 5 640x480 bmp Z 800x600 bmp 6 800x480 bmp mi 1024x768 bmp 7 800x600 bmp n com exe 8 1024x768 bmp p EasySimulator exe E Qui exe 9 com exe xob_pos def 10 EasySimulator exe 11 gui exe 12 xob_pos def Users can find all the above files in EasyBuilder installation directory which means users have to install EasyBuilder software package on a PC and copy the files to the target PC 668 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 27 2 Modify the Content of xob_pos def Step 1 Open xob_pos def using a text editing tool e g Notepad and set the contents correctly xob_pos Notepad File Edit Format View Help foperation mode off line 1 on line cr yEasysimulatar ee define the directory oF com exe and qui exe cryEasysimulatorsMTso00_Demo_s00 eo0 xob define the directory of xob Tile O Perform Offline simulation 1 Perform Online simulation Specify the full path where the files e g com exe gui exe EasySimulator exe etc locate Easy Simulator exe Easy Simulator MFC Application MT B056 bmp MTS070 bmp gui exe a neh x 390 bee x 456 Bitmap Image Bitmap Image MT8100 brmp MT8104 brop MT8121 bmp 966 x 762Z A ola 614 1036 77 Bitmap Image i Bitmap Image Bitmap Image MTS150 bmp amp xob pos def 1267 x 963 Export Definition File Bitmap Image D a e E EAS Step 3 ON L
37. 560 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EasyBuilders000 A Password error three times Please restart this application Caution When MACRO is password protected decompilation of XOB file will not be able to restore MACRO contents 561 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 19 Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 Setting HMI as MODBUS Device Once HMI is set as MODBUS Server the data of HMI can be read or written via MODBUS protocol MODBUS Server MODBUS Server 7A Ethernet Ethernet 2 z b mt 7 MODELS Server MODELS Server i RS2I2 RS485 i pS232RS485 pi p s 2 e Refer to the illustration above it shows HMI is set as MODBUS Server The HMI PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write the data from HMI via Ethernet or RS232 485 interface Please follow the steps as below OOOOS LM OOOOS LM 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server First of all add a new device MODBUS Server in the Device tab of System Parameter Settings The PLC I F can be set to RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W Ethernet 562 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings Device Model Genesi System Setting Security Device list Device Properties Name MoDBUS Serer S 23 XW d OHMI PLC Location Local vi
38. Block Interval Swords Wax Read Length 256 words hax Write Length 256 words J index Type Mame SIEMENS S 300 Ethernet Location Local PLE WF Ethernet 1 92 166 1 97 1 Block Interval S words Wax Read Length 20 words B Wax Write Length 20 words 4 Output Macro debug With Trace function offered by Macro the executing status of Macro can be seen Please refer to EB8000 user s manual Chapter 18 MACRO for more information In illustration below for ID 2 Ln 7 and ID 2 Ln 8 ID 2 represents Macro name Ln 7 and Ln 8 represent that they are in 7 and 8 lines of Macro W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool FasyDiagnoser File View phons Help Hh A Chtpaut C x ID 2 Ln 7 The results are A ID 2 Ln 8 c1 a s1 324767 fl 1 234567 D 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 342767 fl 1 234567 ID 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 34767 fl 1 234567 ID 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 324767 fl 1 234567 ID 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 32767 fl 1 234567 D 2 Ln 7 The results are M 4 735 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 33 3 Error Code In activity area users can find the reason of error through error codes listed below 0 Normal 1 Time out 2 Fail Error 12 Ignore When error occurs error message will be shaded red as shown below The error code is 1 since PLC is discon
39. Copies the selected macro into the clipboard Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list and creates a new name for the macro Step 2 Press the New button to open a blank WorkSpace editor Every macro has a unique number defined in Macro ID edit box and macro name must exist otherwise an error will appear while compiling 517 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WorkSpace Macro ID 29 Macro name macro_test macro_command maing end mac ro_ comma ndl Step 3 Design your macro If it is necessary to use build in functions like SetData or Getdata press Get Set FN button to open API dialog and select the function and set essential parameters 518 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Function name 5etData data O Local HMI LW 0 4 Variable 1 Variable type short 16 bit Variable data Array index O Read address PLC name Device Type Address Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Data count 4 Description Read data from a device Usage GetData desti PLC name device type address data count Example char byData 10 Step 4 After the completion of a new macro press Compile button to compile the macro 519 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WorkSpace Macro name macro_test macro_command maing short data 4 GetData data 0 Local HMI LW 0
40. Data 3 Data 1 Y Data 3 Y Data 1 A Data lf dynamic limit is checked you may change the high and low limits to realize zoom in and zoom out function Please refer trend display object s dynamic limit In the following example the dynamic limit is selected where XL X low limit XH X high limit YL Y low limit YH Y high limit and XY XY1 XY2 are three XY data Now we change the high limit of X and Y respectively and you may observe the effect of zoom in and zoom out 301 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 Change Y high limit to 25 for zoom in effect o e fo fa sf fo fs ffx 2 Change Y high limit to 100 for zoom out effect 2 so Oo 100 sf fio 4s 302 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Display Area tab Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shape Profile color Transparent Curve Pen property ge ee Line C Foint O E axis projection C Y axis projection Reference line Limit from PLC 2 Hiit Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 Cancel Setting Description Profile Enable Transparent It will not display the background color color Disable Transparent It will display the background color Curve Set the attribute of XY curve color and width for each channel 303 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Channel Channel 0 ne Pen property Color mn Width 1 iv
41. Event Use L W94 50 9455 as time tage of event logs BCD w Bsta no otevents 0 Eeyboard 55 Keypad 6 ote ger Add 56 Keypad 7 HEX 57 Keypad 8 Floating 60 ASCII Middle 61 As I small 200 keyboard After a Keyboard object is created when open the Numeric Input or ASCII Input object 200 Keyboard can be found in Keyboard Data Entry tab as shown below Popup Position is used to decide the display position of the Keyboard in screen 163 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EB8000 divides the screen into 9 areas Eewboard Use a popup keypad Window no 200 keyboard wv Popup position Oo relative to HMI screen O 0 O O O Hint If the keyboard isan USB keyboard on indirectdirect window or on the same window please don tcheck Use a popup keypad Select 200 Keyboard When users press Numeric Input or ASCII Input object WINDOW 200 will pop up in HMI screen Users can press keys in keyboard to input data 164 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window If users don t need the title bar of the keyboard a direct window can be used as follows Step 1 Create a Direct window and set a read address to activate it In General Attribute tab of adding new object dialogue select No title bar and Window no New Direct Window Object Ed Read address PLO name fe
42. First use the drawing tools to draw a graph in the window and select the graph to be added to the Shape Library EasyBuilder 8000 MIPI 10 FINDOW OID EB Fil Bait View Option Daw Ghetu Library Tools Window Help D k nnno BFR Be Aly Ry Ta Ch Ge A TC oe Ore Oc 4 TIT xX 10 WINDOWOU x a bist z 3 Fatt Selecbon 4 Common Window 3 PLC Response 6 HMI Connection T Password Resticton 5 g 10 WINDOW O10 Chick the Save to Shape Library button in toolbar and the following dialogue appears save to Shape Library TENE E JEJ hape library TEST Description Untitled x Oo a shape no i Pi Frame Inner Width T7 Height 73 Frame gt undefined Inner undefined Cea Setting Description Shape library Select the Shape Library for the graph to be added to In this example TEST library is selected The name of the Shape The number in Shape Library current graph will be added in Select the state of the Shape which this graph represents In this case the state is set 0 EB8000 provides 256 states for each 395 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual o Sse lf Frame is selected the graph will become a frame of the Shape lf Inner is selected the graph will become an inner part of the Shape This part shows the current status of the shape at this moment shape no
43. MS Excel format Please refer to the next section for the details of Convert Batch File e Users can assign HMI names from LW9032 to LW9039 e EasyPrinter names the folder after IP address if HMI name is not set 663 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 4 Convert Batch File EasyPrinter provides a mechanism for converting the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log history files stored in binary mode to CSV files automatically Users requesting this function have to prepare a Convert Batch File to provide EasyPrinter with the information of how to convert the history files Backu p gt dtl gt S e Ethernet evt MT8000 EasyPrinter Convert Batch File EasyConverter As shown in the illustration above the conversion is actually carried out by EasyConverter EasyPrinter simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper arguments to achieve the conversion EasyConverter is another Win32 application converting history data into CSV or MS Excel xls files Users can find it in the EasyBuilder 8000 installation directory Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in the same directory 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File The following is the default Convert Batch File included in the EasyBuilder 8000 software package dtl EasyConverter c PathName evt EasyConverter c Path
44. New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Deskiog Device Properties Name Remote HMI HMI OPLE Location i Setmes IP 192 168 1 11 Fort 8000 Interval of block pack words Setting Description HMI or PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC Location Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case and set the IP address and Port no of the remote HMI Click Settings of Location to set these the dialogue is shown below 70 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The Port no of remote HMI can be seen in Model in System parameters once the mtp file of remote HMI is opened The port no of remote HMI and local HMI must be the same IF Address Sethngs Ethernet IP address 192 168 Port no 8000 cancel After all settings are completed a new device named Remote HMI is added to the Device list Name Location Device type Interface Local Local HMI Local MTh Nid Wa N Local MITSUBISHI F Local MITSUBISHI F COM1 t96 Red 0 Rem SIEMENS 37200 RemotedP 192 169 1 10 F SIEMENS S72 COM1 06 Ret 2 Rem EiS FemoteF 192 168 1 11 F MTret Ethemet TC Nid 71 hana z Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 2 Model Parameters in Model tab determine the HMI model Timer
45. Set the HMI name to download upload a project Network Time Date Securit HMI name setting hg HMI name Default HMI 56 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 2 2 5 Touch Screen Calibration Mode Cow cri PIFRE TSLIB calibration utility Touch crosshair to calibrate In this mode when users power on MT8000 series the screen will display a sign upper left of the screen Use a stylus or finger to touch the center of the until it moves The moves to upper left upper right lower left lower right and center of screen When all five are touched the will disappear The Touch Screen parameter will be stored at Flash Rom Note Only X series HMI are with this shortcut of touch screen calibration mode in system toolbar For other series please use DIP switch 1 to adjust 57 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 3 HMI Download Settings A project or data can be downloaded to HMI via SD card or USB disk Insert SD card or USB disk and designate the directory path All contents under this directory will be downloaded to HMI When HMI detects new external devices the following screen appears CF card Status Download Upload Se Upload _ Restart Project and exit_ Cancel Several functions can be selected at this time and some of them need password confirmation as illustrated below Download Settings ran Password I After the pass
46. When performing start action the system will write this value into action address Write start value e For Constant Designates the value to be written at start time For Address Designates the address used to store the start time value Write end value When performing end action the system will write this value into action address e For Constant Designates the value to be written at end time For Address Designates the address used to store the end time value e You can use this option if the Enable termination action in Time Set tab is selected E Time Set tab when Constant is selected 364 pu WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Addes Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fa End Enable termination action Cancel Setting Description Constant Addres_ Select the method to set the start time and end time S e Constant Specifies a fixed time and day Address The start end time is retrieved from the device address at on line operation Setting on Enable individual day Start time and end time can be set in different day of week There is only one start time and one end time during the week You have to set both start time and end time with this mode 365 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 l l Monday Tuesd
47. address EB8000 saves the sampled data to the user assigned location The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl Storage location can be HMI SD CF card USB1 or USB2 which is designated by users Filename is usually a name defined by user This name can t be used repeatedly by other sampled data files yyyymmdd shows when the file is built and is set by the system automatically EB8000 provides the following system registers for data sampling management Address Description LB 9025 delete the earliest data sampling file on HMI memory set ON LB 9026 delete all data sampling files on HMI memory set ON LB 9027 refresh data sampling information on HMI memory set ON LB 11951 refresh data sampling information on SD card set ON 117 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 118 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 8 1 Data Sampling Management Before using Trend display or History data display objects to review the content of data sampling the method of how the data is sampled has to be defined Click Data Sampling on the toolbar and then Data Sampling Object dialog appears as below Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop Setting Descri ption New Add a new data sampling definition Delete a specific data sampling definition Settings Modify a data sampling defin
48. and so on 145 10 2 Security of Objects Hew Fonchon Key Object General necurity Shape Label matety contol Min press tome fc 0 P Max waiting time sec 10 Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled C Graved label when disabled Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF PLL name Local HMI wt Setting Address Le fT User restriction Objctelas L Disable protection permanently after initial activation C Display warming message if access denied C Make invisible while protected sownd Epahble Sound Library Sound Index Default Flaw EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee ee Safety control Safety control is mainly used to prevent operator miss operating an object accidentally There are two methods for protection Min press time sec Only when pressing the object continuously longer than the time set here can an object to be activated successfully Display confirmation request After pressing the object a confirm dialog appears Users need to click 146 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Yes to confirm executing If response to this dialog comes later than the set Max waiting time sec the dialog will disappear automatically and the operation will be canceled AN Please confirm the operation Message text The one above is Please confirm the ope
49. clear all Recipe Date and return to 0 421 Nols ce NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 18 Macro Reference Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need Macros are automated sequences of commands that are executed at run time Macros allow you to perform tasks such as complex scaling operations string handling and user interactions with your projects This chapter describes syntax usage and programming methods of macro commands 18 1 Instructions to the Macro Editor 2 Macro editor provides the following new functions d b h displaying line number Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Select All Toggle Bookmark Previous Bookmark Next Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Toggle All Outlining The instructions below show you how to use these new functions 3 Open the macro editor you ll see the line numbers displayed on the left hand side of the edit area 422 Lid ee WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual fl sABEeB soe OS OFA wp Macro Macro list ID 2 10000 D 3 5000 Works pace macro command maini end macro command edit area Click the right mouse button to display edit menu 4 Right click on the edit area to open the pop up menu as shown below Undo Chit Redo Ctl Y Cut Ct Copy Ctrl Faste Chl elect All Cili Toggle Bookmark CtltF2 Next Bookmark F2 Previous Bookmark hft Fa Clear All Bookmarks T
50. lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements return value end sub Example sub int Add int x int y int result result x y return result end sub macro_command main int a 10 b 20 sum sum Add a b end macro command or sub int Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y return result end sub 446 Ly WE NTEK macro_command main int sum sum Add end macro_command Definition of function without return type sub lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements end sub EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Example sub Add int x int y int result result x y end sub macro_command main int a 10 b 20 Add a b end macro_command or sub Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y end sub 447 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual macro_command main Add end macro_command syntax description sub Must be used to begin the function block type Optional This is the data type of value that the function returns A function block is not always necessary to return a value parameters Optional The parameters hold values that are passed to the function by the Main Macro The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter field and assigned a variable name For example sub int MyFunction int x int y x and y would be integers passed to the function by the Main Macro T
51. macro_command main char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret1 ret1 StringCompareNoCase at1 0 b1 0 ret1 true char a2 20 abcde char b2 20 abcde bool ret2 ret2 StringCompareNoCase a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg 496 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual bool ret3 ret3 StringCompareNoCase a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false end macro_command position StringFind source start target start position StringFind source target start position StringFind source start target position StringFind source target Description Return the position of the first occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char target1 20 cd bool pos pos1 StringFind src1 0 target1 0 pos1 2 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 pos2 StringFind abcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcde bool pos3 pos3 StringFind src3 3 cd pos3 1 end macro_command 497 N WE N
52. periodically When Time Set are specified as Address and start time and end time is over valid range the system may not execute operation properly When Time Set are specified as Address the action will not start up until time data update is Success 373 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 29 Option List Overview An Option List displays a list of items that the user can view and select Once the user selects an item the value corresponding to the item will be written to a word register There are two forms for this object Listbox and Drop down list The listbox lists all items and highlights the selected one However the drop down list normally displays only the selected item Once the user touches it the system will display a listbox which is similar to the one with Listbox style beneath the object Listbox Drop down list 14 Apr 2009 14 Apr 2009 il 13 Apr 2009 i 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 kd 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 09 Apr 2009 w Configuration Click the Option List icona Option List object properties dialogue box appears as follows 374 me WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual g New Option List Object Ed Option list Mapping Security Shape Label Derion o Attibute Mode Backgrount selechon Direction Sows of iem data Monitor address PLC name Local HMI
53. request s starting address MODBUS server COM 2 LW 9277 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM 2 LW 9280 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9281 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9282 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9285 16bit request s function code MODBUS server ethernet LW 9286 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server ethernet LW 9287 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server ethernet 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no R W R W R W LW 9541 599 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual po feeomty a a LW 9542 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no R W R W R W COM 2 LW 9543 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no R W R W R W COM 3 LW 9544 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no R W R W R W ethernet LW 9570 32bit received data count bytes COM 1 MODBUS server LW 9572 32bit received data count bytes COM 2 ee tone e pede fe LW 9574 32bit received data count bytes COM 3 ee tone a pede fe LW 9576 32bit received data count bytes Ethernet er soos es petite 600 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings Read Write Control Address Description Remote HMI HMI 52068 aw Rw L 9067 w Rw LW 9550 16bit COM 1 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 N R RI 2W 2 RS4
54. s Manual Press Start Pass through and HMI work mode is switched into Pass through Users can execute on line simulation Now PC application can control PLC via HMI and HMI is acting as a converter at this moment Note The communication between HMI and PLC will be paused when pass through is active If users want to resume communication between HMI and PLC please press Stop Pass through to disable this function 692 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function Other way to enable pass through is to use LW 9901 LW 9902 to set source COM port and destination COM port directly When the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 match conditions as below HMI will start pass through automatically a The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 have to be 1 or 2 or 3 1 COM 1 2 COM 2 3 COM 3 b The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 should not be the same Note If users want to stop pass through just change the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 to 0 lf users need to change the communication parameters just change the value in related reserved addresses and set ON to LB 9030 LB 9031 and LB 9032 HMI will be forced to accept new settings LB 9030 Update COM1 communication parameters set ON LB 9031 Update COM2 communication parameters set ON LB 9032 Update COM3 communication parameters set ON 693 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 30 Pro
55. signed decimal integer signed decimal integer O unsigned octal integer u unsigned decimal integer Xorx unsigned hexadecimal integer Eore Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where dis a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or f Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits 509 Lt WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The length of output string is limited to 256 characters The extra characters will be ignored The argument part is optional One format specification converts exactly one argument macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a s1 3276 7 f1 1 234567 end macro command Name FindDataSamplingDate return_value FindDataSamplingDate data_log number index year month day or FindDataSamplingDate data_log number index year month day Descripti A query function for finding the date of specified data sampling file according on to the data sampling no and the file index The date is stored into year month and day respectively in the format of YYYY MM and DD Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold addres i Local HM
56. 0 in state 0 in library Test is with undefined frame and inner Width T7 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined After clicking OK the graph will be added to Shape Library Illustration below shows that Shape No 0 in library Test has only one state state0 and is defined as a frame 0 Untitled States 1 Frame Step 3 Likewise create another Shape state by the same process as in Step 2 but this new graph has to be defined as state 1 396 Lid ts WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual save to Shape Library ehape library TEST w Description Sugeno v seel Frame C Inner Width 7 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined A complete Shape with two states is created See the following picture oie Library Siate O State 1 m BEC E pees EESE EEEH 397 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 14 2 Creating Picture Library Click the Call up Picture Library button in toolbar and the Picture Library dialogue appears E sae Call up Picture Library Pictare Library 2 background O PB Red PB Green 2 PB Yellow 3 PB Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 80054 bytes State O State 11 4 Lamp Red SiLamp Green 6iLamp Yellow 7 Lamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30354 bytes 3005
57. 0x06h to slave Slave receives ACK 0x06h from master N OA When finishing communication slave sending the address and content of MW to master at this time master changes data of MW corresponding to that of Slave then master and slave keep the same data in the same address 704 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Below is an example for communication between two HMI via MemoryMap First of all create a new project in EasyBuilder Edit System Parameter Setting PLC Device Properties ie i Memory Map CHMI PLc Local w F Memory Hap W 1 00 MEMORY_MAP so PLC WF R5 232 E PLC default station no o COM COM1 115200 E 8 1 C Settings COM Port Settings COM comi Timeout sac Baud rate 115200 w Tur around delay ms Data b s 8 Bits v Send ACK delay ms Party Even hil Parameter 1 Stop bits E Bit w Parameter 2 Parameter 3 cree 705 Lyd es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual i Memory Map OHMI PLC Location Local PLC type Memory Map V 1 00 MEMORY_MAP so PLC YF R5 232 v COMI 115200 E 8 1 COM Port Se Things COM COM 1 Timeout sec Baud rate 115200 Tum around delay ms Data bits 8 Bits Send ACK delay ms Panty Even Parameter 1 Stop bits 1 BR Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Note 1 Between two HMI Time out h
58. 1 n Store the data read by barcode device The following is a barcode device setting example the barcode read is 9421007480830 BARCODE 0 is the address of Numeric Display object bytes and BARCODE 1 n is the E address of ASCII Display object barcode Address BARCODE O _ Use a start code mm BYTES Address BARCODE 1 n Terminator cR LE OstTxfETx O Other None BARCODE In the example the data stored by barcode 572 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual device corresponding address are listed below Barcode corresponding address 13 bytes decimal The data saved in this address is 14 bytes 7 words If the number of byte is odd system will add a byte 0x00 to make it even BARCODE 1 3439HEX BARCODE 0 1 USB barcode interface does not support on line simulation 2 HMI now only supports barcode device to connect with one USB interface When Device Table of project includes this kind of device keyboard will be detected as barcode device and LB 9064 will be set to ON automatically when power on For restoring keyboard to normal function and to pause using barcode device set LB 9064 to OFF For restoring barcode device simply set LB 9064 to ON Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 573 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection Through Ethernet ne
59. 10 Data 4 Data 5 Limitation 1 The maximum number of channels is 12 2 The system can draw up to 32 trend curves 3 The system can draw up to 1024 points for each channel 293 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 20 XY Plot Overview XY Plot object displays two dimension data Each data contains X and Y values and each curve is composed of a stream of XY data The maximum number of trend curves in a XY plot is 16 channels Configuration New object Click the XY plot icon ii and XY Plot Object dialog box appears 294 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shane Control Address PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting No of data address Read address PLC name Local HMI h meparated address for X and Y data H data PLE name Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Y data Setting PL name Damamic limits a igh 32767 High 32767 ance Setting Description a Direction There are four selections right left up or down Right Left Right direction Let direction Y Y o origin K origin 295 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Up Down Wp direction origin uf Y inin Y Mi oa Down direction b No of channel set the no of channels of the XY plot Each channel may conduct the draw operation alone Control PLC name address Select the PLC where
60. 3 0x02 Sending byte The byte has to be even due to 4 5 Ox0a MW3 content is Ox0a gt 0x00 Fg OO 6 7 0x10 gt End sign Tes S 0x19 checksum gt 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x 19 Slave received data from master and then sending ACK 0x06h Master receives ACK 0x06h from slave 703 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When finishing communication master sending revised data of MW to slave and slave changes the MW which corresponds to that of master At this time master and slave keep the same data in the same address Another example below the address and data include 0x10 please notice the change in data format Now if we have 0x10 in MW16 in slave according to this protocol slave will communicate with master immediately and master will put 0x10 in data of corresponding MW16 the procedure is as following Slave sending ST X 0x02h Master receives STX 0x02h from slave and sending ACK Ox06h to Slave Slave receives ACK Ox06h from master Slave sending data 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x10 as shown below as 0x10 Address Low byte 0x10 Insert 0x10 0x00 Bit Address High byte 4 0x02 Sending byte MW10 is two bytes oO N K 0x10 0x10 is low byte in MW10 0x10 Insert 0x10 0x00 0x00 in high byte 0x10 gt End sign ee ee 10 0x10 checksum gt 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x 10 0x03 0x10 Master receives data from slave and sending ACK
61. 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide cc ecceceseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 10 1 1 BASYOUNGECE PIO INSLAIAUON sssseccscostscascostsaacsasdsccasendtsaatestisacdendsocasewbtonaieniteccdendsedazok 10 1 2 Sl6p9 t0 Install EaSyBulder PrO eee ees ee eee eee eee 11 Chapter 2 Project Manager Operations cccccccsccseeceeeceeeceeecececeeeseeseueseeeseeeseeeseeeaas 17 2 1 HMI IP ASS WOK i esieseesin sew ecieps dew eaiars earcatnunisie wesinwe Se waeaiewsaicautlvweciansSewewnys dewemeanYeeseeeecewesews 18 ZZ MIN e E E E EE E E E E 20 2 2 1 Steps to Download Project via USB or CF Card sannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 21 PSTN e E E E EE E E AE E 22 Zo DONO e E E E E E E E EE E E E E 22 Zk WI DIOAC eese e E E EE E E EE EEGENEN 23 2A MAO a E E E E 25 2 4 1 On line Simulation Off line Simulation ccc cecceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaes 25 LOP Ou ee ee E er 2 ZW EOE e E a E E E E E E 2 ROL CONTO Cane nnn ence 28 Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder8000 Project cece ecccececececeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaes 30 3 1 Create a New Project ccccecccccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeseeeceeesaeeceeeseeseeeseeeseesaeeseeseeeseeeseeegs 30 3 2 Save and Compile the ProjeCt neve cecscte asecsccaadenecssadeneseeedeneciacdandeasedensaenedesiassedesdasaden 34 3 3 Off line and On line SiMUlatiON cece ccecceeeceeece cece eeaeeseeeseeesaeesaeeseesee
62. 638 25 2 3 How to Use Mullti File CONVErSION ccccccceccceecceeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseesaeesaeeseeens 641 ZOO ENDE EUN FIG osere e E E E E EEEE E E 643 25 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting File 0nannannannannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 645 ZO Ae COMAN CINE oeae ea e E E E EEEE EA 647 Chapter 20 E aS VP IM O eeen nE NE EN EE EET 648 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server ccccccccccecceecceeeeeeceeeseeeceeeceeeseeeasesaees 649 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EA SyPYiNtelr ccccccccccececeeeceeceeeteeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeees 649 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 ccc cecc cece eeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeees 651 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Servel cccccecceecceeeceeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaues 653 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EA SyPTintel cccccccceecceccceeceeeceeeseeeseeseesaeeseeesaeees 653 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 cece cecceecceeeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeesaeees 654 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide ccccccccccceccceeeeeeceeceeeceeeceeceueseeeseeesueeseesaeesaees 657 7A 0G TAPIE AIO ee E S E E E E E E E EE AO 657 PS A OP ON GU E eea E E E EE E 658 260 4 Convert Balch FNC ticne sens tess sdtas seas esaqreneseacesedescugacdeeqsnncevesdascdevscacedeeedacudivs EEDE 664 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File ccc ccccceccceeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeesaeeseeesaeess 664 204 2 9pPecialized gs een nn eee nn eee ee 665 26 4 3
63. Convert a float to a decimal string Convert a hexadecimal string to binary data Convert binary data into a hexadecimal string Obtain the length of a string Append source string to destination string Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings stringCompareNoCase StringFind StringReverseFind Find a substring inside a larger string starts from the Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings Find a substring inside a larger string end StringFindOneOf StringIncluding Find the first matching character from a set Extracts a substring that contains only the characters in a set StringExcluding Extracts a substring that contains only the characters not in a set String ToUpper Convert the characters of a string to uppercase String ToLower Convert the characters of a string to lowercase String ToReverse String TrimLeft Reverse the characters of a string Trim the leading specified characters in a set from the source string String TrimRight Trim the trailing specified characters in a set from the 550 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Stringlnsert Insert a string in a specific location within another string For more detailed information of the above string operation functions please check out the Build In Function Block section In order to demonstrate the powerful usage of string operation functions the following examples will show you step by step how to create executable project file
64. Dicton Bar width ratio a Bar color style Frame Bar Target indicator Enable Target value 0 43 Alarm indicators Low limit L Low color Tarsetalanmu zern tepani dynamit address Enable PLE mame Local HMI vw Setting Setting Description C S lt lt W 248 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Type There are Normal and Offset for selection When select Offset there must be a original value for reference Please refer the illustration below Attribute Type Direction Up ero U span 10 Ovivin 5 Bar width ratio c3 100 Direction To select the bar graph direction and there are Up Down Right and Left for selection Zero Span The filled bar percentage can be calculated with the following formula The filled bar percentage Register value Zero Span Zero 100 When select Offset if Register value Zero gt 0 the bar will fill up from origin setting if Register value Zero lt O the bar will fill up but down side from origin setting For example Origin 5 Span 10 Zero 0 and use different value in read address it will display as illustration below When read address value is 4 high limit 10 10 8 origin 5 s 4 low limit 5 249 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 Us
65. E There are four different type of XY plot i e Line Point X axis projection and Y axis projection check one of them For Line and Point selection set appropriate point width unit in pixels Maker Point width 5 w Line Point O E axis projection Y axis projection Line amp Point X axis projection is shown as the following Remarks Please refer to the figure below there is a curve containing 7 points from PO 304 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual to P6 The system carries out X axis projection with following steps a Automatically calculate two projected points in X axis Xo 0 and Xe 0 b Link all these points in the order of Xo 0 PO P1 P6 Xe 0 and returns to Xo 0 at last c Fill out all enclosed areas formed X axis projection Enclosed region Xo 0 Xe 0 ee E fi s E E E i xi C E i i i 2 8 8 Eeee Sere aeee aere 66186 8 8 D M a a METE S Rm mE m mnm mEn mn mEn mEn mEn mEn an MEn MEn MEn ME anan L E A E E A R E A A A A A a N a D a e a 1 Similarly for Y axis projection 305 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Enclosed region Enclosed region Reference In order to make the XY plot more readable you can configure up to 4 line horizontal reference lines on the graph Fill in high low limit and Y axis coordinate for each reference line Reference line Limit Low imit 0 High limit 100 Feference lime Reference lin
66. EM2 s storage device SD card does not exist an eer EAEIER LB 9463 EM3 s storage device SD card does not exist aa eo ESESES LB 9464 EM4 s storage device SD card does not exist aan eo ESEJEJ LB 9465 EM5 s storage device SD card does not exist S eer ESESES LB 9466 EM6 s storage device SD card does not exist ae eo pean LB 9467 EM 7 s storage device SD card does not exist eae ee ESESES LB 9468 EM 8 s storage device SD card does not exist O eer pete e LB 9469 EM9 s storage device SD card does not exist aa eo pete de LB 9470 EMO s storage device USB1 disk does not exist oe como ESESES LB 9471 EM1 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist S eae ESESES LB 9472 EM2 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist een enon pete e LB 9473 EM3 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist ee loom ESESES LB 9474 EM4 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist een aeon peta e LB 9475 EM5 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist eer semen ESESES 591 Nols ce LB 9476 LB 9477 LB 9478 LB 9479 LB 9480 LB 9481 LB 9482 LB 9483 LB 9484 LB 9485 LB 9486 LB 9487 LB 9488 LB 9489 NTEK EM6 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON EM 7 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON EM8 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON EM9 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON EMO s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM1 s storage devic
67. EasyDiagnoser is a tool for detecting the error occurs while HMI is communicating with PLC Configuration Step 1 Open Project Manager and click EasyDiagnoser amp Project Manager lela HMI IP Password Type MTEDOO S000 i Series I Settings Reboot HMI Connection Ethernet COUSB cable t series only DatafEvent Log File Information EasyBuilderSo00 EasyConverter EasyAddressviewer EasyDiagnoser EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through Step 2 726 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set the IP address of the HMI to communicate with Users can input IP address manually or simply click Search All Please input Project Port as well Select HMI Input HMI IP address Project Port 8000 a select HHI HMI Mare Tina MT81 001 307 01H Katte lt The Dermo doeyi 192 168 1 237 Demo 57_1200 192 168 1 39 test Search All 192 168 1 44 Default HMI 192 166 1 47 Tina bhiTe1 O0n oS 20091002 or later supports Project Port It is also available to right click and select Run EasyDiagnoser for entering the setting window when executing On Line Simulation in EB8000 727 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Goa ameisa Har Fivra Pagan Exit simulation Run EasyDissnosr mcreensnot E Easy Fiew
68. Es ASCII UNICODE Step 3 When pressing numeric input object users can input value with function keys directly Baskspace 168 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 4 Creating UNICODE Keyboard To create UNICODE keyboard is in the same way as numeric keyboard all with function keys The settings are as below ASCILUNICODE mode Enter O Backspace O Clear Es ASCILVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace O Clear Es ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace O Clear O Es ASCII UNICODE ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clear Esc ASCI UNICODE After the settings are completed function keys Q iB Y are created Create an Enter key A simple UNICODE keyboard is built Place a ASCII Input object in window set No of Words as 8 1 word 2 bytes and tick Use UNICODE as below 169 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ASCII T Input Object s anih General Dae Enyi Security Shape Description Mask Use UNICODE Reverse highlow byte Read address PLL name Local HMI v Setting Setting Address Address PLE name Device ype i Address a System tag Address Format DODDD range 0 10500 Index register FK_0 CY FK_1 B FK 3 9 FK 3 2 Enter In conclusion Numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are all made by combining function keys Users c
69. Event Display users are able to clearly understand the life cycle of the whole event from happening waiting for processing until the alarm stops Before using these objects the content of an event has to be defined first Click the Alarm Event Log icon and the dialog appears as below Alarm Event Loz Category All 0 ha ja History files v Save to HMI memory _ Save to CF card ClSave to USB 1 C Save to USB 2 C Preservation limit Print Sequence no Event trigger time O HH MM SS HH MM O DO HH MM Event trigger date OMAD Y DEMM Y O DD MM YY OMMO newn J insert Delete settings Copy Paste Export ext 104 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Category EB8000 classifies events All events are divided into categories 0 255 Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display can be used to restrain which category to display Category is for selecting which category of the events to be displayed Jale OOO M a The 2 of O 2 in this illustration demonstrates there are two defined events in category 0 Alarm Event Log Mode Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer BIT ON LB 0 Disable Determine the storage device of an event log However when users simulate the project in PC the files will be saved under the same event log subdirectory as EasyBuilder8000 exe Save to HMI memory Save the eve
70. Font Extended Memory Frimnten Backup server Device Model General austen vetting Security startup language after redownloading the project Language l Ww Auto logout Enable ji we minute is When a v r does not operate the HMI for longer than the setting time the system will automatically logout Hide system setting bar Hide mouse cursor Use LB 9062 to open hardware sething dialog Disable buzzer Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine Disable upload function effective after rebooting HMI for set LE9033 on Prohibit password remote read operation for st LB9053 on Prohibit password yemote write operation for set LBOO54 on Use a disconnection icon on relative objects when PLC communication fails YC server Password from project Password 111111 LM protection Digable LW remote write via COM port or ethemet LW range 0 99 RV protection Disable RW remote write via COM port or ethernet RW range 0 i999 Easv ccess server Login Eary cces server wee doa net Some functions are duplicated from system tag such as Disable buzzer LB 9019 Hide system setting bar LB 9020 Hide mouse cursor LB 9018 Disable upload function LB 9033 and Prohibit remote HMI connecting this machine LB 9044 It means that 79 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual user can also oper
71. Format Title Shape Channel 0 16 bit Unsigned Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt Display Leading zero E Channel 1 16 bit ECO L_ Display Channel 2 22 bit Unagned Display Channel 3 32 bit Float Right of decimal Pt a Cancel Each history data display object can display up to 20 channels You can select the channels which you want to watch on the screen In the example below there are four channels in the data sampling object Ch 0 and Ch 3 are selected for display only The data format of each channel is decided by the related data sampling objects 277 re WE NTEK Time Date Ch 0 16 09 07 16 09 07 T 16 09 07 5269 22 33 41 16 09 07 5267 22 33 39 16 09 07 5266 22 33 38 16 09 07 5265 22 33 37 16 09 07 6 09 07 H RANAN T 7 22 25 lA M Ea 3 oO 0 33 a 68 16 09 07 O O 33 i ie 33 oe K ae 0 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When display String format in history data display object users may choose a Display in UNICODE mode b Reverse high byte and low byte data then display Channel 1 String 5 wordia character no 4 UNICODE Display Center C Revers high low byte 278 E Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Use title Title background Transparent Title name Title Label library
72. HMI Cancel Enable MT8000 reads the bit status before performing start action If the bit is ON the schedule action is not performed Enable When performing start and termination action the system will simultaneously play the specified sound 372 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Restrictions User can register the maximum of 32 entries in Scheduler list The time scheduler features are one time actions When the start time or end time is reached the system writes the value to device just one time not repeated Operator turns OFF Start time End time Action Bit Set ON Start time 08 00 00 a cco End time 08 20 00 OFF SSS 07 50 00 08 00 00 18 10 00 18 20 00 Once the system execute start action it will read Write start address and Write end address altogether after then even you change the value of Write end address the system would not use the new value When the operator changes RTC data for those schedule object with both start time and end time setting the system will check if the time update changes the status from out of schedule range to within schedule range if it is the start action will be performed If there are several schedule objects registered the same start time or end time when time up the system will perform the operation from the first to the last in ascending order When Time Set are specified as Address mode the system will read control word
73. HMI Setting Address Liw wooo 16 bit Unsigned Write when button is released Athribute switch style JOG No of states Cyclical Disable User defined mapping Cancel Setting Description Mode There are Value and LSB display mode Refer to the Word Lamp Offset Object section of this chapter for related information Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the word device that controls the display of multi state switch Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the word device that system set value 202 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down Select the object s operation mode Switch style There are JOG and JOG for selection When the read address is the same as the write address the minimum value of the word value is Offset state 0 and the maximum value is no of state 1 Of
74. Location Local nt PLC type SIEMENS 7200 YOO We et 200 20 CLF Red oy s PLC default station no TOM COM 9600 E 8 1 Interval of block pack words Max read comumand size words Max write conuneand size words After the project is downloaded to HMI open the same project and change the PLC I F and COM port to COM 1 RS232 PC uses COM 1 to connect HMI as follows 690 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties PLC PLC type SIEMENS 87 200 k PLC default station no d COMI 9600 E 8 1 Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read comunand size words Max write command size words After that press Pass through to assign HMI IP address for example 192 168 1 37 Finally press Get HMI Communication Parameters as follows Pass through Ethemet COM port HMI IP 192 168 1 37 Get HM Cormrmunication Parameters HI work mode Mormal Source COM Port PC gt Hf COM 1 R9232 Baud rate 9600 i Data bitz 8 Bits Parity Even Stop bits 1 Bit Destination COM Port HMI gt PLC cOM2 R5485 7W w Baud rate a600 En Data bits 5 Bits ise Parity lesen Stop bits f Bit _ Start Pass through Stop Pass through a 691 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User
75. Master and Slave via corresponding registers The corresponding memory has the same property as MT8000 s register MW MB from Master and Slave The 1000 words MW MB are reserved for MemoryMap in MT8000 for communication The feature of memory MB is correspondence with MW according to the following list MBO MBf and MWO MB10 MB1f and MW1 they all indicate the same register Device name Format Range MB dddd h dddd 0 9999 h 0 f hex dddd dddd 0 9999 When using MemoryMap communication protocol the master and slave have to use the same communication setting The wiring diagram as follow RS485 4W 700 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note means being decided by PLC or controller The flowchart of communication as following Flowchart 1 Ye S No Receiving STX 02H Sending ACK 06H waiting time is Sending STX 02H waiting time is 3 sec Flowchart 2 Checking NAK 15H Delay 100ms Checking ACK 06H 701 Stop sending Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Flowchart 2 Checking STX 02H Yes Sending ACK O6H The waiting time is 3 sec default Receiving ce data Yes Sending ACK O6H Go to flowchart b Going to flowchart a Yes Caution Flowchart 2 is available for slave but not master STX is asking signal for communication ACK is feedback signal and NAK is busy signal There are two data formats one i
76. NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual StringSetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device responds StringSet str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command Description success StringCopy source destination start or success StringCopy source start destination start Copy one string to another This function copies a static string which is enclosed in quotes or a string that is stored in an array to the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start destination start must be an one dimensional char array This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of source string exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false and the content of destination remains the same The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 abcde char dest1 5 bool success1 success1 StringCopy src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringCopy 12345 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 12345 char src3 10 abcdefghij char dest3 5 486 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual bool success3 success3 StringCopy
77. OG erne E A I EE 689 29 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function 693 Chapter 30 PIOlCCr FP iOte COM sorron oere E E E E EE 694 TAOB HASS WOE rrene EE EEE EEEE EAEE ER 694 390 2 Decompilatlon IS PrONIDNEG aa n ne EATENEO 695 30 3 Disable HMI upload function LB9033 ccc ceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeenees 696 30 4 Project protection Project Key ccccccecceccsecceeceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeenaes 697 30 9 FOleC Dass Word IMTP TING assess auvaiteeoncvoderearnadurancsadnnanssodenesesadunaausedanonssednenesaduonte 698 Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication ccccccsecceeeeeeseeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeees 700 Chapter oZ OC WP POLOC Ol catenacoesnnencsetasetieadosanpacdenenunedaganmadesenmadensnanedesaamadtesennaetesoareedl 710 LTTC E ers E E E 710 32 2 Optional Paramete S irssi EEEE ee 711 OZ 0 INCIWOIK SUD OOM miasdercasiianrieacenrsasscasceasiinarnesisearseqauaneiessieertesesriesiasmaesnieureserd 712 io ee R dL PA A E eee ee 712 OL FAO SS SUING e E E E E E 712 32 93 39 Broadcast MESSAJOS sporaerr ienn nee 712 324 COMMANG USAGE seccscecsrccseeoseeaseeesteuseteseeesadesedesedesegaseeeseesagectgrentecgaseecseceseacaeeess 713 924 1 ARDC Read ses catedecectecveaceseacesedeacueaedeeeseneesesdueedresdavedesedaeseeeagasseieecaseeraaes 713 OZ Ve WSCOUC Slnstesccennaraaseenteccsensiteaseseteeoacanieamseardsensaantestsenetseaseseesseaeanieansenineaies 713 LA RODIY ce
78. ON support monitor function only for remote HMls LB 9197 R W R W R W when ON disable local HMI to trigger a MACRO when LB 9198 R W R W R W ON disable remote HMI to trigger a MACRO when LB 9199 ON R W R W R W 626 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers 1 EPSON ESC P2 Impact Printer LQ 300 LQ 300 LQ 300K RS232 LQ 300 II RS232 Inkjet Printer Stylus Photo 750 Laser Printer EPL 5800 2 HP PCL Series USB port conform to HP PCL level 3 protocol Laser Printer HP LaserJet P1505n HP PCL 5e e PCL 5 was released on HP LaserJet III in March 1990 added Intellifont font scaling developed by Compugraphic now part of Agfa outline fonts and HP GL 2 vector graphics e PCL 5e PCL 5 enhanced was released on HP LaserJet 4 in October 1992 and added bi directional communication between printer and PC and Windows fonts 627 1 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Caution For HP printer we do not support 1 oF w S ly HP LaserJet P1005 which is not PCL 5 HP LaserJet P1006 HP LaserJet 1000 which supports HostBase Printing language HP LaserJet 1010 which supports HostBase Printing language HP Color LaserJet 1500 which supports HostBase Printing language HP Color LaserJet 3500 which supports HostBase Printing language MT8000 does not support HostBase Printing language Please ensure that the HP printer supports PCL5 be
79. Oem USBI EMS Fie name E Obe USBI EMG Fle mame i Osei OUS EM Fle name Ea Obe USBI EMS Fle mame E UB EM Fie name a OD OUB Extended Memory is numbered from EMO to EM9 Method to use extended memory is similar to that of other device type i e LW or RW address Users can simply select from Device type list while adding a new object Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word 87 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device type Data in extended memory is stored in SD card USB1 or USB2 in a form of a file The files in extended memory EMO EM9 are entitled as em0 emi em9 emi Users can use RecipeEditor exe to open the file and edit the data in the extended memory Data in extended memory will not be erased when power is cut which means next time when user start HMI again data in extended memory remains just the same before power off This is similar to Recipe data EW RW_A What is different is that users can select where they want to save the data SD card USB1 or USB2 To read data in extended memory from a removed device the content of data will be viewed as 0 if users would like to write data to a removed device the PLC no response message will appear in HMI EB8000 supports hot swapping function for SD card and USB devices Users can insert or remove the device for extended memory without cutting the power With this function users can update or take data i
80. Q In AB Data Type Editor exe in EB8000 right click on Module Defined and then click New Data Type AB Data Type Editor Data Types E User Defined Mame Strings H Predefined Description E AB Embedd ie Eia occa ule AB Embedded I16F 1 0 AB Embedded O816 0 0 AB Embedded O816 1 0 Data Type Descriptione AB Embedded O816 0 0 0 member In Name of New Data Type input Module Defined Name 750 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click Paste in dialogue box press Ctrl V to paste Name and Data Type fe RSLogix 5000 L32E 1769 L32E 18 11 Data Type AB 1769_D116 1 0 EH File Edit View Search Logie Communications Tools Window Help acl amp ee Offline N HARUN mmm Fg Pa cmon a Ho Forces P h BAT No Edits Dimo Unacheduled Programs B S Motion Groups J Ungrouped Axes Add On Instoctons eS Data Types Ca User Detined H a Stings Ca Add On Detined 4 Predefined a Module Detined 4B 1769_D116 1 0 AB1769_D1321 0 Name AB 1769_DI6 0 Description Members Data Type Size 8b AB 7O9_ DOLe C0 S Name Data Type Style Description 6 4B8 1769 DO16 1 0 Binary f AB 1769_DO16 0 0 Te 6 ABLES DO320 0 i ABTS DOF 1TO w ABLES _DOF2 0 0 AB 1769 IF16C0 AB 769 F610 4B1769_IF16 0 0 Trends MO Configuration An Backplane CompactLorix System Ma 1769 L32E 132k EEE EEIEE EAE IEE IEE Ui AB Data Typ
81. Settings PLC type MODBUS Server v w 1 00 MOCBUS_SERWER SO PLC I F Eal station no Booo Settings COM Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 v Max read command size words 120 Max write command size words If PLC I F is set as RS232 or RS485 please fill in COM Port Settings also FLC type MODBUS Server ir v1 00 MODBUS_sER YER so PLC LF ps3 y Station no CoM COMI 600 E 8 13 lf PLC I F is set as Ethernet the IP address is the same as HMI For communication MODBUS Server Port no should be set the same as HMI Port no 563 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLE type MODBUS Server w W 1 00 MODBUS_ SERVER S0 O EDG k Station no Eo Dise UDP User Datagram Protocol IP Local Port 8000 HMI Port Settings Use broadcast command Please refer to HMI Port no to set MODBUS Server Port no Go to Model tab of System Parameter Settings the HMI Port no is shown there oystem Parameter Settings Font IL Extended Memory Printer Backup server System Setting HMI saion no Port no 8000 used as MODEUS server s port no After finishing the setting MODBUS Server will be listed in Device tab You can send MODBUS command to read or write the data from MODBUS Server after downloading the XOB file to HMI oystem Parameter Settings Font i Extended Memory Prin
82. Si Click the button to delete the Picture Library in Library from the Delete all states of the selected Picture Delete current state of the selected Picture Rename the selected Picture Old rame Fed New name Blue 399 Add a new state before the current state Add a new state after the current state Add a new picture to the Picture Library L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Import Pactore Modify Picture Modify the selected picture Export Export the selected picture to the appointed place As shown below users can get the original picture Save As Savein EB8000 we EF E driver wint drivers My Recent drivers x56 Documents f Desktop Me Documents File name My Network Save as type Note The compatible picture format are bmp jpg gif dpd and png When adding a GIF picture in Picture Library if this picture file is animated the number of times to play this animation can be set by users as below 400 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Get Picture Picture file State 0 CADocuments and Settings Nicolas gif State Width 70 Height 140 Size Loops OGIF default Customized Ca Cae The example below shows how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with two States into it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Picture Library Hew Library Library name TEST
83. Some Notes about Using the Macro 1 The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes So the maximum array size of different variable types are as follows chara 4096 bool b 4096 short c 2048 int d 1024 float e 1024 2 Amaximum of 256 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder 8000 project 3 A macro may cause the HMI to lock up Possible causes are A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro 4 PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected Also too many macro instructions may slow down the PLC communication 522 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 9 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device When EasyBuilder 8000 does not provide an essential driver for communication with a device Users also can make use of OUTPORT and INPORT to control the device The data sent with OUTPORT and INPORT must follow the device s communication protocol The following example explains how to use these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device First create a new device in the device table The device type of the new device is set to Free Protocol and named with MODBUS RTU device as follows Device list Location Device type Interface Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable Local PLC 1 MODBUS5 RTU Device Local Free Protocol COM1 19200 E 8 1 Device Properties
84. The State no is determined by Language no selected If user use 8 languages 256 8 32 405 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oo states if user use 4 languages 256 4 64 states New Addanewlabeliag OOOO Settings Modify he content oflabe Paste Pastethecopiedlab OOOO Save Label File Save all current label tags as lbl file Load Label File Load existing lbl file to label library Export EXCEL File Export the current label tag library in csv or xls file format It is allowed to select one language or all to be exported This function does not support UNICODE Import EXCEL File Import a label tag library csv or xls file format to the current project MTP It is allowed to select one language or all to be imported This function does not support UNICODE 406 Ly WE NTEK 15 2 Settings of Font of Label Library In Label Tag Library users can see the existing tag and the languages this tag contains Different fonts can be selected for different languages Label Tag Library Comment Language 1 Antique Olive Compact English Language 2 Book Antiyua Bold Ww Chinese Language 3 Century Gothic Bolt Japanese Language 4 CourierPS Oblique v Koen sd Language 5 Eose Fr Language 6 Cataneo BT Spanish Language 7 Calligraphie 42 IBT w Italian Language 0 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Arabic Font
85. Toggle Bookmark There will be a blue little square that represents a bookmark on the left side of edit area WorkSpace Macro ID 4 15 20 21 ee 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Ea sub macro command main Short value 1 adress 0 1 0 int gqnmacrolIb 0 gntount O bool bError 0 int tempCount O0 tempVal 0 qntestVal o int gqnCurrentHID 0 gnCurrenthCount 0 ESS Unde Lith MIDS353353 gt 5 gt 3535 gt qncuy Eed Ctl Y SSG seg tah LU EDY i 3 pas MIDS3 gt 333 gt gt gt gt 5 gt gt 2 gt Gets 1 Select All Cth fee Sete Togele Bookmark Ctlt F2 LW adress tempi Next Bookmark Fi value Previous Bookmark Shft F2 adres Clear Al Bookmarks ff gt gt y MCOUNtS gt 323333333 575 gt eens Togele All Outlining seppe Ube Al Oaia ical HMI qneorrectYal 0 Li b If there s already a bookmark where the cursor is placed select Toggle Bookmark to close it otherwise to open it c Right click and select Next Bookmark the cursor will move to where the next bookmark locates Selecting Previous Bookmark will move the cursor to the previous bookmark 427 Lyd WE NTEK WorkSpace WorkSpace WorkSpace WorkSpace Macro ID Macro ID 19 macro command main j 20 Short value 1 adress 0 1 0 21 int qnmacrolP 0 gntCount 0 gntestVal 0 qn 22 bool bError 0 23 int tempCount 0 tempVal 0 24 int gqnturrentMID 0 gn
86. Word Lamp LWO mm Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Configuration Click the Word Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Word Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new word lamp object will be created See the pictures below 174 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shane Label Read address PLC name Local HMI se Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Setting Description Mode Word lamp object offers the following three modes for selection Offset a Value Calculate result of word value to subtract Offset and display its corresponding shape 175 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual x Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shane Label Mone SHES Read address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned ttribute In the above setting if the value of LW200 is 5 the shape of state 2 is displayed See the picture below Em LW200 LW200 Offset 3 b LSB Transfer the read address value to binary the lowest 8 bits other than value 0 decides the state Please refer to the following table 176 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address Binary value Displayed state value 0000 All
87. a floating point value end macro_command macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 int e int f 10 double g 10 get the state of LB2 to the variable a GetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetData b 0 Local HMI LB O 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW to the variable e note that the type of e is int GetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to variables f 0 f 9 472 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual since each integer value occupies 2 words GetData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetData f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command GetDataEx read_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or GetDataEx read_data device_name device_type address _ offset 1 Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_data device_name device type address_ offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 inte int f 10 double g 10 g
88. a variable Source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result SQRT 15 result source 9 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 end macro_command CUBERT CUBERT source result Description Calculate the cube root of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result CUBERT 27 result result is 3 0 source 27 0 CUBERT source result result is 3 0 449 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command Name POW POW source1 source2 result Description Calculate source raised to the power of source2 Source1 and source2 can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Source and source2 must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float y result y 0 5 POW 25 y result result 5 end macro_command SIN source result Description Calculate the sine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SIN 90 result result is 1 source 30 SIN source result result is 0 5 end macro command COS source result Description Calculate the cosine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro_command main 450 E WE NTEK Ea
89. addresses to write Must be 2 bytes long Bytes 12 L 3 The data to write Up to 99 items each with one Hex digit Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum Example Write 5 bits starting from address LB214 to the HMI at station 12 This will write to addresses LB214 LB218 Write the following data a it fo jo 1 Byt Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Bytes e 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 srx oc we o4 os 1 1 o o 1 Jex 4 723 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The checksum bytes 18 and 19 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 17 30 43 57 43 30 32 31 34 30 35 31 31 30 30 31 03 32F The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2F 32 4 6 2 Reply If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 724 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 7 Error Codes The following table lists the error conditions and the Error Codes returned for those errors O6H Invalid Checksum Unknown Command 11H Data Length Error data overflowed receive buffer Communication Data Error ETX not found 7AH Illegal Address 7BH More than 99 data items were requested 725 Wada l Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 33 EasyDiagnoser 33 1 Overview and Configuration Overview
90. adjust the backlight brightness with level 0 31 R W R W R W R W zee 2 For LW 9008 when the battery voltage level goes below 2 89V it is recommended to replace the battery 589 re WE NTEK 22 Local HMI Network Information EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9125 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 0 machine used only 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 1 machine used only LW 9127 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 2 machine used only LW 9128 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 3 machine used only 16bit HMI ethernet IP O machine used only 16bit HMI ethernet IP 1 machine used only 16bit HMI ethernet IP 2 machine used only 16bit HMI ethernet IP 3 machine used only 16bit ethernet port no 16bit media access control MAC address 0 LW 9126 LW 9129 LW 9130 LW 9131 LW 9132 LW 9133 LW 9135 LW 9136 LW 9137 LW 9138 LW 9139 LW 9140 16bit media access control MAC address 1 16bit media access control MAC address 2 16bit media access control MAC address 3 16bit media access control MAC address 4 16bit media access control MAC address 5 590 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory Address Description Local Remote save all recipe data to machine set ON LB 9460 EMO s storage device SD card does not exist aa eee ESEESE LB 9461 EM 1 s storage device SD card does not exist aa eae ESESEJ LB 9462
91. and the New Numeric Input Object or New Numeric Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item click OK button and a new Numeric Input Object or Numeric Display Object will be created See the pictures below The difference between the New Numeric Display Object and New Numeric Input Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab in New Numeric Input Object 209 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Read Write use different addresses Read address PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Write address Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PL name Lacal HMI Ww Setting Notification on myvalid input Enable Set OM O Set OFF PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Setting Description Read Write Numeric Input object is provided with Read Write use different addresses use selection users can set different addresses for Read and for Write data different address Read Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word device that address system display its value and write new data to it Write Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word device that 210 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 U
92. are any additional tasks to be done For example Create a desktop icon Tick it if needed then click Next to continue ie setup FasyBoildert000 T434 Sil Ed Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing EasyBuilders000 v4 34 then click Next Additional icons 7 At this moment all the settings are done Please check if they are all correct If any changes need to be made click Back or click Install to start installing S Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 34 Saks Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing EasyBuilders000 V4 34 on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back iF you want bo review or change any settings Destination location CHEBSOOO Start Menu Folder EBSO00 Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon 14 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 8 Installation processing iSl Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 34 ARH Installing Please wait while Setup installs EasyBuilder6000 4 34 on your computer Extracting Files CHEBSOOO Wibraryimeter O1 Flb Cancel 9 Click Finish to complete the installation 2 Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 34 Completing the EasyBuilder8000 4 34 Setup Wizard Setup has Finished installing EasyBuilders000 4 34 on your computer The application may be laun
93. assigned address changes from OFF to ON ON OFF This will trigger data sampling when the status of assigned address changes from ON to OFF ON lt OFF Trigger data sampling when the status of assigned address is changed Read address Select a device type to be the source of data sampling Data Record Max data records Max number of data records that can be saved by one data sampling definition in one day lf sampling time interval is set as 0 1 second then the max number of data records is 86400 1 If the data source of trend display is in real time mode the earlier record will be deleted and new record will be added and displayed in the trend display object 2 If the data source of trend display is in historical mode the data will still be sampled Auto stop When the number of data sampling equals to Max data records and the Auto stop option is selected HMI will stop sampling data automatically Example Condition Set Max data records as_ Set Max data records as 10 10 without checking auto and check auto Stop Stop Trend display real The data will keep the latest Stop displaying after reaching Data sampling Keep recording and delete Stop recording after reaching resent aaa logan S Data Format The formats of different data in one data sampling A data sampling may include more than one type of records Data sampling in EB8000 is able to retrieve different typ
94. bits are 0 display the shape of D a eee 1 0001 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit Tee escort stoners 2 0010 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit Fee separ stoners 3 0011 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit Pe separ steers 4 0100 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit SL scoot taecraa n 0111 The lowest bit other than O is bit P sear taeorat 1000 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit ef 10 3 display the shape of state 4 c Change state by time The states of the object have nothing to do with the word value The system displays different shape of states according to time frequency Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that controls the word lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLC name Local HMI a Device ype i L k Address 0 System tag Address Format DODD range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned WF Attribute No of states The number states one object possesses State 0 is also counted as one 177 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual state Suppose the number of the states is 8 the valid states will be 0 1 7 In this case if the word value is 8 or higher the system will display the shape of last state Restrictions In label dialog Language 1 is able to change attribute settings and for Lang
95. boos INT 255 RADIX Decimal FLC WTA 1 Ora ED A TTY ae Maana arn Therefore AB Data Type Editor in EB8000 is for users to import and edit User Defined Predefined and Module Defined Structure 739 Nes WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 34 1 Import User Defined AB Tag to EB8000 Step 1 Create Tags from RSLogix5000 RSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E QB1 18 11 Controller Tags ABicontroller File Edit View Search Logic Communications Toole Window Help ach amp lv SRE Rem Run A Aun Mode Path AB_ETH 14192 168 1 130 Backplane D v El P E Controller OF a M Battery OK 4 b BOOK Mo Forces Mo Edits RIE A aay f cannes ot A me Controller Organizer Scope fee oy Show All Tags a EO o Controller Tags T Mame j Value Force Mask Style Data Type ontoller Fault Handler o Hace o y 56 Decimal DINT Power Up Handler E ArayeD eee Decimal DINT 25 5 c Tasks F ArrayBool ee Decimal BOOL 256 pei F AraDINT E EE D cinal DINT 130 ee ee ArrapReal E aa Float REAL 1 25 J Motion Groups Ep 0 Decimal BOOL 2 Ungrouped Axes ANT T Decimal INT 360 3 Add On Instructions Local t C R T AB Embedded_IQ Data Types Local aaa ioe AB Embedded 10 a a tecaac a eae AB Embedded_O Eip Add On Defined Locak2 I ae ee AB Embedded_O C Predefined el Local2 0 ee eae AB Embedded 1 afk Module Defined YarBool
96. can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos GETBIT Y result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_ pos 2 GETBIT source result bit_pos result is 1 end macro_command SETBITON SETBITON source result bit_pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data Source to 1 and put changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITON 1 result 3 result is 9 source 0 bit_pos 2 SETBITON source result bit_pos result is 4 463 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oo end macro command Description Description SETBITOFF source result bit_ pos Changes the state of designated bit position of a data source to 0 and put in changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITOFF Y result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_pos 2 SETBITOFF source result bit_pos result is O end macro_command INVBIT INVBIT source result bit_pos Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data Source and put changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_comm
97. ccccnceuscezedeerseasstersesetisrsonstieseseteeizesetoesceneteeivenndavece 63 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC cc ccccceccc eee eeceeece esse eeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeaes 68 11B5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI ccc ccccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeaes 70 e MOOG ee E EE 12 FLC A e ae P EE 76 IA SV SUS QUIN o e E E E E E E E E E E E 19 OD CCU ero vedevedevedewssecnieonssondncedscssacstscnieciscsiconiscsicesiessecentsanieasssdieesi T 82 DOT O E E E E E E E E E E 85 Of E KONIGO MOMON sorre reren Err E EEN EE E EE EEE E ENEE 87 ok oy PNErBICKUP SOVET errr erar ER TAE A E EAA O AA AEA 89 Chapter 6 Window Operations cccccccecceeeceeeceeeceeeseeceueceueceeesaeesaeeseeeeueceeseeeseeeseeeaes 91 O1 WNC TYDES eea RE R E REE R E E EEE ERE EEEE 91 edt BA E VV NOW eeso oree r NEE E E EEE E E E EEE S EEE 91 OTZ COMMON WID OOW ae ne er 92 Ooo aS elec ion VVINGOW sarne nsere re rane P ET EER E E 93 6 1 4 System Message WINKOW cccccccecceeccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeesuessueseeeseeeseeeaes 94 6 2 Create Set and Delete a WINKOW nnannannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnrnnnn 96 oye I i 12 2 ars A410 6 0 nee eee eee 96 OrZ 2 NV MIONW SEUN tecccascerecescderccercdorececacasrieswiauriesmaurtedssesisesscesmespiasrtessiesrsenicess 100 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a WINdKOW cccccecc ccc eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 101 Charner eV Sl IC eee e E E E E
98. command size words Max The Max data size to be written to device at one time Unit word write command size words After all settings are completed a new device named Local PLC 1 is added to the Device list Device list Mo Location Device type Interface WF Protac Loca HMI Local HMI Local MTS121T 00 x600 Disable E Local PLC 1 MITSUBISHI FAQ MITSUBIGH FaOm COMI S600 E 7 1 67 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC Ethernet Ethernet OC SLY QOH bd Woo Hg WOO PLO Device IPLC Device The so called remote PLC means a PLC connected to a remote HMI To control a remote PLC users need to add this type of device Click New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Here take a remote PLC SIEMENS S7 200 as an example Device Properties SIEMENS 57 200 OHMI PLC Location ings IP 192 168 1 35 Port 8000 PLC type SIEMENS 57 200 v w2 a0 SIEMENS _57_200 50 PLC I F RS 465 ow v PLC default station no L Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command COML Settings Interval of block pack words Max read commianad size words Max write command size words Setting Description 68 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual HMI or
99. controlled by PC It is also available for HMI to control data of PC simply considering PC another HMI Add PC as a new Remote HMI device to the MTP projects of HMI A or HMI B and set the IP address pointing to the PC 578 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMI l z i j Ethernet T Mt 4 ch a im OR z IPLC Device Through Ethernet network PC or HMI can also operate PLC that is connected to other HMI for example suppose there is a Mitsubishi PLC connected to COM 1of HMI B When PC or HMI A wants to read data from this PLC the procedure for setting PC or HMI A MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of HMI B suppose the IP address of HMI B is set as 192 168 1 2 Step 2 Run project of PC or HMI A and add a Remote PLC device defined as Mitsubishi FXOn_FX2 in the example below in Device tab in System Parameter Settings menu then set the correct communication parameters Device Properties Mame PLC on HMI B OHMI PLC Location Settings IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 PLC type MITSUBISHI FxOn FX2 v W 1 10 MITSUBISHI FAON so PLE I F RS 485 4i Ww PLE default station no oO COM gt COMI Settings 579 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Since this device is a remote PLC connected with Remote HMI B the IP address should be the same as HMI B 192 168 1 2 Step 3 In using the set bit
100. controlled by a designated address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of designated address or users can also set address in Attribute Low Hich limit Constant Address PL name I Setting 16 bit Unsigned ooo Local HMI Address v Coarse increment Increment Control address High Limit 16 bit format Address 0 Address 1 32 bit format Address 0 Address 2 Coarse increment If this option is selected the word value will increase decrease one increment value for every touch activation If not the word value will be 207 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual set the value in accord with the touch activated point Slider button There are four slider button types for selection You also can adjust the type width of moving piece Color This is used to select slide object frame background and slot s color slider button type slot Frame Background 208 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Overview Both of the Numeric Input object and the Numeric Display object can be used to display the value of the word devices The difference is the numeric input object can be used to input data from the keypad the input value is written to the designated word devices Configuration Click the Numeric Input or Numeric Display icon on the toolbar
101. data length of the limits word device for limits is related to the data format of object In the example below Data Format High limit 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 An extended function is Zoom in and zoom out function Example of zoom in out function For zoom in out the trend graph user has to check the Limit Dynamic limits as picture below For example the LWO and LW1 are to control low limit and high limit you may change the value of LW1 to zoom in out This following picture is in original size The range of trend is between 0 30 The arrow on the right side are set word LW1 increment JOG and LW1 decrement JOG for control the zoom in and zoom out function 271 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Decrease LW1 s value to exhibit Zoom in function as shown below The value of LW1 decreased to 11 Increase LW1 s value to exhibit Zoom out function as shown below The value of LW1 increased to 41 272 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 18 History Data Display Overview History Data Display object displays data stored by data sampling object It displays history data in numeric format Please note that the history data display will not refresh automatically it only retrieve the data from the designated record and display at the time window popup If the content of the designated record is updated the history data displa
102. ee ee eer 714 32A 2 VW BICA VV MING acere eire r Enr on EN Er EE OEE E E EEr E OERS 715 Se Bane RCGUCS ane ere 715 OZ ZZ RODIY o E E E nurs E E N E E E E 716 Oi AO RTS RINOM ROAU e E 717 OF FSCO CSE re A E A E E E E EE A 717 LA el ROD en ee ee ek eee eee 718 SLAA RN RAMON VV IMG srtcontscnisestecctsest cant ceed sanisanieassegedecetecsdsuniecnisoniseiscsinesiaecdee 719 oe ely Be e E e ee ee 719 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual io TA RODY ee ec ee ee ee ee eee 720 ZO IRGC GO GOING a csssdesccescdesccesccdacececatasrieaweuriesnaurtedssesesscesmesniasreessteszeenscexs 720 6 eo ROUS ene a E E ee eee ee 720 OF RODY a T E E E A 121 IZA om Ga Ai COIS ern E E EE 122 Ae REGUS rie EE EEE SE GEE 122 OZ FOZ ROD caas set nang edna epee E E E E E E 724 OZ al ENO GOGCS arere EEA E EEEE EEEE A 725 Chapter 339 EasSyDIaAgNOS EI caaursacsetasnnvsestaseneadosanpaedceenunedagammadesenmiadensanedenanmatesesnanteseaeeed 726 S95 OVERVIEW ana ON N erenn EE E EEEE E 726 33 2 EasyDiagnoser Settings aiccrinsysseerainaritesaane iciemepeiyeepaniogetepecivwesewesinanaleaedeniceuncipiceanuaadanad 129 IS ENO COE rE A E E E E E E 736 SB NS essere aston gate sivas ale usar cassette earn deena dence esieianoiaiees 137 Os VV INO GW PiU SUC eren E E EE 738 Chapter 34 AB EtherNet IP Free Tag Names cccccccecceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeseesaeeseeesaeess 739 34 1 Import User Defined AB Tag to EB8000 cc ceccccccececeeeseeeseeeeeeeeee
103. eee Click OK 635 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Bile Edit Mew Options Help SH Bla 2 Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 10 51 07 0 10 51 08 1 10 51 23 0 10 51 24 060 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 1 10 51 2 7 2 10 51 28 3 Then click Export to Microsoft Excel A B Cc Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 g Joala l Sl 05 8 105123 9 jl Sl 24 10 1085125 11 LO 5126 2 iosiz7 Po LO 1 26 14 108128 When converting event log in csv format users can find data fields in EXCEL as below 2 A 3 7 5 2 fo tap WI Re o o e 636 Lyd a WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 28 Microsoft Excel EL 20101029 xls 13 SEO BEE AG MAD iO IA PEN et ree ra Creation time 2 Fri Oct 29 10 59 29 2010 3 Data fields 4 category time message 0111 19 42 Emergency 5111 19 43 6 O1119 46 LOW 5111 19 49 5 0111 19 52 Word 0 11 18 52 Word h k k k k 0 gt event is triggered 1 gt event is acknowledged 2 gt event returns to normal 637 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 2 2 How to Use Scaling Function The Scaling is utilized to offset data Sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point new value value A xB C users c
104. if vai Intolerce 01 S 02 Setting Description Category The category of an event Priority level The priority of an event Users can define Low Middle High or Emergency according to the importance of the event When the number of event log equals to the max number available in the system the less important events lower priority will be deleted and new events will be added in the default is 1000 please refer to General in Chapter 5 System Parameters to set this number Address The type of address Bit or Word mode a maaana Read By reading the address set here system obtains a value and will use it to 110 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FI Chapter 9 Object General Properties for more information Notification When an event is triggered the specific message is sent out from Notification address Select Set ON to send ON message to this address or select Set OFF to send OFF message to this address Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties for detail Condition The trigger condition of an event When Address type of an event is Bit then ON or OFF in Trigger can be selected The illustration below shows if Trigger ON is selected and the status of Read address changes from OFF to ON an event will be triggered and generate an event log record or an alarm Condition Trigger ON When the Address type of an event is Word
105. installation steps to manually install 16 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 2 Project Manager Operations After installing EB8000 software users will see a Project Manager shortcut double click it users will see a window as shown below The Project Manager is a software shell for launching several utilities Some functions are duplicated in the EasyBuilder8000 screen editing program Project Manager can operate as a stand alone program In this chapter each function will be introduced respectively amp Project Manager HMI IP Password Type Settings Connection Ethernet USB cable i series only DatafEvent Log File Information EasyBuilderSo00 EasyConverter EasyAddress viewer EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through 17 Y WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 1 HMI IP Password Project Manager Reset Download Upload 111111 Settings When operating MT8000 MT6000 HMI by Ethernet or USB cable users need to designate the correct IP address and password in HMI Press Settings Reset and Download functions share a set of password while Upload function uses another set The password provides protection against unauthorized access to the HMI Be sure to record any password change otherwise while resetting
106. is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down This is used to select the operation mode The available operation modes for selection include Set ON Set OFF Toggle and Momentary Refer to the illustrations in the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Users can execute macro command by trigging toggle switch This function is the same as that of set bit object Please refer to the chapter of set bit object 200 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 7 Multi State Switch Overview Multi State Switch object is a combination of word lamp object and set word object The object can be used not only to display the state of a word device but also to define a touch area when activated the value of the word device can be set Configuration Click the Multi State Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Multi State Switch Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new Multi State Switch object will be created See the pictures below 0 Sas Multistate Switch 201 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label Description Mode alne Read address PLC name Local HMI Address Wi 16 bit Unsigned Write address PLE name Local
107. is ticked the assigned BMP picture will be downloaded to HMI After downloading HMI will reboot this picture will be shown after rebooting and then load in the project Users are allowed to use their logos as the start up screen through this method Reboot HMI after download Automatically reboot HMI after downloading Check the box to erase the selected Reset event log specific files in HMI before downloading Reset data log process 2 3 2 Upload Upload files from HMI to PC by Ethernet or USB cable and the dialog shows as below Users have to assign the desired path for file storage before uploading 23 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual nw Arw A Extend Memory Eh PLEASE INPUT EM FOLDER NAME EM file location O CF SD card USB1 O USB 2 Connection Ethernet O USB cable fi series only IF Marre Hel name Default HMI wt 192 168 1 102 Default HMA Search all 0S 20091002 or later supports Setting Description O To assign the desired specific path for 24 7 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 4 Simulation 2 4 1 On line Simulation Off line Simulation There are two types of simulations On line simulation amp Off line simulation By virtual device PC simulates the operations of HMI without connecting with PLC and HMI This shortens the time needed greatly even without the HMI in your hand While using Off line simulation users are allowed not to download
108. it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 aBcDe 501 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String oUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 ABCDE char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String oUpper aBcDe dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command Name String ToLower Description success String ToLower source start destination start success String ToLower source destination start Convert all the characters in the source string to lowercase characters and store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 aBcDe char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String ToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String ToUpper aBcDe dest2 0 I success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_c
109. name Local HMI wt Setting Use alamna color Cancel Setting Description Display Data format To select the data format of the word device designated by the Read 216 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address The selection list is shown as follows Format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed 32 bit Float Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all digitals and the color warning function will be cancelled Number of Left of decimal Pt digits The number of digits before the decimal point Right of decimal Pt The number of digits after the decimal point Scaling Do conversion option The data displayed on the screen is the result of processing the raw data from the word address designated by the Read address When the function is selected it is required to set Engineering low Engineering high and Input low and Input high in the Limitation Supposed that A represents the raw data and B represents the result data the converting formula is as follows B Engineering low A Input low x ratio where the ratio Engineering high Engineering low Input high Input low See the example in the picture below the raw data is 15 after being conve
110. o Decimal BOOL r n e VarDint 21862 Decimal DINT D Tl ee ComperiLogi323E OBI System __ Varin o Leama J fa 1769 L23E OB1 AB VarFieal 0 0 Float REAL Sd 1769 L23E OB1 Ethernet Port LocalEN I _ VarSint 128 Decimal SINT Step 2 Export Tags data to CSV file f RSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E QB1 18 11 Controller Tags AB controller File Edit View Search Logic Communications Me Window Help a Optio a BFH g eee Ta TE pECUritY SSS Rem Run OQ E Fun Mode Documentation Languages 2 1 130 Backplane 0 No Forces P Controller OF of Batten OF No Edits a T io ok Import Controller Organizer Export Tagsand Logie Comments and Lo Tagsand Logie Comments Comments Controller 4B A Controller Tags Motion Controller Fault Handler Monitor Equipment Phases 56 J Power Up Handler f SS Tasks Custom Tools ee a Main Task ER 8 MainProgram Ef ContolFLASH BE Unscheduled Programs Phases d Onine Books E Motion Grouns o Step 3 In EB8000 create Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix ControlLogix driver Input PLC IP address In System Parameter Settings dialog click Import Tag button 740 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings EBs000 3 O rem driver firmware My Recent font Documents 3 HMI_memory library media_driver project 5D_card Sjusb1 usb2 Qjusbdriver Qvir
111. object to operate the Mitsubishi PLC connected to HMI B just need to select PLC on HMI B for PLC name then it is able to operate the PLC connected to the remote HMI B on PC through the simulation function set Bit Objects Properties General security Shane Label Profile b ta O OS Write address PLE name PLE on HMI B wt Setting Write after button is released Athibute Set style 580 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits Some Local Words and Local Bits are reserved for system usage These registers are all with different functions described below Address Tag Library Customized System No Addyess tag name PLC name Addyess type Address Read Write 14s LB 9000 initialized as ON Local HMI LB 9000 Read Write LB 9001 initialized as ON Local HMI LB 9001 Read Write LB 9002 initialized as ON Local HMI LB 9002 Read Write LB 9003 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9003 Read Write LB 9004 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9004 Read Write LB 9005 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9005 Read Write LB 9006 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9006 Read Write LB 9007 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9007 Read Write LB 9008 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9008 Read Write LB 9009 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB 9009 Read Write LB 9010 data download indicator Local HMI Bit LB 9010 Read only LB 9011 data
112. password to default the project and data in HMI will be completely erased Reboot HMI There are certain situations that the HMI should reboot for example when updating the files in it Users don t need to cut power while rebooting After rebooting everything returns to the conditions of startup 18 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual amp Project Manager HMI IP Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series e atipi amaa REBO OMI Connection Ethernet USB cable ti series only DatafEvent Log File Information EasyBuilderSo00 EasyConverter EasyAddress viewer EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through stop HMI scan font finished Set the correct IP address when operating HMI via Ethernet HMIIP 192 168 0 103 19 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 2 Utility EasyBuilder8000 To launch the EasyBuilder8000 screen editor Easy Converter Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log Easy Printer Remote printer server EasyAddressViewer Review the register range of device types for each PLC supported EasyDiagnoser Communication monitoring tool via online peer lua ene Recipe Extend Provide file format conversion and data editing Build Download Data The project and data can also be downloaded to for CF Card USB Disk
113. ports are not occupied by other programs 2 TRACE Syntax List TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form e flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is described as below flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed Corc specifies a single byte character Signed decimal integer signed decimal integer unsigned octal integer unsigned decimal integer unsigned hexadecimal integer Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where dis a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or 545 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits The leng
114. print alarm information via EasyPrinter EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet so this feature is unavailable in MT6000 Series 652 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Server Backup g E al Ethernet Evl MT8000 History Files MT Remote Backup Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can upload historical data such as Data Sampling and Event Log history files onto MT remote backup server with Backup objects 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu Options select Settings and the following dialogue appears MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings Server Port number of the server socket S005 User name Max length 12 characters admin Backup Password Max leneth 12 characters 111111 Namung Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP address CO Use HMI name siea HMI name by LD W9032 L W9039 Prefire IF _ Ex TP 192 168 1 25 Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 653 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Backup tab on the left side
115. repeat and choose black as the background color Attibute Auto repeat Backeround a Preview tab Users can examine whether the MT8000 supports the video format via preview function 333 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a Click Load and select the file to be examined Users should put the file in the example directory of an USB disk b If the media player starts playing the video it means the MT8000 supports this video format Use lt lt and gt gt to navigate video by 1 minute each time c To play another video click Stop to close the video file and repeat from step a Prepare the video file a Remove all external devices SD USB disk connected to the MT8000 b Plug the USB disk which has the video file in it into the MT8000 The first step is there for ensuring the USB disk in step b will be recognized as USB1 Start Stop playing video 1 Start playing video a Set Parameter 1 to 0 b Set Command to 1 the system will open the video file and start playing c After the system start operation it will reset the Command to 0 334 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual During the period between step b and c don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 2 Stop playing video a Set Command to 5 the system will stop playing and close the video file b After the system complete
116. selected the operation is activated when touched and button is released If the function is not selected the operation is activated once being released touched Change Change base window full screen NOTE Do not use this function to pop up the window which has been opened window by direct indirect window object 192 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Change Change common window refer to the windows chapter for related common information window Display popup Pop up window The pop up window must be on the top of the base window window There is a Close this popup window when parent window is closed option with this function see the picture below when the function is selected the pop up window will be closed when executing change base window Otherwise users have to set a Close button on the pop up window to close the window Display popup window Close this popup window when change full screen window This is used to select the window no when performing change base window change common window and pop up the window Return to This is used to return to the previous base window Fox example when previous changing window 10 to window 20 users can use this function to return to window window 10 This function is only available for base window change Close window Close the pop up windows on the top of the base window Items in ASCII UNICODE mode is used
117. set to 111 since PLC station no is not specified and the default station no is using var3 the PLC station no is decided by var3 LW 10003 PLC name MODBUS RTU T Address 4x iii Use broadcast This is for setting the station no of broadcast command Command command for the users of this set station no will be seen as broadcast command For example if the broadcast station number is set as 255 HMI with an address such as 255 200 will send this command to all the PLC connected to it but will ignore the replies of PLC after receiving this command This only works on Modbus Broadcast station no Interval of If the interval between read addresses of different commands is less block pack than this value these commands can be combined to one But words combining function is disabled if this value is 0 For example the interval value is set as 5 and users would like to read out 1 word from LW3 and 2 words from LW6 respectively Means to read from LW6 to LW7 Since the interval of addresses between LW3 and LWG6 is less than 5 these two commands can be combined to one The contents of combination therefore become 5 consecutive words from LW3 read from LW3 LW 7 Note Maximum command combination data size must be less than Max read command size Max The Max data size to be read out from device at one time Unit word 66 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual read
118. set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device can be set before after the operation is completed There are ON and OFF selection to set the state Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated register before or after write to the word device Watch When sliding the current value can be displayed in real time fashion address Hew Slider Object General Outline Security Shane Direction Reston o Low Hish limit Constant Address PLC name sxe Setting EEN blider button type es Width 20 Fame as a C Transparent Background gt po C Transparent alot a Transparent Cancel 206 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Attribute Direction The bar on the slide direction i e left right up and down r N E E right o left gt down Resolution To specify the scale value of the slider if N is the specified minimum scale value when N 10 the numerical display shows only multiples of 10 N 5 the numerical display shows only multiples of 5 N 1 the numerical display shows only multiples of 1 Low limit amp a Constant High limit The low limit and high limit of the word device is set as constant value i e Input low and Input high b Address The low high limit of the word device is
119. show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Media Player object will be created See the pictures below Note The instruction of this section is an example to play a video file located in the example directory Media Player 331 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Media Player Object General Preview Description Control address PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Commad Stes permet Statin God ine 0V6 d Update video playing time Ext device Os Ouse Ouse Foliermame sempe Attribute Auto repeat Backeround M OK Cancel General tab Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object a In Control address select Enable and register a word device to control the operation of media player object example LWO 332 y gs WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Control addres FLE name Local HMI 0 M HMI w Setting Command sns J permet bide permet Statins End tine 6 b In Control address unselect the Update video playing time Update video playing time c In Ext device select USB1 and input example as Folder name Ext device OD U OUB Folder name d In Attribute unselect Auto
120. src3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same char src4 10 abcdefghij char dest4 5 bool success4 success4 StringCopy src4 5 dest4 0 success4 true dest4 fghij end macro_command Name StringDecAsc2Bin Description success StringDecAsc2Bin source start destination or success StringDecAsc2Bin source destination This function converts a decimal string to an integer It converts the decimal string in source parameter into an integer and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than 0 to 9 it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 12345 int result bool success1 success1 StringDecAsc2Bin src1 0 result success1 true result1 is 12345 char result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 32768 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 487 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual char src3 2 4b char result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result
121. start code With this function HMI will only view the first data read by barcode device that identifies with start code to be legal input Otherwise the data read will be ignored All the data other than start code will be saved in designated address For example if the start code is 255 Oxff and original data read Oxff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 571 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The data saved in designated barcode device address will be 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 Terminator Terminator means the end of data when terminator is detected it stands for the end of data stream CR LF Ox0a or 0x0d stands for the end of data STX ETX 0x02 or 0x03 stands for the end of data Other User can set the terminator manually None HMI will save all read data to designated address of barcode device After completing all settings described above a new Barcode device will be listed in the Device list Now the barcode device can be selected in PLC type on the object parameters setting dialogue box There are 2 types of address Address Address Description type name FLAG 0 indicates the status of data reading When reading Bit FLAG data is complete the status of FLAG 0 will be changed from OFF to ON It will not return to OFF automatically users are free to set base on actual usage BARCODE 0 Number of bytes currently read Word BARCODE BARCODE
122. step a it will reset the Command to 0 During the period between step a and b don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 333 Yann z LW WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Media player setting guide General tab Hew Media Player Object General Preview Control address Enable PLC name Local HMI A ee TSn ta Address format DDDDD range 0 10500 Index register Command 0 Status 0 3 Parameter1 D 1 Fibinex D 4 Paremeter2 0 2 Stuttime 0 5 End time 0 6 _ Update video playing time Ext dewice Osp uUss OUS Folder name Attribute Auto repeat Bako ME Setting Description Enable control Enable address a You can use Control address to control the operation of media player Register a device address for Control Control address address Disable There is no manual control of video play operation The system will start to play the first 336 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual video at designated folder when the window is popup Command Users set this address to control the operation of media player gt Command control address 0 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 for control operation ania gt Parameter 1 control address 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 for control operation Lineal gt Parameter 2 control address 2 The system will t
123. than this format will cause a compile error C24 syntax error break break statement can only be used in for while statement C25 syntax error continue continue statement can only be used in for statement or while statement C26 syntax error Error in expression C27 syntax error The mismatch of an operation object in expression can cause a compile error 531 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example macro_command main int a b for a 0 to 2 b 4 xyz illegal xyz is undefined next a end macro command C28 must be macro_command There must be macro_ command C29 must be key word sub The format of function declaration is sub data type function_name end sub For example sub int pow int exp end sub Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C30 number of parameters is incorrect Mismatch of the number of parameters C31 parameter type is incorrect Mismatch of data type of parameter When a function is called the data type and the number of parameters should match the declaration of function otherwise it will cause a compile error C32 variable is incorrect The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error 532 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C33 function name undeclared function
124. the previous text disappears completely See the picture below 138 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual If checking Continuous the text will be displayed continuously Speed Adjust the speed of the text movement Content Set the content of the text If using Label Library the content will be sourced from Label Library Tracking When Tracking is selected moving the text of one state will also move the text of other States Duplicate this label to other states This function is used to duplicate the current text content to the other states 139 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 4 Adjusting Profile Size When an object is created double click it and go to the Profile tab to adjust the position and size of the object Bit Lamp Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Postion F Pinned X 1 ize Width Height a Position Set if the position and size of the object is Pinned When it is checked the position and size of the object cannot be changed X and Y mean the X and Y coordinate of the left top corner of the object b Size Adjust the width and height of the object 140 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 5 Variables of Station Number EB8000 version 1 31 or higher allows users to set variables of station number in PLC address As shown below var2 is one of 16 station number variables Addres
125. the value of the word device will be subtracted by the value set in Dec value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t go less than the value in Bottom limit Attribute Set Style Press and hold decrement IOG Dec value 1 Bottom limit E JOG delay 1 0 secondio JOG speed 0 5 second s f Periodical JOG Periodically increment function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit Attribute Set Style Periodic JOG up 0 up E Inc valve E Upper limit au Time interval 1 0 second 3 iv g Automatic JOG Periodically decrement function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit 187 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute petetvle Automatic JOG up to high limit w e Time interval 0 5 second si ka h Automatic JOG Periodically decrement function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Dec value to automatically decrease the value of the word device and the re
126. the word device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 184 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Notification Address PLO name Local HMI Device type 4ddress Format DODDD range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned ka Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched When this function is selected in the manual operation mode the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the operation is completed Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after writing to word device Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area PL name Device type 4ddress Format DODDD range 0 11999 Index register 185 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Set style Set the operation mode The available modes for selection are listed as follows a Write constant value Set constant function When the operation is activated the Set value will be written into the word device The constant s for
127. to use objects with class A B and C 153 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 6 At this time if SB 3 LB 9050 is pressed to force current user to logout the system will return to initial state In other words current user can only use objects with none class Username 3 Lw9279 Password 333 lWs220 bit 15 Current status 0000000000000000 154 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 11 Index Register 11 1 Introduction EB8000 provides 32 index registers for users to use addresses flexibly Via index register users can update object s read write address without changing its content while HMI is running the project The addresses of the 32 index registers are as follows INDEXO LW 9200 16 bit INDEX 15 LW 9215 16 bit INDEX 16 LW 9230 32 bit INDEX 31 LW 9260 32 bit INDEXO INDEX31 are descriptions of Index Register LW 9200 LW9260 are the addresses of these index registers INDEX 0 INDEX 15 are 16 bit registers with the range up to 65536 words INDEX 16 INDEX 31 are 32 bit registers with the range up to 4G words While using Index Register the address of the device type will be decided by the value of constant in set address value in chosen index register Index register works in all device lists built in system parameter settings no matter addresses in bit or word format 155 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
128. use the default number Port no Set the Port no used by current HMI It is used as port no of MODBUS server If no specific request is to be made just use the default number Timer Clock source To set up the signal for timer object The time information of timer is used by Data Sampling Event Log etc which are objects that need the time records a HMI RTC means the time signal comes from internal clock of the HMI b External device means the time signal comes from external device To correctly set source address of time signal is necessary Take the illustration below as an example It indicates the source of time signal is from TV of the Local PLC The source address TV starts from address O contains 6 consecutive words and each of them contains the following information TV second the limited range 0 59 TV Minute the limited range 0 59 TV Hour the limited range 0 23 TV Day the limited range 1 31 TV Month the limited range 1 12 TV Year the limit range 1970 2037 73 ueea ot ag Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Timer Clock source Extemal device PLE name Address Ty s b o 16 bit Unsigned Addres PLC name IEN A Device type Address Address Format DOD range 0 255 _ Index register 16 bit Unsigned w Type Display printers supported For HP PCL Series it has to be connected through USB interface
129. user name uploadhis and the HMI history upload password if not changed the default is 111111 Or to directly enter ftp uploadhis 111111 192 168 1 103 R ARPE te Fee Sia LEID aA eAH ff Ps Pax fF FAE gz it LiF kt 4 Te E A E ie A H Step 3 After entering IP ftp 192 168 1 103 is shown and the datalog eventlog and recipe folders can be seen 2 Seles D PE tO RGA LAID BAH O p On pans ih BLD Ais datalog eventlog recipe B Internet Bem devcer 35 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data Step 1 To backup Data Sampling records ke 753 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select datalog folder the file names set by EB8000 can be seen click them to check the datalog files Voltage is the saved filename of this Data Sampling Afie a a 4 Users can save Data Sampling records on PC by copy amp paste Step 2 To backup Event Alarm Log records Select eventlog folder to check the files Save them on PC by copy amp paste BRO HO WAO ROBBY IA HAH O 8 p Ps pam E FAD E fp192 168 1 103 ventog Step 3 Event Alarm Log records Select recipe folder to check the file records of events Save them on PC by copy amp paste To update the recipe data in HMI overwrite recipe rcp with new data and restart HMI in one minu
130. users will see their project shown as below 35 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 3 2 On line Simulation To execute click On line Simulation after correctly connecting the device Re B 2a46 36 2 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 4 Download the Project to HMI In the menu select Tool then select download to download the project file to HMI Before downloading be sure to check if all the settings are correct RE Z2A040 Lan Download Download reset event log reset data log initializing downloading project downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator At Aa rta EBSO00Y410 100614 eng firmware col downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 4 se EBSO00V410 100614 enog firrw aregu downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 4s e048 EBSO00Y410 100614 eng firrare cri downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator A itest xob downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 5 4s S48 EBBOO0V 410_100614_eng fontitest o downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator At yas ss EBSO00V410 100614 engifont test 1 scan font finished reboot HMI finished finished Password Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log Reboot HMI after download e Automatically using current settings to download after compi
131. v Execute macro Macro IDL JD 1 v Trigger mode When Set style is selected as Toggle there are three different modes to trigger macro command i e OFF gt ON ON gt OFF or ON lt gt OFF 182 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 4 Set Word Overview The Set Word object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode and the automatic operation mode The manual operation mode defines a touch area and users can activate the area to set the value of the word device When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration Click the Set Word icon in the toolbar and the New Set Word Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Word object will be created ag See the pictures below 183 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Set Word Object eneral Security Shape al Label Write address PLO name boc ge HMI Setting rn Write after button iz released Notification Enable met ON OQ met OFF v Before writing After writing PLO name Local HME 0 M HMI Setting A thibute Set Style Set value Cancel Setting Description Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of
132. value multi state switch will remain current state Jump to error state if input an illegal value multi state switch will jump to error state 204 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 8 Slider Overview The slide object can be used to create a slot area that changes the word s value by dragging the pointer Configuration Click the Slide object icon on the toolbar and the dialogue box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new slide object will be created See the pictures below me Ht Hew Slider Object x General Cutline Security Shane 2 Desription Write address PLC name Local HMI w __ Setting Address i Fe lo 16 bit Unsigned Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PLO name Local HMI ge Setting Address LB id 0 Watch address v Enable PLO name Setting Address La 10 16 bit Unsigned Setting Description Write address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system set value to 205 WLS Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FG Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Notification Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system
133. while other printers through COM port For more information please refer to Chapter 23 Printer Types supported by MT8000 Type HP PCL Series USB i w l None E Paper 26 SP M D E F EPSON ESGP Series HP PCL senes 085 Using COM port to connect printer users should set accurate parameters When the type of printer is SP M D E F the pixels of width has to be set accurately i e the set pixel s can not exceed printer s default setting Otherwise this printing won t succeed Type See ee COM Band rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Pixels of width Screen hard copy scale 100 pixels for 1610 type or 220 pixels for 2407 4004 type Storage 1 Storage space available for the project and history data is 12MB By space adjusting the space of these two parts users can reach their 74 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual management memory requirements for example using smaller sized project to For T series get bigger memory space for historical data It works contrariwise only Minimum Project size is 6MB Maximum Project size is 10 MB default is 8MB Minimum Historical data size is 2MB Maximum Historical data size is 6 MB default is 4MB For adjusting storage space users should erase history data saved in HMI before downloading project file STOVES space management History data space Max HOB file size 40M 5 0M Hint If change storage space please rese
134. writes data index and the content of watched data to the watch address as shown in the following picture Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator 50 Le Control ia No of Data 32 bit NOTE 1 Data Index is a 16 bit unsigned integer when the designated register of cursor line is 32 bit device it will be stored in the bit 0 15 2 The watch function can only inspect current value in the data block If there are multiple trend curves of the same channel on the screen the data of previous trend curves is not exist only the latest value is available for watch 3 If the trend curve is cleared when position the cursor line the 0 will be displayed as shown below 292 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address 50 Watch indicator 2 Control zi Control 0 Index m No of Data No of Data 1 oo 16 bit BCD 5 i 40 Data 1 2 32 bit Data 2 50 Data 2 3 unsigned 20 Data 3 EJ Data 3 4 10 Data 4 40 Data 4 Data 5 O Data 5 Data 6 300 Data 6 Data 7 30 Data 7 4 If there are only three data in Channel 1 when position the cursor in Data 4 the 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator m7 Control 0 hai m 3 No of Data 1 o 16bit BCD _ 30 Data 1 2 32 bit 20 Data 2 3 unsigned 20 10 Data 3 4
135. 0 25 Mi OOOO Toggle amp 10 2r M 00000 After opening Package the information such as Object Screen ID Address inside it will be displayed Object Package ID where this object is placed Screen Window in the project where this object is placed D ID of the object Address of the object Note a Click Package ID the device station number will be displayed in 3 column Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 41 Local Hil LB 00562 I 1 a 0 Local Hil LB O05 74 4 B67 32 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet COO 8 3 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 10 D610 00000 3 b Double click Package ID then select object the 1 column directs the object s position For example select Numeric Input and the screen no displays 10 This shows that this object is in window no 10 in the project and will be marked with pink frame in HMI as shown below 733 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Folling Packages q Ed Object Screen IL Address 41 Local H ll LB 00562 1 8 0 Local Hhil LB O05 74 4 BF a2 SIEMENS S577300 Ethernet 1 M 0000n 1 66 3 SIEMENS S577300 Ethernet L610 00000 s 3 gt Cae a DB1 0 Mumeric l L610 00001 Mumeric l 10 4 L610 00002 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet Devices Devices window displays information of HMI and PLC 734 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Index U Type Mame MTSO00 Series H il Location Local
136. 00 R W R W R W rack m LW 10529 16bit PLC 6 parameter 2 SIEMENS 7 400 602 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 10530 16bit PLC 7 timeout unit 100ms LW 10531 16bit PLC 7 turn around delay unit ms ORW RW RW LW 10532 16bit PLC 7 send ACK delay unit ms SNE nsona LW 10533 sch PLC 7 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 Pf CERES LW 10534 PLC 7 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 LW 10535 16bit PLC 8 timeout unit 100ms LW 10536 16bit PLC 8 turn around delay unit ms RT n LW 10537 16bit PLC 8 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS S7 400 Link type LW 10538 16bit PLC 8 parameter 1 SIEMENS 7 400 rack LW 10539 16bit PLC 8 parameter 2 SIEMENS 7 400 R W R W R W CPU slot 603 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM Read Write Control Address Description Local Remote MACRO LB 9150 auto connection for PLC 1 when ON ov row T LB 9151 auto connection for PLC 2 COM2 when ON LB 9152 auto connection for PLC 3 COM3 when ON se Bee LB 9200 PLC 1 status SNO COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9201 PLC 1 status SN1 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9202 PLC 1 status SN2 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9203 PLC 1 status SN3 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9204 PLC 1 status SN4 COM1 set on to retry
137. 1 10 FATE FB so PLC LF PLC default station Step 2 Correctly set the parameters COM 1 of HMI 2 connects with COM 2 of HMI 1 so they both must have the same communication parameters and interfaces ignoring the PLC parameters As below COM 2 of HMI 1 and COM 1 of HMI 2 use RS232 and the parameters are 115200 E 8 1 673 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC type FATEK FE Series 1 10 FATEER FB so com COM k LOM COM 1 a Use broadcast co Baud rate 115200 ka Data bits 8 Bits y Interval of block pack word ie Forty Even atop bits 1 Bit ki Step 3 Since HMI 2 views PLC a remote device here we change Location to Remote and select COM port to connect remote HMI HMI 1 CO HMI PLC e ee Remote _ Settings COM 1 master slave mode IF Address Settings Location PLL type Vi1A0 Ethemet COM COMI Use PLC DF Mame Location Device toe Interface HMI Local HMI Local MTS6056T MTS056T Disable COM master slave mode FATEE FB beries e 1 Remote PLC 1 FATEE FE Series DEn COR 1 11520 After completing all settings described above users can find a new device named Remote PLC 1 in the device table This device has the symbol means that HMI uses a COM port not Ethernet to control a remote PLC via other HMI Users can check local registers of HMI to view the communication status Remote PLC1
138. 1111 In Menu Objects select Backup and the following dialogue appears 655 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Backup Object Ed General Security Shane Label Dewi O PoC OEW OEW A Historical event log Historical data log Backup postion OUE 1 CSB 2 Remote printerbacknp server Note Use L W9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printerbackup server to store data to a remote PL Enable the server in Sveten Parameter Printer Backup Server settings Fange Stat Today Yesterday win Attribute Mode Touch tigger kal 8 In Source select Historical event log 9 In Backup position select Remote printer server 10 In Range select Today and AIl 11 In Attribute select Touch trigger 12 Place the Backup object in the common window window no 4 and users will be able to make backups anytime when needed 13 Compile and download project to MT8000 HMI Press the Backup object set in step 12 to make a backup of the Event Log history data The Backup object can be triggered via a bit signal Users can arrange a Scheduler object which turns a bit ON at the end of week to trigger a Backup object to automatically back up all history data 656 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide 26 3 1 Appearance at WT Remote Ponte beret ayain l Ceo E fae f
139. 15 Display Control LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 Snapshot of Data Block Display 281 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Configuration New object Click the Data Block Display icon Data Block Display s properties dialogue box appears as follows Hew Data Block Display Object General Display Area Shape No of channel 1 a Cursor line v Enable Color M PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Control address PL name Local HMI Ww Setting No ot data address i i Offset to start address Data storage start address PLC name Local HMI Setting Limit Cancel Help Setting Description No of Set the no of channel for this object Each channel represents one data channel block The max no of channel is 12 Cursor Line Using the Cursor line function when user touches the Data Block display object it will display a cursor line on the data block display object and transfer the position of cursor and the data at the cursor position to 282 Nols ce EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address the designated registers Please refer 19 3 On line operation for further information Channel Select each channel and set the attributes Control PLC name Select the PLC where the target data block located Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users c
140. 16B Al 4 1769 05324 A 5 1769 0 W164 P 6 1769 IF16V A The Tags of these modules won t list the structure when exported to CSV file Therefore users should build it first A B C D E F Zz qT TYPE SCOPE NAME DESCEIFT DATATYPE SPECIFIEEATTRIBUTES S TAG Local 1 AB Leo _Dilo 1 0 3 TAG Local 23 ABLV69 Disa 1 0 10 TAG Loeal 3 0 ABT Yoo DOlL6 C 0 1l TAG Local 2 B 1769 D ol6 1 0 12 TAG Localis 0 AB 69 DO16 0 0 13 TAG Locale B 69 DOs2 0 0 l4 TAG Local 4 B 1769 DOS41 0 l5 LAG Local40 AB Leo DOS2 0 0 16 TAG Local si0 ABIL 769 DO1l6 0 0 17 TAG Local 5 B 1769_ DOL6 1 0 l TAG Localia G AB Loo DO16 0 0 19 TAG Local 6 C AB eo _IFl6 C 0 20 TAG Local 6 ABT 69 TFl6 1 0 Al TAG Local 6 0 AB Yo9 IFl6 0 0 Q In Controller Organizer Data Types Module Defined of RSLogix5000 double click Data Type of the module Data members of that type of the module will be listed in a window pops up Copy the Name and Data Type of the Members 749 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Controller Organizer Unecheduled Frosrams Motion Groups J Ungrouped Axes Add On Tnehoctions Data Types Ca User Defined afk Strings Ca Add Cn Defined H O Predefined a Module Deti AB1769_D116 0 Wi AB 769_D1321 0 AB 1769 _DOG C0 ff AB L769 _DOGI 0 AB 1769 _DOG 0 0 H AB 1769 _DO32 0 0 H AB L769 DO321 0 i AB 1769 _DO32 0 0 i AB 1769_IF16 C0 4B 1769_IF1610 i AB YOO TF16 0 0 BEEBEE EEE EE
141. 2 gt gt video n gt video 1 Background select the background color of the object Normally the format of the above registers is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen as the control address only 0 15 bits are effective Users should zero the 16 31 bits Control command a Play index file Command 1 Parameter 1 file index Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 The files are sorted with file name in ascending order the file index 0 is for to the first file and son on 2 If it is unable to scan file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish b Play previous file Command 2 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 If the file index is previously O it will re play the same video from the start 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish c Play next file Command 3 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 338 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 If there is no next video file it will play the first index 0 file 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish d Pause Play Switch e f Command
142. 2 BYTE 6 command 7 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 command 8 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 8 The usage of INPORT is described below INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response Where the real read count is restored to the variable return_value unit is byte If return_value is 0 it means reading fails in executing INPORT 525 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Depending on the protocol response 1 must be equal to 0x3 if the response is correct After getting correct response calculate the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 and put in the data into LW100 and LW101 of HMI if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if The complete macro is as follows Read Holding Registers macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 address O starting address 4x_1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read _no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5
143. 2 0 length2 20 char src3 20 abcdefghij int length3 length3 StringLength src3 2 length3 8 end macro_command Description This function appends source string to destination string It adds the contents of source string to the last of the contents of destination string The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be an one dimensional char array This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after concatenation exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 20 abcdefghij 494 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual char dest1 20 123456 7890 bool success1 success1 StringCat src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 123456 790abcdefghij char dest2 10 1234567890 bool success2 success2 StringCat abcde dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abcdefghij char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 StringCat src3 0 dest3 15 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name StringCompare Description ret StringCompare str1 start str2 start ret StringCompare string1 str2 start ret Strin
144. 2 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet Read Write Control Address Loca Remote Description MACRO LB 9153 LB 9154 LB 9155 LB 9156 when ON when ON when ON when ON R W R W R W R W R R W R W R W W R R N W W W IW auto connection for PLC 4 ethernet x Nr auto connection for PLC 5 ethernet A D x auto connection for PLC 6 ethernet x A auto connection for PLC 7 ethernet oaom A TZ Nr A A A eZ Nr r r r CO HM LB 9157 auto connection for PLC 8 ethernet when ON R W R W LB 9158 auto connection for PLC 9 ethernet when ON R W R W LB 10070 forced to reconnect PLC 4 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10071 forced to reconnect PLC 5 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10072 forced to reconnect PLC 6 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10073 forced to reconnect PLC 7 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10074 forced to reconnect PLC 8 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10075 forced to reconnect PLC 9 ethernet when IP or R W R W R W system parameters changed on line set ON LB 10100 PLC 4 status ethernet set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 10400 PLC 5 status et
145. 3 success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 end macro_command Name StringBin2DecAsc success StringBin2DecAsc source destination start Description This function converts an integer to a decimal string It converts the integer in source parameter into a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 2147483647 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringBin2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 2147483647 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 60 int src3 2147483647 char dest3 5 bool success3 488 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description success3 StringBin2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command StringDecAsc2Float success StringDecAsc2Float source start destination or success StringDecAsc2Float source destination
146. 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion Step1 Click File Multi File a setting dialog will pop up Step2 Click Add File to add files into List Multi File Convert file list CMEBSO00 eng1 34 datalog 1 23420081 127 dtl CNEBSOOO eng1 344datalogstrend 20087 125 dtl Enable Setting file Combine to a file C Documents and Settngs ugertest xls Step3 After adding files check Combine to a file files will be separated into sheets of one EXCEL file labeled with the dated it is added 641 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 11 02 32 11 32 33 11 32 34 11 32 35 11 32 36 Iaa 11 32 35 11 32 39 11 32 40 11 32 41 11 32 42 11 32 43 11 32 44 DAAA GAGAGAGAGGAGGA AGAGAGA A A Note If users don t check this box the files will be exported to Excel individually Ele Edt Yew Options Help amp kh a a C Documents and Settings user 20081127 dtl Success C Documents and Settings user 20081128 dtl Success 642 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 3 Enable Setting File User can load an existing Setting file to apply to a data log file s Step1 Save the setting to test lgs after filling out scaling amp offset sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point AAE 16 bit Unis sened E 16 bit Unsigned oe Tee 0 0000 1 0000 new value value x B value 2 0000 Step2 In a new d
147. 4 end macro_command If there is no error press Exit button and find that a new macro macro_ test exists in Macro list change remote 1 win change remote 2 win change remote 3 win OncChangeDubai OnChangeWTI OnInit OnShowBrent OnShowDubai OnShowWTI Macro under development 520 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 7 2 Execute a Macro There are several ways to execute a macro a With a PLC Control object 1 2 Open the PLC Control object and set the attribute to Execute macro program select the macro by name Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger the macro The macro will continue to be re triggered as long as the condition is met In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once consider latching the trigger bit and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object to activate the bit b With a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated c With a Function Key object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated 521 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 8
148. 4 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Stop playing and close file Command 5 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Start playing at designated target location Command 6 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Parameter 1 target location should less than end time If it is over end time the system play video from last second g Forward Command 7 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Increase playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is over end time the system play video from last second h Backward Command 8 339 L WE NTEK Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 Decrease playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is less than start time the system play video from the beginning i Adjust volume Command 9 Parameter 1 volume 0 128 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Default volume is 128 j Set video display size Command 10 Parameter 1 display size 0 16 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 0 Fit vi
149. 4 bytes BMP BMP BMP BMP Select Lib Lrattach Lib Rename Export Import Picture Modify Picture Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After Setting Description Library Picture Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Picture from the list Select the state that current graph represents If the selected Picture isn t displayed it means that the Picture does not exist or the state of the Picture isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Picture Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 398 New Lib Unattach Lib Delete All States Delete Cur State Rename Insert Before Insert After Import Picture Upper Coy iy New Folder chg urd di Zi button fb i button 2A E bution tet by Be button tb Ta butter arib Sa button 4 el butbon df T button Iib Sal burtoni gb Tbuirt E butor 12b a E computer fb Fi pene Fiii of hpi current project EasyBuilder 8000 Rename eer ie tered PE piure fb NG EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Vite Gi a Tig AMERICA Zl sg ASIAM a Gal Alag_ELROPE TAg OCEANA Zdicont fe Ti pl fe 2d mpkayes fib lt a TIMI Dem Sd MT Demi a MISO Dem Sl MT8000_Ceme TEGUND Ti tard fb i
150. 4io6 F526 21 F526 317 45 26 36 Event 0 when Li Event 2 when LE a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the top b Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD d Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM 4 HH The font tab sets the font size and italic attribute The font of event message is set with the event log object 320 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based Overview Data Transfer Trigger based object can transfer values from the source registers to the destination registers The data transfer operation can be activated by pressing the object or setting a trigger bit Configuration Click Data Transfer Trigger based object icon on the toolbar Data Transfer Trigger based object dialogue box will show up set each item in the General tab press OK button anew Trigger Data Transfer object will be created See the picturea below Data Transfer Triecer based 321 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manu
151. 6 Index 5 Object B Index 5 In conclusion From illustration above we realize that Index register is used to change addresses Through changing the data in index register we can make an object to read and write different data from different addresses without changing its own address of the device Therefore we can transmit or exchange data among different addresses 160 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 12 Keyboard Design and Usage Both Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects need to use keyboard as input tool Except for calling up a popup keyboard users can design a keyboard without title bar or a fixed keyboard in the window Even UNICODE keyboard can be created Both numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are created with Function Key object The process and usage are illustrated below 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keypad Step 1 Create and open a window for a keyboard to be added For example set WINDOW 200 as the window for a keyboard Step 2 Adjust the height and width of WINDOW 200 and create a variety of Function Key objects in it Input signals will be triggered by pressing Function Keys The Function Key objects in WINDOW 200 are arranged as above These objects should be set in ASCII UNICODE mode 161 Ys WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Here FK_11 is used as the Escape Esc key and its settings ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clea
152. 6bit no of event log files on SD card R R J R 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 10481 32bit size of event log files on SD card PR R J R LW 10483 16bit no of event log files on USB 1 LW 10486 16bit no of event log files on USB 2 LW 10487 32bit size of event log files on USB 2 PR R m 1 If LW 9450 LW 9455 are used as tags of Event Log time source please set system parameters General correctly f ce Rk f Te R 588 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 6 HMI Hardware Operation Read Write Control Address Description Local Remote 5 0018 Rw Rw LB 9020 show set ON hide set OFF system setting bar R R W R W LB 9033 disable when on enable when off HMI upload function i series only LB 9040 backlight up set ON 1 LB 904 1 backlight down set ON 1 LB 9047 reboot HMI set ON when LB9048 is on LB 9048 reboot HMI protection LB 9062 open hardware setting dialog set ON LB 9063 disable set ON enable set OFF popuping information dialog while finding an USB disk i R W R W R W zy D o I lt a a a series support only LW 9008 32bit float battery voltage i series supports only 2 wa 502 ws W502 LW 9040 16bit backlight index 1 LW 9080 16bit backlight saver time unit minute LW 9081 16bit screen saver time unit minute 1 LW 9040 used together with LB 9040 LB 9041 can
153. 85 4W LW 9551 16bit COM 1 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 3840 R W R W R W 0 4 57600 LW 9552 16bit COM 1 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits R W R LW 9553 16bit COM 1 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd R W R LW 9554 16bit COM 1 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits R W R LW 9555 16bit COM 2 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 a Se z A R W R W R W 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9556 16bit COM 2 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 3840 R W R W R W 0 4 57600 LW 9557 16bit COM 2 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits R W R LW 9558 16bit COM 2 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd R W R is a g LW 9559 LW 9560 LW 9561 16bit COM 2 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits R W 16bit COM 3 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W R W 16bit COM 3 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 3840 R W R W R W 0 4 57600 LW 9562 16bit COM 3 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits R W LW 9563 16bit COM 3 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd R W LW 9564 16bit COM 3 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits R W R LW 9565 16bit COM 1 broadcast station no R W R LW 9566 16bit COM 2 broadcast station no R W R LW 9567 16bit COM 3 broadcast station no R W R W LW 10500 16bit PLC 1 timeout unit 100ms R W R 601 R R A z R W R W R z aapa R R cm m ae W D my A z g
154. Address type Interval 3 0 seconds w Active only when designated window opened Source address PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Destination address PLE name Local HMI E Setting Setting Description Attribute Address type select the bit or word device No of words or No of bits When select Word type the unit of data transfer is word set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Word Interval 3 0 second s Mo of words 4 When select Bit type the unit of data transfer is bit set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Bi Interval 3 0 second s Mo of bits 344 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Interval Select the wait interval for each data transfer for example select 3 seconds the system will conduct data transfer operation every 3 seconds 1 Specifying a small interval or a big number of data to transfer may cause an overall performance decrease due to the time consuming in transferring data Therefore users should always try to choose a longer interval and a smaller amount of data to transfer 2 When a short interval is inevitable be aware of the interval must be longer than the data transfer operation For example if the data transfer operation take 2 seconds you must set the interval longer than 2 seconds Source Set source address address
155. B LOO Tame Example 2 Set temperature at 90F at 8 00 and set it back to 30F standby mode at 17 00 Monday to Friday When the designated ee OR start time is reached The running mode temperature setting is wirtten LW100 30 C When the designated The standy mode temperature stop time is reached setting is written 357 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click New to add a new schedule object Follow the steps to set up the schedule object The LW100 is used to store set value of temperature Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power OM startend action Acton mode O Bit ON O Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Word write value settings Constant O Addes Setva 0 O Cancel General tab 1 Power ON start end action Power ON startend action 2 Check Word write in Action mode Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 3 Set LW100 in Action address 358 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Acton address PLC name Lacal HMI wt Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned 4 Check Constant and set Write start value to 90 in Word write value settings Word write value settings Constant O Addres Write siart valus Time Set tab 5 Select Time Set tab check Constant 6 Unselect Settin
156. BUS ASCII server COM 2 LW 9543 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server COM 3 LW 9544 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server Ethernet 568 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 19 3 About MODBUS Address Type Address types under MODBUS protocol in EB8000 are Ox 1x 3x 4x 5x 6x 3x_bit and 4x_ bit Modbus RTU function code Note Address type 5x is mapping to Hold Reg The communication protocol of 5x is almost same as 4x except 5x makes double word swap If 4x contains following information Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 Data 0x20001 0x40003 0x60005 For 5x it becomes Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 Data in word 0x2 0x1 0x4 0x3 0x6 0x5 Data 0x10002 0x30004 0x50006 Address type 6x is limited to data of one word only The communication protocol of 3x_bit and 4x_bit are the same as 3x and 4x The difference is that 3x_bit and 4x_bit read single bit of the whole data 569 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode Device Barcode interfaces SIN MAIM EUA NA NI VID DID DE PID EHHH Hi COM PORT 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode Device Weintek HMI support connecting barcode USB COM device Please add a new barcode device in Edit System Parameter Settings Device list first as shown below Click Settings and Tal System Parameter Settings finish Barcode Device 7 Settings
157. C register gt HMI RW PLC register gt HMI LW HMI RW gt PLC register HMI LW gt PLC register With this function the system uses four continuous word devices please refer to the following explanation Trigger Control code The valid control code is listed address in the above table When a new control code is written into the register the system will conduct the data transfer function Trigger Number of words to address 1 transfer Trigger Offset to the start If the value is n the start address 2 address of PLC address of PLC register is register Trigger address 4 n Trigger The start address of address 3 LW or RW As an example to transfer PLC registers DM100 101 105 to HMI RW10 11 15 follow the steps below 1 Set Trigger address to DM10 2 Set DM11 6 no of words to transfer 3 Set DM12 86 DM10 4 86 DM100 4 Set DM13 10 RW10 5 Set DM10 1 The system will execute the data transfer operation d Back light control write back 349 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set Trigger address to ON the system will turn on off the backlight and reset the Trigger address Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on e Back light control This operation is the same as Back light control write back except the system would not reset the Trigger address e Sound control Sound Li
158. C34 expected constant expression Illegal array index format C35 invalid array declaration C36 array index error C37 undeclared identifier 1 identifier Any variable or function should be declared before use C38 un supported PLC data address The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address If the address is illegal this error message will be shown C39 idenifier must be integer char or constant The format of array is Declaration array_name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array _namel integer character or constant Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C40 execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition For example macro_command main _ int a b fora OTo2 b 4 a inth k _ illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions I forexample b 4 a next a end macro_command C41 float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation C42 function must return a value 533 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C43 function should not return a value C44 float variables cannot be contained in calculation C45 PLC address error C46 array size overflow max 4k C47 macro command entry function is not only one C48 macro command entry function must be only one The only one main entrance of macro is macro_command function_name
159. Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of source address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Destination Set destination address address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object After completing all settings and pressing the OK button a new Data Transfer Time based Object is created The summary displays all the registered data transfer objects with brief information as shown below Data Transfer Time based Object z sss m 1 Local HMILB200 gt Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bitt EL aca HTL E aca HMT SB Moda tor imme Interyal Oo seco adc sFoTer lenoth Local HMELESO Local HMELBAG Mode Bit Time interval 3 0 secondts i transfer length 15 bitis 345 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 27 PLC Control Overview The PLC control object activates a specific operation when the corresponding control device is triggered Configuration Click the PLC Control icon and the PLC Control Object summary appears as shown below 4 PLE Controll e em ELC Control Object Change wind
160. DOW 035 v When the state of LB10 is set to ON the window 35 will be popup when the state of LB10 is OFF the window 35 will be closed See the picture below WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Toggle Switch Read address L810 Write address 1 810 Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Mode Toggle Mode Toggle 233 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WINDOW 35 Toggle Switeh Read address LB10 Write address L B10 Mode Toggle Toggle Switeh Read address LEIO Write address L B10 Mode Te agile a NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed simultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 234 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 13 Moving Shape Overview Moving Shape object is used to define the object s state and moving distance The Moving Shape object is used to place an object in a window at a location specified by the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape in the window depend on the current values of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object the second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y Configuration Click the Moving Shape icon on the toolbar and New Moving Shape Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items p
161. Datal gqnCount 54 qntestVYal gqnCurr 55 SetDataigntestYal 56 gqnceorrectVYal z ET setData qneorrecty 55 ASYNC_TRIG MACRO 59 HError assert qm 60 ff gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ASS 61 62i end macro cormand 63 11 Right click to select Toggle All Outlining to open all macro code blocks WorkSpace GetData GR O Local HMI pf feo ag Get i 49 guma sof Set Si Get 52 gnCou Select al cr 53 5 ed 54 gutes Togele Bookmark Ctrl F2 cs Setpa Next Bookmark F2 55 gncon PreviousBookmerk Shft F2 57 SetDa Clear All Bookmarks a aa leg att Cale 60 foo Update AU Outlining gl WorkSpace next J 429 LE O GetDatalOK O Local HMI LB O 5 for J 0 to 3 EDD set gqnOurrentMNCount gt gt gt gt e e i i qnturrenthCount 1 HMI I SetbhataignturrentMcount Local HMI 333533330353 set gnOurrentMNCount gt gt gt gt HMI I I LW if OE E 1 then K E ii1 JI LW setDataltK Local HMI LW kK qncour else MI L E KE end if 1 HMI EET set gnturrentMCount qnCurrentMCount 2 neount setDbatal gqnCurrentMCount Local HMI ae ae ea EEDD set gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt Lv WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 Sometimes the outlining might be incorrect since that the keywords are misjudged For example Works pace 1 2 macro command main i cj 4 if 1 then Ss if 1 then 6 end if end mac
162. E E 102 7 1 Event Log Management cccccccecceccceeceeceeeceeceeceeeceesaeeceeseecaeeseesaeeceesensaeesass 104 TNE CSU IE ING aa espera e E E E E E E E E E E 106 2 Create a New Event LOQ eee ee EENE 110 coana ao DAG SaN ear a E E E E A 117 8 1 Data Sampling Management ccccccceccceccceeceeeseeeceeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeenes 119 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling ccccccccceccceccseeceeeseeeceeeseeeceeeseeeeueseeseeeseeeeeeeees 120 Chapter 9 Object General Properties cccecccecceecceeeceeeceeeeeeseeeceeeseeseeseeseeeseeeseeees 124 Oe SCC CHING FEG serrera a a E E E E E E E EE EEE G 124 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing Address cccecccecceeeceeeceeeceeseeeaeeeaeeeaues 124 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library ccc cccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 128 9 2 1 Settings of Shape LIDFANY srewesisviveesaiwcdiswscieaicieunciendsewswinniiensssacshuessuddeunseudtenssieimeuess 128 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 2 2 SEUINGS of Picture LOAN y essiri pe E 132 goeta FOX C ONENI eenen eran r EERE EEEE ENE EE ORE 135 94 Adjusting Profile SIZ C seriis nean ee a n eA eru sri Erri 140 9 5 Varables f Station NUMDEP gocecssensaczacesacreadondcguedanersvedenorssodeseseeedardegnesensecodereesteds 141 9 0 Broadcast Stalon NUMDOT scste netic aecranteancrantenntsactsmeornesceaensee E EEEE ES 143 FA TOS G CU ea E E E EE E E E EE 144 10 1 Settings of Password a
163. E EE EEEE 508 18 7 How to Create and Execute a Macro sssessessrersrrerererrersrrrrrrnrrrrrrnrerrrrerererrererre 516 18 7 1 How to Create a Macro sseseseserersrsrnrnrnsrnrnrererererrrrrrnrnininrnrenenenenenennnennnas 516 fio ay Goyal EKC WEA MITO e E EE E eee 521 18 8 Some Notes about Using the MaCro ccc cccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeaees 522 18 9 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device ccc cccecc ccc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 523 TOL TO ACOMDMGE ENON IMCS SAG Sacre sass nE E E E E E 529 18 11 Sample Macro COE en eee ree 535 18 12 Macro TRACE PUI CUO Mieeccacaccneseceessecaseessecareaccenosee lt secsseeqnaeesecasegeseecsaseteeaneaesanos 540 18 13 The Usage of String Operation FUNCTIONS cece ceceeeceeeceeece esse eeaeesseeeaees 549 18 14 Macro Password ProleCUO ssencesacessccetecsacendevsicentcunncend acatsoniesnceastedssuveisunaceniecnes 560 Chapter 19 Set HMI as a MODBUS Serve cc ccccecceccseeceeteeeeeeteeeeeeceeseeeseesaeeeeeees 562 19 1 Setting HMI as MODBUS Device annannannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnrrnrrnrnnrnrrnrrrrrnrrnernenne gt 562 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS SVET a ecuceiatann rani ea rene E EAE OE i a ENa 562 19 1 2 Read from Write to MODBUS Servet ccc ceccccecceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 565 19 2 Changing the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime 568 19 3 ABDOUtTMODBYS Address PVC tren sas sscesesesonsseaanasaneserensped
164. E a E short oe 7 short 16 bit int 32 bit int 32 bit float 32 bit E S T e a When a SetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the 475 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual function will automatically send int format or float format data to the device For example macro_command main float f 2 6 SetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 will send a floating point value to the device end macro command macro_command main int i bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 fori 0 to 29 bfi true next fori 0 to 49 dli 1 2 next for i 0 to 9 f i i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 476 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual set the values of LWO LW49 SetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int setData e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words setData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command Description SetDataEx send_data start device name device_type address_offset data_count or SetDataEx send_data device_name device type address off
165. F beeper is enabled If restart HMI the settings of beeper stay the same 149 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 10 3 Examples of Security The following illustrates the steps of security feature Step1 First of all create a new project Go to System parameter Security add three users and set different passwords and classes System Parameter Sethngs Font Extended Memory Frinten Backup server Device Model General System Setting security pelect operatable classes for each v r User 1 E Enable Password Fla Me Mc MD ME BF User 2 Enable Password Ma Me Oc Op Of OF User 3 Enable Password wa MB Mc OD OF OF User 1 can operate objects with class A user 2 can operate objects with class A and B and user 3 can operate objects with class A B and C Step2 Set objects in Window_ 10 as below L92179 Username Password HHH w922 bit 15 Current status 1111111111111111 49222 LB9050 SB 0 Class A Button SB 1 Class B Button zio Class C Button 150 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual NE _O and NE_1 are numeric input objects with addresses LW 9219 and LW 9220 that are for inputting user ID and password LW 9219 is for entering user ID 1 12 with the length of 1 word in a data format of 16 bit Unsigned as
166. Font tab determine the font of non ASCII which is used in EB8000 o stem Parameter Sethnygs Eg Device Model General System pettine SECULT Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Fonts for non aacu shrines 3 of 9 Barcode an Arial Harrow Artal Naxrow Bold Delete All B Mirrintt Sane Set Fonts for non strings Fonts for non ASCII strings are listed above When users use non ASCII character set or double byte character set including simplified or traditional Chinese character Japanese or Korean which is not listed in Fonts for non ASCII strings table EB8000 will select a font from the list to substitute for it automatically Users can also test which non ASCII strings of Windows can be used in EB8000 and add them to Fonts for non ASCII strings table Line spacing Decide the interval between lines in the text 85 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Add All Non ascii Fonts Line spacing H Line spacing 0 Add AllNon aseii Fonts Line spacing 2 Line spacing 6 86 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 7 Extended Memory Parameters in Extended Memory tab determine the path of the extended memory System Parameter Settings Device Model Creneval System pettine SECUrtY Font ee Extended Memory Printe Backup Server EMO Fie mane a ODi UB EM Fiemme vain O ODi OUS EM Fle name a Obe USBI EM Fle mame a UB E4 Fie same aiea
167. General Security Shape Label Description Write address PLL name Local HMI Ww Setting Write after button is released A thibute Macro v Execute macro Macro IDL dD 1 OFF OH t OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON Cancel Setting Description Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 180 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address PLC name Local HMI wt Device type LB ad Address a Syvstern tag Address Format DODDO range 0 11999 Index register Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched If the Momentary switch is selected as the operation mode the Write after button is released function will be ignored Attribute Please refer to the following description for different types of operation Set Style mode Set ON When the operation is activated the bit device PRN amemon nn Set OFF When the operation is activated the bit device See itbesetworr nea Toggle When the operation is activated the bit device Te beton OFF orem OFF on Momenta
168. HMI OPLC Location Local wa Interval of block pack words 5 v Steps to add a new device 62 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC on je gora PLC Device The so called Ilocal PLC means a PLC which is connected to the local HMI directly To control a local PLC users need to add this type of device first Click New under the Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Please correctly fill in all of the properties required Take a local PLC MITSUBISHI FX0n FX2 as an example Device Properties MITSUBISHI FXOn Fx2 OHMI PLC PLE type MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 ka VWo1 10 MITSUBISHI FAON s0 PLC LF RS 485 4 v PLE default station no Doo L Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command COMI 9600 E 7 1 Settings Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words Cancel Setting Description Name o The name of the device set by user HMI or PLC To confirm whether this connected device is a HMI or PLC It s PLC in this example 63 WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Local or Remote Showing whether this device is connected to Local HMI or being remote controlled Select Local in this case PLC type Type of PLC Select MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 in this case PLC I F Five PLC interfaces are available
169. I LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable Local HMI LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable data sampling no The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dtl 20110111 dtl 510 Lt WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The file index are 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtl gt index is 2 20110110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is O return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data_log number and index can be constant or variable year month day and return_value must be variable The return_ value field is optional macro_command main short data_log number 1 index 2 year month day short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101230 dtI with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution success 1 year 2010 month 12 and day 30 success FindDataSamplingDate data_log number index year month day end macro_command FindDataSamplingIndex return_ value FindDataSamplingIndex data_log_ number yea
170. Input and Numeric Display cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeess 209 13 10 ASGCILINDUL and ASC WM DISDIAY oc cisctonecesesostnisedesdcanctensdmedersanedesdaieedenieicadendeieeds 221 Voted MNOS CN WV NG OW aroe ates cemmcnantenecuaesecuanasce neceancececuaneeceaeenceaacuas 226 VEZ WIMSCE VVINGOW sic cccasseeccesaseececcasegestassaercncaaatocueasateseuesegesueaseoenmeasaeeseeesagecuesaceeseeese 231 MPO MOVING SINAC erer e E E E EE EERE EER 239 Tee ANAO orree E EE E E E E E E EEEE E 241 o B Ora E ee 246 1016 Metor DISDIAY sezcoeecexccenssearsessteercorecusesessdesrseeetesecesesesesecetesrseneteeeceretesssecsseursonecons 254 t17 Frond DISDIAy serrera e A R R E RE RE EE 262 Te VO ASO OAF DISI o a E E E E E EE E E E E 2 3 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 19 Data BiocK DISplay Gane eee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee 281 19220 OY FOU ccesrccsrctsrcesstesrses descesriepseezsdesecesccarecencsesasessieurieaweurseniesstesssesesscesees zeae 294 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display cccccccccecceecseeceeeeeeceeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeeaaes 308 ZZE VONC DIODI e E E E E A N E R 312 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger DaSe d ccccccceccseeceseceeeceeceeeeueeeeeseueceeeeeeeseesaeesanes 321 12A IB ACKUID sescccsnconasoscuentpescnanseenniened esedssed EE E E E EEES 324 13 25 Media Player ccccccccceccecceccaeceeeceececcceeceecaeeceesuecseesuesaeesaesaeessesaesuesensaeenass 331 13 26 Data Transfer
171. LL name Setting The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 and LW200 X data X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW103 X data 2 reads value from reading address LW104 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on Ydata Y low limit reads value from reading address LW200 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW201 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW202 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW203 Y data 2 reads value from reading address LW204 Y data 3 reads value from reading address LW205 and so on 298 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Limits The above settings are based on dynamic limits you can also have dynamic limits disable and set the fix high and low limits Limits Low 0 Hish 22707 Y anus Low 0 Hish 32767 he high and low limits is used as scale to calculate the percentage of X and Y axis i e X or Y X or Y reading value low limit high limit low limit Based on your settings the memory allocation for limit and XY data will be as follows The following setting is for 16 bit signed data format and dynamic limits Read address Behance Local HMI ve Separated address for E and Y dat
172. LW 9563 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9564 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits Click Get HMI Communication Parameters to update HMI current states and communication parameters 29 2 2 HMI Work Mode There are three work modes in the pass through function Mode Description Before getting the settings of HMI the work mode is displayed Unknown After getting the settings of HMI if work mode displays Normal s PC can t control PLC via HMI Pass through HMI is working on pass through state at this time the PC Prevent pleaioncn Ua AEn Source COM Port Destination COM Port 689 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The communication parameters of source and destination COM port are displayed in these two areas The settings will be used when Start pass through is clicked The Baud rate Data bits Parity and Stop bits of Source COM Port and Destination COM Port have to be the same Source COM Port connects PC so select RS232 mode Destination COM Port connects PLC so settings depend on the PLC requirements The illustration below shows the setting when HMI connects SIEMENS 7 200 The HMI COM 1 RS232 connects PC COM 3 RS485 2W connects PLC The communication parameter of PLC is 9600 E 8 1 Before starting pass through users must set the parameters in MTP project and download the project to HMI Device Properties Name SIEMENS 87 200 OHMI PLC
173. LW O 10799 DDDDD oe fe a Retentive RW 0 524287 DDDDDD fmm S O D Retentive RWI 0 65535 DDDDD Memory Word Index Example 567 RW address 567 LW 9000 Retentive RW_A 0 65535 DDDDD Monopod fn Extended EMO EM9 0s DDDDDDDDDD Memory Words Au avaro Limited by device max 2G 583 L W We INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 2 HMI Time LW 9010 ores local second Twoi 0652560 eamas w902 166800 ocan ew rw Rw jtw20t4 160 8C0 camo rw rw Rw evens aoso ocne mw w f Rw LW 9016 re local week LW 9023 16bit local week PR R R Lw2030 6268 epsom tme unt Otsecons rR R R 584 Ly 22 3 User Name and Password WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual HMI so swor i R RaR twaze ueniu oa ew ew ow wozo ezsa w ew w LW 9222 16bit classes can be _ for current user ta bit 1 B bit 2 C ew9800 seni user ts passw rw ew ew Lwss02 Gabi usor Zs password rw rw Rw jew2804 620i werSspaswod rw rw Rw wsos as were esses Rw f a R LW 9508 user 5 s password Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 585 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 4 Data Sampling Read Write Control Address Description Local Remote HMI CRO LB 9025 delete the earliest data sampling file on HMI memory set ON LB 9026 delete all data sampling files on HMI memory set O
174. LW a lo PLE name Device type Address o System tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Ho oF word al C Run simulation and input abcdef The string abcdef is stored in LWO LW2 as follows LB represents low byte and HB represents high byte The ASCII input object reads 1 word 2 bytes at a time as described in the previous chapter Suppose an ASCII input object is set to read 3 words as shown in the above 549 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual example it can actually read at most 6 ASCII characters since that one ASCII character occupies 1 byte The functionality of each string operation function is described in the following table Function name StringGet StringGetEx Description Read string data from a device Read string data from a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device StringSet StringSetEx Write string data to a device Write string data to a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device StringCopy StringMid stringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc stringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc StringHexAsc2Bin stringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare Copy one string to another Retrieve a substring Convert a decimal string to an integer Convert an integer to a decimal string Convert a decimal string to floats
175. LW305 Ch 3 16 bit Signed The picture below shows the attribute of trend display 267 1 word 2 words 2 words 1 word EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Frame m a Backeround sow roll controls v Enable division s v Enable Color es size g Time Date HH MM SS HH MM Color m Date MMDDYY ODDMMYY ODDMMY YMMDD Cancel Setting Description Frame The color of frame Background The color of background Show scroll To enable disable scroll control on the bottom of trend display object controls Set the distance and the color of grid Horiz Set the number of horizontal line Verti interval a Pixel Point distances Pixel O Time When select pixel to set the display interval see note on the above 268 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual graph and General tab the Verti interval is used to select how many sampling point will be included between two vertical grid line See the picture below Verti interval point s b Time When select Time to set the time range of display data the Verti interval is used to select the time range between two vertical grid lines See the picture below Vert interval second 3 According to these settings the system will calculate the number of vertical grid line automatical
176. Label tag Na None Time None Date None chu chil chi ch 3 ch 4 ch 5 cho ch ch s ch 3 ch 10 chill chlZ ch ls ch l4 Seting Description S To enable or disable title No Time Date ehg TAr monea 5271 22 43 08 16 09 07 Title Transparent background To enable or disable transparent Background color 279 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SF Set the background color of title This dialogue window defines the title 5272 22 43 06 Toor A 5271 22 43 08 1609 07 2 You can use label tag library for title with multi language Go to setting and select one from label library Title Setting Note lf you have run the off line simulation and the sampling data is saved in the record then you want to change the format of sampling data be sure to delete previous data record in C EB8000 HMI_memory datalog to avoid the system misinterpret the old data record 280 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 19 Data Block Display Overview Data Block is a combination of several word devices with continuous address for example LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 and so on Use Data Block Display object to display multiple data blocks in trend curve for example it can display two data blocks LW12 LW15 and RW12 RW15 in trend curve simultaneously It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend curves LW10 LW11 LW LW13 LW14 LW
177. M GB Function Key Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile State O HAA A thibute Font AE Mingti GE 4t Color M Size 16 ws Align Center v Elink None a Ttalic Underline Duplicate these attributes to every state 196 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual After complete the keypad configuration add window11 into System Parameters General keyboard as illustration below s stem Parameter Settings fx CIEBI Sayer Faas eT Back leht saver Hone w minter l PCIE SAVEL None v rite fs Ophon etechip window nmo 10 WINDOW 010 Extra no of events i Common window Above base window w L Eeyboarnd caretcolor D Object layout Nature w FW _ A enabled Eeyvboard 50 Keypad 1 Integer Keypad 2 Integer l 52 Keypad 3 Integer 53 Keypad 4 Integer 54 Keypad 5 Integer 55 Keypad 6 Integer 56 Keypad 7 HEX 57 Keypad 6 Floating 60 ASCI Middle 61 ASCI Small TIL SinpleChinese Eeyhoard 197 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 6 Toggle Switch Overview Toggle Switch object is a combination of bit lamp object and set bit object The object can be used not only to display the state of a bit device but also to define a touch area when activated
178. N LB 9027 refresh data sampling information on HMI memory set ON LB 9034 save event data sampling to HMI USB disk SD card set ON LB 11949 delete the earliest data sampling file on SD card set ON LB 11950 delete all data sampling files on SD card set ON LB 11951 refresh data sampling information on SD card set LB 11952 delete the earliest data sampling file on USB 1 set ON delete all data sampling files on USB 1 set ON O Z LB 11953 LB 11954 refresh data sampling information on USB 1 set ON LB 11955 delete the earliest data sampling file on USB 2 set ON LB 11956 delete all data sampling files on USB 2 set ON LB 11957 refresh data sampling information on USB 2 set ON LW 9063 16bit no of data sampling files on HMI memory LW 9064 32bit size of data sampling files on HMI memory LW 10489 LW 10490 LW 10492 LW 10493 LW 10495 LW 10496 16bit no of data sampling files on SD card 32bit 16bit 32bit 16bit 32bit size of data sampling files on SD card no of data sampling files on USB 1 Am Nr size of data sampling files on USB 1 Nor no of data sampling files on USB 2 size of data sampling files on USB 2 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 5 Event Log Address Description Local Remote MACRO HMI HMI LB 9021 reset current event log set ON Pw low w LB 9022 delete the earliest event log file on HMI memor
179. N indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC 675 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 28 3 How to Connect MT500 Project of Slave HMI Allowing MT500 using Master Slave protocol to read MT6000 8000 Local data and data of PLC connected with MT6000 8000 gt MT8000 Settings Step 1 Select Master Slave Server driver and click Settings If a PLC is connected follow the Original settings o stem Parameter Settings Ed Font Extended Memory Printer Backup SEIVEY Device Model General System Setting Security Device list No Mame Location Device type Interface UF Protoc Local HMI Local i MToUTUiH MTSUTU Disable Loc al Serv er Maste oe Master Slave Se ter Slave BE COMI 115200 E 8 1 O0 E 3 Ly IRS TER jiii gt 4 Step 2 Select RS232 and click Settings 676 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties Location PLE type Master Slave Server w Y 1 00 MASTER_SLAWE SO PLE I F RS 232 v COMI 115200 E 8 1 Settings Step 3 Fill in MT500 PLC ID No in Parameter 1 Refer to MT500 settings COH Port Settings COM Timeout sec Baud rate 15200 Turn around delay fms Data bits Bit Send ACK delay fms Parity i Parameter 1 Stop bits Parameter 2 Parameter 3 677
180. Name 664 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual There are two lines of text in the file Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a criterion of how to deal with a specific type of files e g Data Sampling and Event Log history files The first argument specifies the extension name for the type of the files to be processed and the second one specifies the exact command to execute in console mode Please note S PathName is a key word to tell EasyPrinter to replace it with the real name of the backup file in conversion For example if a Data Sampling history file named 20090112 dtl is uploaded and stored EasyPrinter will send out the following command to a console window EasyConverter c 20090112 dtl And then the CSV file named 20090112 csv is created Therefore the criteria of the default Convert Batch File are 1 Convert all Data Sampling history files dtl into CSV files 2 Convert all Event Log history files evt into CSV files Actually the PathName in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file In the previous case EasyPrinter replaces it with Specified Path HMI Folder datalog Folder name of the Data Sampling object 20090112 dtl EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File on a line basis i e each line forms a criterion Any two arguments should be separated by a comma Every argument should be put in double quotes Do not put any comma insid
181. Name Cian sie age E HMI PLC Location Settings Crete type Free Protocol 2 S y y W 1 00 FREE PROTOCOL so PLC F COM COMI 19200 E 8 The interface of the device PLC I F uses RS 232 now If connecting a MODBUS TCP IP device the interface must select Ethernet In addition it is necessary to set correct IP and port number as follows PLE type Free Protocol ka wW 1 00 FREE PROTOCOL so PLC I F Ethernet w Use UDP User Datagram Protocol IF 192 168 1 103 Port s02 523 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Suppose that HMI will read the data of 4x 1 and 4x 2 on the device First utilize OUTPORT to send out a read request to the device The prototype of OUTPORT is OUTPORT commandfstart device_name cmd_count Since MODBUS RTU device is a MODBUS RTU device the read request must follow MODBUS RTU protocol The request uses Reading Holding Registers 0x03 command to read data The following picture displays the content of the command The items of the station number byte 0 and the last two bytes CRC are ignored Request 0x03 Ox0000 to OxFFFF Response SS x 2 Bytes N Quantity of Registers Error 0x83 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Depending on the protocol the content of a read command as follows The total is 8 bytes command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 high byte of
182. Name please click Name in the Download window on PC as below 39 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Download Ethernet COUSB cable ti series only Password HMI name Test p 192 168 1 103 Test I i 1 i R Search ma Search all OS 20091002 or later supports Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Reset recipe _ Reset event log Reset data log Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Download Stan HMI Name Input the HMI name for downloading project Search Input the HMI name to search the designated HMI 132 153 135 Chest 2o E Search all Click to search the HMI shares the same network PS 155 1214 Default PT 192 263 1 335 Chest P 132 155 1 15 PATS lary Ot 20091002 o bis apor H 40 y4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Password Input the password Firmware Check Firmware to update all of the kernel programs of HMI Note It is necessary when downloading file to HMI the first time Font Files Download the font used in project to HMI Reset recipe Checking these the selected files will be erased Reset event log before downloading Reset data log
183. P2 IP3 LW 9609 16bit PLC 5 s port no R R W R W LW 9610 16bit PLC 6 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9611 16bit PLC 6 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9612 16bit PLC 6 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9613 16bit PLC 6 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9614 16bit PLC 6 s port no R R W R W LW 9615 16bit PLC 7 s IPO IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9616 16bit PLC 7 s IP1 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9617 16bit PLC 7 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 607 R W R W R W N s N N z z 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9618 16bit PLC 7 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9619 16bit PLC 7 s port no LW 9620 16bit PLC 8 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9621 16bit PLC 8 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9622 16bit PLC 8 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9623 16bit PLC 8 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9624 16bit PLC 8 s port no LW 9625 16bit PLC 9 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9626 16bit PLC 9 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9627 16bit PLC 9 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9628 16bit PLC 9 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9629 16bit PLC 9 s port no 608 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 18 Communication S
184. PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11965 disable PLC 6 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11966 disable PLC 7 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11967 disable PLC 8 s PLC No Response dialog when ON N N N LB 11964 disable PLC 5 s PLC No Response dialog when ON N N N 622 Ly 22 27 HMI and Project Key lt m E LB 9046 project key is different from HMI key when ON 2a 3S LW 9046 32bit HMI key i series only WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 623 22 28 Fast Selection Window Control od ne es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF ee LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF LB 9015 FS window button control hide ON show OFF 624 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 29 Input Object Function eO e a ET T E LW 9004 input low limit LW 9052 32bit float the previous input value of the numeric input object LW 9150 32 words keyboard s input data ASCII LW 9540 16bit reserved for caps lock H 625 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee one a Aii password remote read operation when LB 9053 rr password remote write operation when LB 9054 ON R W R W R W 22 30 Local Remote Operation Restrictions local HMI supports monitor function only when LB 9196 R W R W R W
185. PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC It is PLC in this case Location Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case and set the IP address of the remote HMI which is connected to SIEMENS 7 200 PLC Click Settings of Location to set this IP address IF Address Settings IP address 192 168 Port no 8000 PLC Type Type of PLC Select SIEMENS S7 200 in this case PLC I F This setting defines which interface the remote PLC uses If the remote PLC uses a COM port interface used should be selected from RS 232 RS 485 2W and RS485 4W PLC default This setting defines which default station no is used by remote PLC faire er mmene COM This setting defines which COM port the remote PLC uses to connect After all settings are completed a new device named Remote PLC is added to the Device list Device List Location Device type Intermate Local Local HMI Local MTS121T 800x600 Disable Local cal MITSUBISHI FKOwFE2 COM1 9600 E 7 1 Remote IP 192 168 1 SIEMENS 7200 COMI 9600 E 8 1 SlEMENs orrai 69 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI Ethernet Ethernet oc SLM OOOISLIN COOOL IY The so called remote HMI means through network this HMI is controlled by a local HMI ora PC running on line simulation To control a remote HMI users need to add this type of device Click
186. PLE Location Local v Settings PLC type Free Protocol v VV 1 00 FREE _PROTOCOL so PLC LF RS 232 i COM COM1 19200 E 8 1 Settings The device is named MODBUS RTU Device The port attribute depends on the setting of this device the current setting is 19200 E 8 1 Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil SET ON to a MODBUS device macro_command main char command 32 short address checksum 467 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 Ox5 function code Write Single Coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force bit on command 5 0 CRC command 0O checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 Il send out a Write Single Coil command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 end macro_command INPORT INPORT read_data start device_name read_count return_ value Description Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet These data is stored to read_data start read_data start read count 1 device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device read_ count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a variable If the function is used successfully to get su
187. R W R W R W connection LB 9205 PLC 1 status SN5 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9206 PLC 1 status SN6 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9207 PLC 1 status SN7 COM1 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9500 PLC 2 status SNO COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9501 PLC 2 status SN1 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9502 PLC 2 status SN2 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9503 PLC 2 status SN3 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9504 PLC 2 status SN4 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9505 PLC 2 status SN5 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 9506 PLC 2 status SN6 COM2 set on to retry R W R W R W connection 604 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LB 9507 PLC 2 status SN7 COM2 set on to retry connection LB 9800 PLC 3 status SNO COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9801 PLC 3 status SN1 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9802 PLC 3 status SN2 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9803 PLC 3 status SN3 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9804 PLC 3 status SN4 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9805 PLC 3 status SN5 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9806 PLC 3 status SN6 COMS3 set on to retry connection LB 9807 PLC 3 status SN7 COMS3 set on to retry connection 605 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2
188. RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W Ethernet and USB lf the interface is RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W click Settings and then Com Port Settings dialog appears Users need to correctly set the COM port communication parameters LOM Port sethnrs Timeoni ee Tom around delay imsy Send ACE delay ime Faroneter Parameter 2 Famoneter 3 Timeout If the communication between PLC and HMI is disconnected over the set time limit in Timeout parameter a pop out window No 5 will be shown in HMI as an alert saying PLC No Response Turn around delay While sending the next command to PLC HMI will delay it obeying the set time interval in Turn around delay parameter This may influence the efficiency of the communication between HMI and PLC If no specific request to be made 0 is to be set If the PLC used is in SIEMENS S7 200 Series this parameter needs to be set to 5 and Parameter 1 30 If the interface is Ethernet click Settings and then IP Address 64 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Settings dialogue appears Users need to correctly set IP address and Port no of the PLC IF Address Settings IP address 192 168 1 4 Port no io w Turn around delay imsi O Send ACK delay ms bo Parameter 1 O oY Parameter 3 0 Timeout sec Parameter 2 If the interface is USB no further settings need t
189. SHI FxOn Fx2 Word T 100 Reads Write 3 Test tag MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 Word Tiv 200 Read vyrite 416 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 16 2 Using Address Tag Library After creating the Address Tag Library select the related PLC in General tab while adding a new object and click Setting Check User defined tag the tags can now be used as shown below Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shane Label Description Mode Value Offs t E Read address PLO name MITSUBISHI Fini Fsz re pei Address temperature ario E Address PLC manne IT SUBISHI FOF 00000 Device type temperature O Z OZ O Y OMMI Address 1V 100 User defined tag Address Format DDD range 0 255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned There are some items in Device type for selecting Device type Temperature Temperature Test Tag When the settings are completed the window tree will show the name of the Address Tag used for the object as below T WL D lempenatare MITSUBISHI KOTY 100 ET WINDOW 012 13 417 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data Recipe Data are stored in flash memory When system start up both RW and RW_A memory will be restored from the recipe data in flash memory The way of reading and writing Recipe Data is the same as operating the normal
190. Save Format Save the settings of the current data format template so that users can load it every time when needed without recreating it repeatedly The template data will be stored as data fmt file in the EasyBuilder8000 installation directory Delete Format Delete an existed data format template Select your Select an existing data format template for examining the Recipe or data format EMI data After clicking Add Data Type dialogue appears as follow Data Type Description PELER 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD C 16 bit HEX 32 bit HEX 16 bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed C 32 bit Unsigned C 32 bit Signed l Float String WORD s cnet First users can assign a name as Description for the column and then select the correct data type If String is selected users must specify the length of the string 631 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual How to Add a Recipe EMI File 1 Under Recipe Editor file gt new the following dialogue appears set Data Format Address range unit ward Select your data format From o Ta 100 Save Format Delete Format Data format Description Add Delete Clear All Modify C 16 bit HEX C 32 bit HEX f 16bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed C 32 bit Unsigned C 32 bit Signed C Float C Sting WORD Goce 632 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 After all the settings finished a new document appears as follow i RecipefExten
191. StateMent cccccccccceeecseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeaneeas 438 16 4 Logical Statene S vacscontracegerdeanceanteca sasteenseasiscastantseeagoniseasgantececgenddaeccaoteanee 439 1944 Selective StatemenlS ee ne ee risers arora rN EEEN eee ne nett ees ener anes eee 440 18 4 5 ROME ral G15 Ale ING lS canscrsccascseusconrtearsenecuarsoerseasscentusssosrtenseoartesraecsapenansciece 442 18 4 5 1 for next Statements 0 ccc cec eee ecceseeeeeceeseeeaseeeeueueeeeueeueaueeueeueeeauaes 442 18 4 5 2 while wend Statements sg sss ena tess ors degen deca aeretesanacedumanenedenasesedenssesadenses 444 18 4 5 3 Other Control COMMAMNAS cccc ccc ceccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueaeeeeeeeeneaeeeeees 444 WO UPC HON IOC oaeee EE E E E EE EEEE 446 19 0 BUOM FONCION DIOC K areren a E E ER 449 189 6 IWathie Rial Gall UNG ON S cssssscstecasessicasacratccsacestsansesasessseessconteuseonanscntecarecsicasee 449 18 6 2 Data Transformation ccsccictsercrstcrs erste seg ect tereaiogtewetiegeeteasatguseacsnaeeeeanaaceeese 455 1903 Data MINOU AO eaccenrccsccepriasstaurcansdanetaciseareacesaartenisesstesriesreesrieureanepnenion 460 19864 Bit HansiormatO aeeene eee nee ne a er EEEE ae a ee 463 18 6 5 CoMmMunication ta tgsenteesettacecaeseareetenganectensarsedensoredensaieadensatia dusensecaetenmederonsioss 465 18 6 6 String Operation FUNCTIONS cccccccseeceeeceeeceeeceecaeecaeeceeeseeeceeseuesaeeseeess 481 N60 MEC NANG OUS oieee
192. Step 1 input string GO Test 1 Step 2 press GO button ne Test 1 Step 3 output string co 2 Initialization of a string Create a new macro and edit the content Works pace 1 2 macro command main i 3 4 char stri 20 abede 5 char SCE c0 Ca adea 6 atringset stri lO Local HHI LU oO 20 atringset strea 0 Local HMI LW 50 20 5 10 end macro command 553 LW WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The data enclosed in double quotation mark is viewed as a string str1 is initialized as a string while str2 is initialized as a char array The following snapshot of simulation shows the difference between str1 and str2 using two ASCII input objects strl abcde str2 Macro compiler will add a terminating null character 0 at the end of a string The function StringSet will send each character of str1 to registers until a null character is reached The extra characters following the null character will be ignored even if the data count is set to a larger value than the length of string On the contrary macro compiler will not add a terminating null character 0 at the end of a char array The actual number of characters of str2 being sent to registers depends on the value of data count that is passed to the StringSet function 3 A simple login page Create a new macro and edit the content WorkSpace 1 macro command main i
193. TEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Name StringReverseFind position StringReverseFind source start target start position StringReverseFind source target start position StringReverseFind source start target position StringReverseFind source target Description Return the position of the last occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there exists multiple substrings that matches the target string function will return the position of the last matched substring If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 cd bool pos1 pos1 StringReverseFind src1 0 target1 0 Il pos1 7 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 pos2 StringReverseFind abcdeabcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcdeabcde bool pos3 pos3 StringReverseFind src3 6 ab pos3 1 end macro command StringFindOneOf position StringFindOneOf source start target start position StringFindOneOf source target start 498 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description
194. The Format of a Convert Batch File cc ccccceeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees 666 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria cc ceccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeees 667 Chapter 27 EasSySiIMUlAlO ssisisisissrscisssrereiessrsivireeine dieses isisisi apiri di e asidini ieda Vienne Tenai 668 PA i i tad 82 2 E e N E E N E E 668 2 2 Modify the Content Of XxOD_ POS dEF ccccccecceecceeeeeeseeceeeeeeceeeeeeueceeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 669 Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode ccccseeeeeeeeeees 671 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI cee cccccececeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseees 672 7 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI ccccecccccceeececeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseues 673 28 3 How to Connect MT500 Project of Slave HMI cece ceccceeceeeceeeseeeeeeaeeeaees 676 Chapter 29 asSs ArOUGN F UNCTIOMicsascsasesesossarseecsasasaucnntannseseneeneueceneeemeseraneneseneeonsesiees 680 ZN TE TONIC CIV OOS eera a EE E T E 681 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port ccc cecccecceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees 682 291 2 HOW tO WSC Ethernet MOCO esis sere cscsseronasaderonovedanccepedapaseredaronsnedensamedesaacedonen 685 PAS ea bake 461s a E E E 687 29 2 1 Setmngs OF COM POM MOG sjccesanescseecsercsecczasonasapecrsecaseceseaeeaceseuesedsseeesasesesest 687 OZ 2 TAIN VOW NWO
195. Time based ccccccceccceecceeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeseesaeeceeeeeeeseesaeesanes 343 e PEC CONTO eee ee E E E ee ee ee 346 ie roie e ae aU A A E E A ETE 393 F OPON LS era aA EA AENA RENEE NEER E EEA NE AA 374 aoee OTE E E TA E A T E E 381 oT yeo iee E E E 385 NZ SLC WIS SSAC T A E 389 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeese eee eeeeeeseeeeeeseeees 391 14 1 Creating Shape MIDI ANY ssccsseccenassegancasseenceeonagonagnssgocnsansoansosetoantenniosnienntesnaennsesneest 391 14 2 Creating Picture LIDrary cccceccccccseccececeeeseeceeeceeeceeecaeessesseeceeseeeeeeesaesaeesaees 398 Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language USag cccccccceecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 405 MOT MMO GUC ON sorser e ere ee e e raaraa E casedeecsusedenen 405 19 2 Setngs Ol Font OF Label LIDA secccstcontecatcestcanicasisanivesiesndeweiaendeceiscbdcenisenizesdecooe 407 15 3 How to Create a Label Library ccccccccccsecceseceeeceeeceeeceeseeeceeeseeeeeeeseesaeesanes 408 VO USING p Els E LIOR e g e E E 410 15 5 Settings of Multi Language 0 n0nn0nnannannenoanonnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnrnrrnrrnrnnrnnrnrrnrrnernrnnenne gt 411 Chapter 16 Address Tag Library c cccccccccscceeceeeceeec ceca eeeeeseeeceeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseees 414 16 1 Creating Address Tag LIDIary cccccccceccceccseeeeeeteece cece eeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseesseeeaees 414 1622 USING AGGIeSS FAG ION ANY eoe
196. Under the Multi Language configuration users can select font type for each language Comment Input the comment of each language 407 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 3 How to Create a Label Library The following illustrations show how to create a Label Library First of all open the Label Tab Library dialogue and click New Correctly input the settings as shown below and then click OK Label name Pump Alarm No of states Label name The name of label In this case it is set Pump Alarm No of states The number of states possessed by the Label When the process is complete a new Label Pump Alarm with 2 states will be added to the Label Library See the picture below Label Taz Library tremeo 8 Select Pump Alarm click Settings and the Label Tag Content dialog appears for users to set up the corresponding language content 408 Ly Label Tag Content EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WE NTEK Label Content Settings Labelname Pump Alarm Seem 2 AAwa Language Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 _ E E Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Language 5 Change No of States 409 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 4 Using Label Library When there are already some defined labels in Label Library users can find those Labels in Label tag by selecting Use label library in
197. W 10306 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP1 IP address moje ae aar LW 10307 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP2 IP address Pr pee om LW 10308 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP3 IP address om IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 fe fa LW 10309 16bit remote PLC 2 s port no LW 10310 16bit remote PLC 3 s IPO IP address pres IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10311 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP1 IP address resin j IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10312 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP2 IP address pres IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10313 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP3 IP address eres j IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10314 16bit remote PLC 3 s port no LW 10315 16bit remote PLC 4 s IPO IP address press j IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10316 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP1 IP address press IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 614 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 10317 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10318 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10319 16bit remote PLC 4 s port no 615 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 21 Communication Error Messages amp No of Pending Cmd iam foan peace nesta Tone Pn LW 9351 i seal command no in PLC 1 COM 1 W562 i vendna comard ro mPLG Z CONZA R R RO Lw 0953 1601 pending command no nPLC3 COM3 R R R 11 9354 Yen ponding commando in PLEA tememen R R R Lws385 16bit pending commana no n PLC 5 ememep R R R L
198. W R W R W LB 9149 forced to reconnect remote HMI when IP changed R W R W R W on line set ON LW 9800 16bit remote HMI 1 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9801 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9802 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9803 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9804 16bit remote HMI 1 s port no R W R W R W LW 9805 16bit remote HMI 2 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9806 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9807 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 610 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9808 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9809 16bit remote HMI 2 s port no R W R W R W LW 9810 16bit remote HMI 3 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9811 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP1 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9812 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP2 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9813 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9814 16bit remote HMI 3 s port no R W R W R W LW 9815 16bit remote HMI 4 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9816 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9817 16bi
199. We Control addres PLC name Local HMI w Setting Addres t 1 to update item data Addres 1 tem count Item address ASC UNICODE The length of each item WORD S PLC name Local HMI we a Option list tab Setting Description Attribute Mode Select the object style one of Listbox and Drop down list Item no Set the number of items for the object Each item represents a state displayed in the list and a value to be written to the Monitor address Background 375 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Predefine mode Dates of historical data mode select background color for the object Selection select background color for the selected highlighted item Source of item data There are Predefine Dates of historical data and Item address for selection Monitor address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word register device that controls the display of the object and the system writes the value of the item to the word register Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down ited This option is only available in listbox style Item data from dates of historical data History index mode Option List object can be used with Historical Event Display Trend Display and Data Display for displayin
200. Window 7 is the Password If user wants to control an object without authorization Restriction message this window may pop up as an alert or not depending on window how this object is set originally 94 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Window 8 is the Storage When HMI built in memory USB disk or SD card run out Space Insufficient of storage space this message window will pop up message window automatically Users can use system address tag to view the free memory space in HMI USB disk or SD card device LW 9072 HMI current free space K bytes LW 9074 SD current free space K bytes LW 9076 USB 1 current free space K bytes LW 9078 USB 2 current free space K bytes For checking which device is insufficient in space while this insufficiency occurs the following system address tags can be used LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON The text shown in window no 5 8 can be adjusted by users to fit what is needed For example text in window no 5 is PLC No Response users can change it to HMI and PLC disconnected This works for other windows as well which makes it easier to read Note 1 Ascreen can display 16 pop up windows simultaneously in maximum including System Message Window Dir
201. Word Register The size of Recipe Data in RW is 512K words and RW_A is 64K words User can update Recipe Data with SD Card USB flash drive USB cable or Ethernet and use this data to update data in PLC It is possible to upload Recipe Data to the designated directory of PC furthermore it can save the PLC s data in recipe memory The following explains all of the ways of operating recipe data 17 1 Updating Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB cable Click Download in Project Manager Select RW and RW_A and designate the directory of the source files After downloading is completed start up HMI again and the contents of RW and RW_A will be updated When Reset recipe is selected before start downloading EB8000 will set all the data of RW and RW_A to 0 first 418 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Download EJ Firmware PES CAEBS0 00 projectitestxab PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME i PLEASE INPUT RECIPE 1 FILE NAME 7 Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME _ Install series media player drivers _ Startup screen Connection Ethernet USE cable i series only q IF _ Reboot HMI after download v Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log 419 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 17 2 Updating Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Flash Drive Click Build Download Data for CF USB Disk in Project Manager This function is for building the downloa
202. You can register Control No of Data and Offset in continuous address for each channel The system will read the control words of all the channels in one read command and it shall speed up the response time Please refer to the following picture The control words of channel 1 is located from address 0 the control words of channel 2 is located from address 3 there are continuous address and the system will read all the control words in one read command Address Channel 1 No of Data n Channel 2 Offset m Channel 1 s data n Channel s data n How to use watch Cursor Line feature Cursor line vi Enable Color RT PLC name Local HMI Device type LW w Address 1 You may use the Watch function to check the value of any point in trend curve When operator touches the data block object it will display a Cursor line the system will write the index and value of that data in cursor line to the designated address The user 291 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual shall register NI objects with the designated address The operator shall be able to observe the numeric value in across with the cursor line In the following example the data block display contains two data blocks The data format of channel 1 is 16 bit BCD and that of channel 2 is 32 bit unsigned The cursor is positioned in data index 3 which is corresponding to the fourth data in data block The system
203. a PLO name Address Liy o Ww o 16 bit Signed X low limit reads value from reading address LWO n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW1 n 1 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW2 n 2 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW3 n 3 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW4 n 4 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW5 n 5 The following setting is for 32 bit float data format and dynamic limits 299 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address FLC name Local HMI Ww F separated address for X and Y data PLL n ame er Z etting een Address yy we 32 bit Float X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW102 n 2 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW104 n 4 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW106 n 6 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW108 n 8 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW110 n 10 NOTE There are four different type of selection to designate memory location for high low limits and XY data Please refer to the following settings 300 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data 0 Liata 0 Min hin Data 1 Data 1 Wax Max Data 2 Data 2 Data 0 Datat Data 3 Data 3 Data 1 Liata 1 Data 2 Data x Data 0 A Mlin Y Data 0 A Max x Data 1 Y Min Y Data 1 Y Max Data xData Y Data Y Oata
204. a Step4 After pressing OK the data will be displayed E Easylonyerter File Edit View Options Help hd a pe GS P C Daruments and Settings user 420081 1l2 dtl Success C Documents and Settings user 2008 1128 dtl Success Combine to C Documents and Settings user pressure xls Step5 Open the newly combined file to examine the data in Microsoft Excel 646 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 4 Command Line For EasyConverter users can run in a command mode EasyConverter c s t num setting source destination Setting Description Indicate the source file dtl or evt Type of file output If this is set a CSV file will be output otherwise an EXCEL file Whether involving a setting file or not If this is set it indicates that users utilize a setting file For example EasyConverter exe c s E Work 20080625 lgs E Work 20080625 dtl E Work 647 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 26 EasyPrinter EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and can only run on MS Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 It enables MT8000 Series to output screen hardcopies to a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration Screen Hardcopy Ethernet Print Out MT8000 MT Remote Printer Server Save to File Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter e EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output Print Out and Save to Fi
205. a sampling object index Data sampling object will use the sampling data which was sorted in according to dates The system use History control to select the historical records that are created by the same data sampling object The picture below shows the History control setting page History control PLO name Local HMI Setting The system sorts the historical records of sampling data by date the latest file is record O In normal condition it is sampling data today the second latest file is record 1 and so on If the value of designated register in History control is n the trend display object will display data record n Here is an example to explain usage of History control In the above picture the designated register is LW200 if the sampling data available in the files are pressure _20061120 dtl pressure _ 20061123 dtl pressure _2006112 dtI and pressure _20061203 dtI and it is 2006 12 3 today Based on the value of LW200 the sampling data files selected by the trend display object is shown as follows 264 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Value of LW200 The files of the sampling data from the historical record o pressure 20061203 Distance Pixel between data samples Distance between data samples 8 Pixel O Time Pixel Distance pixel s Select Pixel the Distance can be used to set the distance between two sampling points See the pictu
206. abel tag that exists in Label Library as shown below Use label Use label Hbrary Label tag NONAME Label Library Label Library Note About all the settings in Label Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 15 Label Library and use Multi Language for details Font Select font style from font list EB8000 supports Windows true font as shown below Bookshelt eanmnbol T Color Select the text color Size Select the text size The text sizes supported by EB8000 are listed below 136 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Align select how users would like to align the text in multiple lines Alien The text aligned Left 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Center 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Right 111 222222 333333333 137 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Blink To decide how will the text blink Choose None to disable this feature or set blinking interval as 1 second or 0 5 seconds None 1 condis 0 5 second s Italic Use Italic font Italic Label Underline Use Underline font Underline Label Movement setting Direction Set the direction of the marquee effect Ho movement a No movement Left Right Up Down Continuous Whether this selection is tick or not influences how the marquee effect is displayed If not checking Continuous the next text appears only when
207. ables consist of the following six special variables Timer Variable Variables Type Input bit IN Bit type The master switch of timer Measurement bit Bit type Turn ON when the timer begin D a Output bit Q Bit type Activate when the timer finish D a ad a Preset time PT Word type Set the timer value Elapsed time ET Word type Display current elapsed value of timer Reset bit R Bit type Reset the elapsed time ET to 0 Configuration Click the Timer icon D Timer object properties dialogue box appears as follows 381 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Timer Object Description Mode Accumulated OFF delay w Time bate 0 1 second s i Input bit IM PL name Local HMI ww Setting Measurement bit TT PLL name Local HMI Ww Setting Output bit f PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Preset time FT PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Elapsed time ET Enable PLC name Setting Reset bit Fi PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Mode Description On delay Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases The Q remains OFF Point 2 When the ET equals the PT the Q be turned ON and the TI be turned OFF 382 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Accumulated On delay Point 3 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 Point 4 When the IN turns ON
208. acro When local variables and global variables have the same declaration of name only the local variables are valid The example below is a simple Macro which includes a variable declaration and a function call macro_command main short pressure 10 local variable declaration setData pressure Allen Bradley DF1 N7 0 1 function calling end macro_command 431 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 3 Syntax 18 3 1 Constants and Variables 18 3 1 1Constants Constants are fixed values and can be written directly into statements The format is as below Must begin with Ox Ox3b Oxffff 0x237 ASCII String must be enclosed in single a data name quotes Example of some statements using constants macro_command main short A B A and B are variables A 1234 B 0x12 1234 and 0x12 are constants end macro command 18 3 1 2 Variables Variables are names that represent information The information can be changed as the variable is modified by statements 432 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Naming Rules for Variables 1 A variable name must start with an alphabet 2 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed 3 Reserved words cannot be used as Variable names There are 8 different Variable types 5 for signed data types and 3 for unsigned data types booi biRGdsrete OT 8 bits byte Declaring Variables Variables must be declared b
209. address PLC name Local HMI sw Setting Example 1 The motor is scheduled to be power ON at 8 00 and power off at 17 00 Monday to Friday Here we use LB100 to control the motor Follow the steps to set up the schedule object 354 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When the designated Start running Start time is reached When the designated Stop running stop time is reached Click New to add a new object General tab Power ON start end action Detail message please refer to below Scheduler settings guide Power ON startend action 1 Check Bit ON in Action mode Action mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 2 Set LB100 in Action address Acton address PL name Local HMI we Setting Address E gwe 355 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Time Set tab 3 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant Addres 4 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 5 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable termination action m a i g 6 Click OK a new schedule object is created and display on the schedule list 356 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Scheduler ie Scheduler 1 Bit ON Local HMIL
210. address _ IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9836 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP1 IP address lal IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9837 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP2 IP address kiad IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9838 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP3 IP address ae IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9839 16bit remote HMI 8 s port no 612 L WE NTEK 22 20 Communication Status with Remote PLC Address LW 10050 LW 10051 LW 10052 LW 10053 LW 10054 LW 10055 LW 10056 LW 10057 LW 10058 LW 10059 LW 10060 LW 10061 LW 10062 LW 10063 LW 10064 LW 10065 LW 10066 Description 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3
211. age tab Please see the illustration below 112 eee WE NTEK EasvyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log General Message Text ae Label Son Color i Write value for Event larn Display object Wate value TP sownd Enable ponad Library Beep Enable continous beep vanti acknowledged or recovered Time delay of continuous beep 10 condis Flay Print On tigger Retum to normal Font Sze lo dl Addresses of WATLH1 WATCH o Wa TCHS PLC name Local HME 0 Local HME 0 Setting PLO name Local HMI iw Setting PLC name Local HME a HMI Ww Setting PLC name Local HME 0 M Local HME 0 M Setting Setting Description Content The text content of event log shown in Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties for more information The data of LW address of the triggered event can be included in the content Format d 113 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Write value for Event Display object initial sign LW s address d end sign For example if the content is set as High Temperature 20d when an event is triggered the value of LW20 will be displayed If the value of LW20 is 13 when an event is triggered the content displayed in Event Display object will be High Temperature 13 Except for LW when an event is triggered data in c
212. ain 289 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual How to use offset mode If offset to start address is selected the Data storage start address will be calculated from control word address Offset value storage address Offset value storage address is control word address 2 In the following example the content of Offset value storage address is m therefore the data block is started from the address control word address m No offset settings Has offset settings Designated Designated address address Control 1 No of Data n 1 No of Data n 7 Offset m Data n to be displayed on the graph m Data n to be displayed on the graph n 1 Data n m n 1 Data n NOTE Ifthe control register is 32 bits device only bit 0 15 will be used as control purpose bit 16 31 will be ignored as illustration below 32 bit device 31 16 15 0 o f o If you do not use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control and No of Data At the time Control is changed to non zero the system will then read the data block If you use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control No of Data and Offset It is recommended to use offset to start address for data block display 290 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual with multiple channels and the same device type
213. al Hew Data Transfer Trgrer based Object General Security Shape Label POUNCE addres PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Destnation address PLO name Local HMI v Setting A thibute Mode Trigger mode ON gt OFF yt Trigger address PLL name Local HMI Ww Setting i Cancel Setting Description Source Set source address of data transfer address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Source address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Destination Set the destination address of data transfer address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 322 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute No of words The number of words to be transferred from source to destination Set the trigger mode of data transfer Mode a Touch trigger Press the object to activate data transfer operation b External trigger Register a bit device to trigger the data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate data transfer operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate data transfer operation
214. ame by LD W9032 L W9039 Prefi IP_ Ex TP 192 1681 25 Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Hardcopy tab on the left side in the dialogue box as follows MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Print out to hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 E pawe to files in DM T8000 le Backup 4 In Output select Print out to and choose a printer as the output device for screen hardcopies Note Users can only choose from the printers available in their system so it is possible that hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 can t be found in the list as the example 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to output any 650 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual incoming print request i e screen hardcopy 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue appears oystem Parameter Settings Ed Device Model Creneral easton seting mec Unity Font Extended Mem
215. ample if value in LWO is 1 and LW1 3 the displayed data will start from No 1 and include 3 history data No 1 No 2 No 3 FEL 20100604 No 4 IEE EVT EAEL 20100605 No 3 5KE EVT EJEL 20100608 No 2 17KB EVIR EIEL 20100609 No 1 AEE EVT 4S EEL 20100610 No 0 1I2EB EVT 4 The maximum size of data that can be displayed by system is 4MB the exceeding part will be ignored The following shows how data will be stored while the data size is too big Example a 5 history data each with a size of 0 5MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 5 x 0 5MB b 5 history data each with a size of 1MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 4 x 1MB c 5 history data each with a size of 1 5MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 2 x 1 5MB 1 x 1MB partial Definition 1 To select confirmed or recovered events to be displayed or hidden 2 In Real time mode select events to be deleted 316 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Illustration Control addres PLC name Local HMI w Address yy ugh 16 bit Unsigned Enable event management If the address of History control is set LW100 When the value in LW100 0 is 0 gt All events will be displayed When the value in LW100 0 is 1 gt The confirmed events will be hidden When the value in LW100 0 is 2 gt The recovered events will be hidden When the value in LW100 0 is 3 gt The confirm
216. an also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type Select the device type where the target data block located Control word address Control word is used to control and clear trend curve display 0 No action default 1 Plot trend curve 2 Clear trend curve 3 Redraw trend curve After executing the operation above the system will reset the control word to zero No of data address No of data address is default as Control word address 1 No of data is to store the number of word device in each data block i e the number of data to plot in trend curve The maximum value is 1024 Data storage start address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Data storage start address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 283 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Offset value storage address If offset to start address is enabled the Offset value storage address is default as Control word address 2 Format If you select 16 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 1 start address 2 and so on If you select 32 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 2 start address 4 and so on Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit of trend curve the trend curve is lim
217. an group up the self made keyboard and add to library for future use If not using the default keyboard self defined keyboard can also be used Add newly made keyboard to System parameter settings General Keyboard 170 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 13 Objects This chapter is to illustrate the ways of using and setting all kinds of objects For those settings general for all the objects such as index register label shape and so on please refer to Chapter 9 Object s General Properties 13 1 Bit Lamp Overview Bit Lamp object displays the ON and OFF state of a bit address If the bit state is OFF the State 0 shape will be displayed If the bit state is ON the State 1 shape will be displayed OFF State ON State state 0 State 1 Configuration Click the Bit Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Bit Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in the content of and press OK a new bit lamp object will be created See the pictures below 171 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Hit Lamp Object General security Shape Label Read address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Address Blinking time y Mode Altemating image on state 0 sig Setting Description Description A reference name that s assigned by user for the object The system does not make use of this reference
218. an set value on A B and C Why do we need the Scaling function For example here is a data of voltage and data format is 16 bit unsigned range 0 4096 lf users want to map those data to volt range form 5 to 5 the calculation new value value 0 x0 0024 5 as follow 638 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point l 16 bit Unaienec i mF Uns iy i A Scaling amp Offset new value Als B value 0 0024 5 0000 Settings of data above can be saved as a sample and loaded next time 639 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual After the scaling Original file File after utilizing scaling function E K 41120081203 dtl EasyConverter E KA1 20081203 dil EasyConverter File Edit View Options Help File Edt View Ophons Help Sug SHAM h Creation time Creation time Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Data Data Time 16 bit Unsigned Time 16 bit Unsigned O8 47 08 47 O8 47 08 47 O8 47 08 47 O8 4 O84 O84 O84 O84 O84 O8 47 O84 O8 47 O84 0 O8 47 O84 0 O8 47 O84 1 O8 47 O84 7 2 O8 47 O84 7 ahs O8 47 O84 7 3 O8 47 O84 4 O8 47 O84 7 4 O8 4 7 O4 4 7 4 O8 4 7 O4 4 7 a O8 4 7 08 47 2 O8 4 7 O4 4 7 2 O8 4 7 O4 4 7 1 QO O8 47 Fhe Mh E E O8 4 640 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 2
219. and Printer settings oy stem Parameter Settings fx Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security HMI model 4 TS121T 800 x600 s HMI station no Port no S000 fused as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock source External device PLE name Lacal HMI 4 16 bit Unsigned Printer Dype Baud rate Data bits Parity a Stop bits Fizek of width irls mcreen hard copy scale 100 t 100 pixels for 1610 type or 220 prele for 2407 4004 type torace space management History data space Max HOB file size 40M BOM Hint If change storage space please rest HMI s data logs and event logs Setting Description Select current HMI model as shown below MTO SEDM TOSET 20 x 234 Ww MTb0S6T RMITSOS6T 320 x B34 MTSO7OTAMTSO70T 80 x 2344 MT6l04 TAMTSO80T MTSLO4T 640 x 480 MT8121T 00 x 600 MTS104 640 x 480 MTSlO42HMTS121 800 x 600 MTS150 024 x 768 MTS07Ov80701 480 x234 MTS07OiH MT6100n7 T1001 00 x 480 When changing HMI model and press OK users will be inquired if 72 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual they would like to Resize pop up windows or objects Resize pop up windows objects ks General windows v Resize pop up windows Resize objects keyboard window s alias keyboard window s HMI station Set the HMI station no used by current HMI If no specific request is to be made just
220. and main int source result short bit_pos INVBIT 4 result 1 result 6 source 6 bit_pos 1 INVBIT source result bit_pos result 4 464 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oo end macro_command 18 6 5 Communication Name DELAY SSCS Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond Time can be a constant or a variable macro_command main int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro command ADDSUWM source start result data_count Description Adds up the elements of an array source from source start to source start data_count 1 to generate a checksum Puts in the checksum into result Result must be a variable Data_ count is the amount of the accumulated elements and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 short checksum data 0 0x1 data 1 0x2 data 2 0x3 data 3 0x4 data 4 0x5 465 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ADDSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is Oxf end macro_command XORSUM XORSUM sourcef start result data_ count Description Uses an exclusion method to calculate the checksum from source start to source start data_count 1 Puts the checksum into result Result must be a variable Data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a con
221. as elements to configure a keypad the ASCII UNICODE keypad is used where numbers or texts are needed to be input to the mode numeric input object or ASCII input object Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for detailed information ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clea Ex ASCIT UNICODE Enter Same as the keyboard s enter function Backspace Same as the keyboard s backspace function Clear To clear the temperate input alphanumeric strings stored in the buffer Esc Same as the Close window function it is used to close the keyboard window ASCII UNICODE To set the characters that are input in the numeric input object and the ASCII input object Digital characters such as 0 1 2 or ASCII characters like a b 193 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E c etc are available selection Execute Macro commands are executed with this selection Macro commands have to Macro be built before users choose this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Macro macro 1 AD 1 4 Window title A function Key which is defined as Window Title Bar can move the popup bar window position on the screen Firstly users can select the popup window that has the title bar and then click another position to move the window Note this function is only available on indirect direct window when no title bar is select
222. as to set to 0 5 sec and another has to set to 0 8 sec 2 Data bit has to be 8 bits 3 The rest of the settings should be identical between two HMI Adding two objects on window10 a toggle switch setting is as illustration below 706 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual e Hew fogele Switch Object x General Security Shape Label Description Read address PLO name Memory Map wt Setting Adress eo Invert signal Write address PLL name i Memory Map we Setting Write when button is released ttibute witch style Toggle w Macro Execute macra A multistate switch object setting is as following 707 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Mult State Switch Object Ea General Security Shape Label Dewi Read address PLO name Memory Map w Setting Write address Write when button is released ttibute Sith se No of sts Cyclical User defined mapping Save Compile Download Change parameter in System Parameter Setting PLC and download to another HMI The HMI display is as following Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual c UM iri PWR Easy irn Users may try to touch the screen the other HMI will act the same as current HMI The communicating way is the same as above mentioned The point is to keep the same data in the same register 709 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 Us
223. ase 6 senda commana nom PLce lemoman R f R R LW 9357 n a command no in PLC 7 ethernet W500 6 vendra commande meL USB R R RO won ororo R S R OR weno toi evorcovetorrics OR OR OR woas oeoo eroro OR OR woas obiy erorcodetorrics RR OR jew st0s 6b evorcovetorrics r OR OR weas aerorose TORT OR wear ason erorcovetorrics OR OR OR tw o490 1601 erorcodeforussric rR rR OR 616 re WE NTEK 22 22 Miscellaneous Functions LB 9000 initialized as ON LB 9009 LB 9010 data download indicator LB 901 1 data upload indicator LB 9012 data download upload indicator LB 9016 status is on when a client connects to this HMI LB 9017 disable write back in PLC control s change Ean gt LB 9039 status of file backup activity backup in process if LB 9045 memory map communication fails when ON EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a R W R W R W LB 9049 enable set ON disable set OFF watch dog i series support only 1 LB 9059 disable MACRO TRACE function when ON 2 R LB 9064 enable USB barcode device disable keyboard when ON 3 LW 9006 16bit connected client no LW 9024 16bit memory link system register LW 9032 8 words folder name of backup history files to SD USB memory R W R W R W R W Rw LW 9303 16bit driver ID of local PLC 4 LW 9530 8 words VNC server password R W Zol Z zy g a 2
224. asks permanently Select All To select all tasks from Job List e The backup task is not editable e Edit is available only when a task is selected e Delete is available when at least one task is selected 658 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual In Download Progress Window users can select the mode to show download progress by clicking the header of the progress column Please see the following illustration Percentage Display Data Length Display EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10 000 messages in Message Window If a new message comes in the oldest message will be deleted Venu Options To show or hide toolbars Status Bar To show or hide the status bar Settings Configuration for EasyPrinter Please refer to the following illustrations General 659 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General HEIVEI Hardcopy Port number of the server socket a005 User name Max eneth 14 characters admin Password Max length 14 characters 111111 Backup Naming Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP address O Use HMI name assign HMI name by L W9032 L W9039 Prefix IF Ex IF_192 168 1 25 Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message e Server gt Port number of the server socket Set the Ethernet socket number for HMI to connect to The range goes from 1 to 65535 and 8005 is the default value Server
225. at the object s read address is LW100 and initial position is 100 50 Supposed you want the object moved to the position 160 180 and be displayed in the shape of State 2 the value of LW100 must be set to 2 LW101 160 100 60 LW102 180 50 130 100 50 L W100 LWI101 L W102 ee ee e State x Offset V Offset L W100 L W 101 L W102 State x Offset V Offset 160 180 _nex position state 2 Attribute To select the object s movement mode and range a X axis only The object is only allowed to move along the X axis The moving range is defined by Min X and Max X 237 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 b Y axis only The object is only allowed to move along the Y axis The moving range is defined by Min Y and Max Y Athibute Mote Min Yo 0 0 Max Y 600 0 Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 c X amp Y axis The object is allowed to move along the X axis and Y axis The moving range in XY direction is defined by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y respectively Attribute Mode X amp Y as o l No of states 8 O ow Data format Address to Add
226. ata sampling click Load Setting to load test lgs 643 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual sampling Data Information select number of digits after decimal paint 1 2 3 16 bit Unsigned o No M 2 16 bit Unsigned o No x 3 16 bit Unsigned D Nox Scaling amp Offset HAA Step3 Press Export to Microsoft Excel button to examine the data Ele Edt Cphons Help View Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 10 51 07 0 10 51 06 1 10 51 23 060 10 51 24 0 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 1 10 51 27 2 10 51 28 3 644 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting File Step1 Click Multi File File Edit View Options Help Open CHO S0 bfult File 1 AR dil 2 E Watelog 0081206 dtl 3 EA 105 dtl 4 20118 dtl Frat Step2 Select Add File Multi File Convert file list Enable setting file Combine to a file L 645 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step3 Select the files that you would like to combine and check both Enable Setting file and Combine to a file boxes With Combine to a file edit please indicate a file name for the new outcome Multi File Convert file list C Documents and Settings user 20061 124 tl Enable Setting file iC ME BSUUU datalog pressure gs Combine to a file
227. ate these functions via system tag To select a system tag users can tick system tag of the address while adding new object To check all the system tags users can visit Library in EB8000 select Tag then System Startup language after redownloading the project Set the language to use when start up HMI after redownloading the project Execute init Macro when power on Designate the macro to be executed when HMI power on Auto logout If HMI is left unused for longer than the time set here HMI will logout automatically Use a disconnection icon on relative objects when PLC communication fails When using this function and fail to communicate with PLC this icon will be shown in the lower right corner of the object as shown The disconnection icon Td When using this function and fail to communicate with PLC this icon will be shown in the lower right corner of the object as shown VNC Server Set the login password for VNC server LW protection RW protection 80 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual lf users check Disable LW RW remote write and set the protect range in LW RW range values of this protected range can t be adjusted via remote HMI Easy Access server Through this technology users can easily access to any MT8000i X connected to the internet and operate them on PC just like holding touch screen in hand Unlike most server used in HMI Easy Access don t need to tra
228. atest trigger alarm message in the top b Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MMI YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD d Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM 4 HH Set font and color of alarm message in the Font tab See the picture below 310 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Alarm Bar Object Alarm Shape Font A thibute Font Comuc Sans Me a Color mmm Sze Italic 311 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 22 Event Display Overview Event display object displays active and finished events The events are registered in Event log object The active events are the events which are in trigger condition or have been triggered and unacknowledged The event display object displays those active events in the order of trigger time See the picture below Event display object can also display the time of the events been triggered acknowledged and recovered 01 20 09 15 35 22 Event 1 LB10 ON 01 20 09 13 35 22 vent EBOQ ON 01 20 09 15 35 20 15 35 23 Miulti text 01 20 09 15 35 19 01 20 09 15 35 18 Event 1 LB10 ON ALANO 15 25 1415 Cvant Bi gt Con
229. ation of the HMI system version 47 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual system information Default HMI Network Version MTSxxx Geode firmware build 20100716 4 2 2 4 System Setting Set or modify system parameters Password has to be confirmed for security system settings bee Enter your password Password I a Network A project can be downloaded to HMI via Ethernet The IP address of target HMI must be correctly set If Auto Get IP Address is selected IP address will be automatically assigned from local DHCP network If IP address get from below is selected IP address and other network information have to be inputted by the user 48 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual system settings Network Time Date Security Misc ory me br setting Obtain an IP Address Automatically IP address get from below I A d d fess Subnet Masi 5 ate y i y Cancel b Time Date This page is for setting HMI local time and date system settings Network Time Date Security Misc ory me br setting Year 2010 2 won 7 3 Day 21 l week 3 Hour jie Min 34 Sec 21 Cancel 49 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual c Security The default of the password is 111111 EB8000 provides strict security for the HMI System settings Is Network Time Date Security Misc ory me br setting Local Password Password for entering the system
230. ations The basic component of a HMI screen is a Window This shows its importance With a window all kinds of information like objects pictures and words can be shown in HMI screen Generally there s more than one window in a project many windows will be constructed in one project Users are able to configure 1997 windows or screens numbered from 3 1999 in EB8000 For how many windows can be used in one project it depends on the storage size for windows of HMI For example the storage size of MT 8000 i series for windows is 16MB then the size of windows or screens constructed cannot exceed 16MB Under this limit users can make most use of it to create as many windows as possible 6 1 Window Types There are 4 types of windows in EB8000 each with different functions and usages a Base Window b Common Window c Fast Selection Window d System Message Window 6 1 1 Base Window Base window is the most frequently used type of window Apart from being used as main screen it is also used as a Foundation base used as the background for other windows b Keyboard window c Pop up window for function key object d Pop up window for direct window and indirect window object e Screen saver 91 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Base window should be in the same size as the HMI screen That is to say the resolution of base window and that of HMI should be identical The start up screen is a base window and is sho
231. ay NOTE 1 You must enter settings for the Start Time and End Time 2 You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time Disable A schedule that is 1 day Start and End times are within 24 hours can be entered Multiple Start and End days can be selected You can perform actions at the same time on multiple days To specify an End Time you must select Enable termination action Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 Monday Tuesday NOTE You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time The time scheduler is for one day only so if the End Time is earlier than the Start Time the operation of End Time will be performed on the next day 366 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example Tuesday Start day Monday Start 22 00 00 End 01 00 00 22 00 00 01 00 00 set the start time and day When Setting on individual day is disabled user can designate more than one day set the end time and day When Enable termination action is selected the end time can be specified The day settings can only be set when Setting on individual day is enabled 367 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Time Set tab when Address is selected If address mode is selected the system retrieves the start end time and day from word devices Therefore users can set and change sched
232. ays a beep sound with frequency of 800 hertz and duration of 30 milliseconds macro_command main Beep end macro command 480 LWL Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 6 String Operation Functions Syntax StringGet read_data start device_name device_type address_ offset data_count Description Receives data from the PLC The String data is stored into read_data start read_data start data_count 1 read_data must be a one dimensional char array Data_count is the number of received characters it can be either a constant or a variable Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series System Parameter Settings Font Extended Menors Printers Backup Server Device General eystem Sethe DECUIT Device list Mame Location Device tae Local HMI Local HMI Local MToUS61 220 x Disable N A N A Local ser MODBUSETU Local Free Protocol COMI RS 0 Remote F 1FATEE FE beres Remote IP210 66 117 2 FATEE FB Series COMI Rss Device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _BIN can be ignored lf device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD Ad
233. b Save to File 661 LULE Eo WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to convert the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and save it in the specified directory Users can find the bitmap files at Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt yymmdd_hhmm bmp For example when a hardcopy request is given at 17 35 00 12 Jan 2009 the bitmap file will be named 090112 1735 bmp And if there is another bitmap file generated in the same minute it will be named 090112 1735 01 bmp and so on Backup MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Chutput Hardcopy Backup files in DAM T3000 When target file has existed O Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Append BAF to the file name Convert Batch File DAM TS000 convertecesy def Output EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified path For Event Log historical data files Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt eventlog gt EL _yyyymmdd evt For Data Sampling historical data file Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt 662 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual datalog gt Folder name of the Data Sampling object gt yyyymmdd dtl For Recipe Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt recipe gt recipe rcp or recipe _a rcp Convert Batch File Select Enable and assign a Convert Batch File for automatically converting uploaded history files to CSV or
234. beep When using continuous beep for Event Log a delay period can be set between triggering the alarm and the start of beeping An illustration of how the beep is related to the event revert User defined lt gt lt gt When exporting Event Log as EXCEL file next to the content of Watch Address the related settings of the continuous beep can be found null 16 bit Unsi i True User can use the Syntax to embed PLC data in the content of an event log About the syntax usage please refer to below dialog 115 pu WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual syntax of Watch Fonction Use the below smtax to embed PLC data in the content of an event log Usage ga ATCH id Display stoned decimal integer OW ATCHS IE Display floating point Sa A TAF is Display string Sa A TAF Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using ABCDEF oC WA TAF br Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using abcdef where watch no range 1 4 the number of digits after the decimal point If is 0 can be ignored Examples 1 Pressure MAT Hi id 1 2 lemperatiel is SOVATCHD 2 Temperaire is MATCHEDE 3 Alann TP WATCHIN SOY ATCH2X SOY ATCHSX CW ATCHAE 4 Counter is AWA TAS hd 5 Message W WATCH 1j Index CWA TCH Sd 116 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 8 Data Sampling Data Sampling defines how the data is sampled including sampling time and sampling
235. below Numeric Display Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Display Data format ERE Mask Right of decimal Ft Number of digits Left of decimal Ft LW 9220 is for entering user password with a length of 2 words in a data format of 32 bit Unsigned as below Humerc Input Objects Properties Display Data format 32 bit Unsigned Mask Number of diguts Leftof decimal Ft 4 RightofdecimalPt 0 ND_O is numeric display object with address LW 9222 to indicate user s state The data is in the format of 16 bit Binary Display Data format 16 bit Binary Mask SB_0 SB_2 are Set Bit objects which are set with different classes but all selected Make invisible while protected i e SB_0 is class A SB_1 is class B and SB_2 is class C The settings of SB_0 object 151 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual User restriction Object class Class A i Pa Disable protection permanently after initial activation Display waming message if access denied Make mvisible while protected The Set Bit object SB_3 LB 9050 is for user logout and is set as below Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label Denton Write address Address Step 3 After completing the design and settings of the
236. biute net a tyle Low limit C High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s k Periodical step down Stepping down function A Set word object will subtract the value set in Dec value from the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value of the Low limit and the value of the word device will return to the value of the High limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 10 9 8 1 0 10 9 8 Attribute Set Style Periodic step down high to low Low limit 0 High limit 10 Dec value A Time interval 0 5 second s Set when window opens When the window containing the object is opened the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Athibute set Style Set when window opens eet value E ee m Set when window closes When the window containing the object is closed the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device 189 ee WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute set Style Set when window clases set value 5 n Set when backlight on When the backlight is turned from off to on the value of Set value
237. bject layout Nate w Natre If Control mode is selected when operating HMI Animation and Moving Shape objects will be displayed above other kinds of objects neglecting the sequence that the objects are created If Nature mode is selected the display will follow the sequence that the objects are created first created be displayed first e RW_A enabled Enable or disable recipe data RW_A Enable this the objects can then control the content of RW_A The size of RW_A is 64K Extra no of events The default number of the event in the system is 1000 If users would like to add more records the setting value can be modified up to 10000 Users can select to use different types of keyboards for Numeric Input and Word Input Up to 32 keyboards can be added If users want to design their own keyboard a window should be designated for creating it Press add after creating and add the window to the list For more information please see Chapter 12 Key Pad Design and Usage where also shows how to fix this Keyboard in screen instead of adding it to the list User s project can be restrained and executed on specific HMI only for i series HMI Please refer to Chapter 30 Project protection for more information 78 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 4 System Setting Parameters in System Setting tab are for setting up some miscellaneous functions of EasyBuilder system Parameter Settings x
238. brary Beep Trigger mods OFF on Activate the Trigger address the system will play the sound Select a sound from sound library for the PLC Control You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON f Execute macro program Trigger address PLC name Setting Trigger mode OFF On Activate the Trigger address the system will execute the Macro You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 350 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON 4 Always active when ON h Screen hardcopy Activate the Trigger address the system will have designated window printed out You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON The designated window can be one of following three different types Source Window For print Current base window C Designate window no PLC name Setting Address Liw j 7 16 bit Unsigned Printer USE disk 1 E Current base window Print t
239. can store 2 ASCII characters reading 20 ASCII 482 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description characters is actually reading 10 words of register StringGet str1 0 Local HMI LW O 20 end macro_command StringGetEx StringGetEx read_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_data device_name device type address_ offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main char str1 20 short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding StringGetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device responds StringGet str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command Syntax Description StringSet send_data start device name device_type address_offset data_count Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send_data start send_data start data_count 1 send_data must be a one dimensional char array data_count is the number of sent characters it can be either a constant or a variable device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters 483 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual device_ty
240. card wFusbdisk Hw disk a 1 hy ee Cancel 60 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings Enter EB8000 select menu Edit System Parameters and the System Parameter Settings dialog appears oystem Parameter Sethngs Ed Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Model General avatem petting Security Device list Local HMI Local HMI Local MToU Ui Te 07A Dis able Ni th Nai i Project description m System Parameter Settings are divided into eight parts Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory and Printer Backup Server These will be introduced respectively in this chapter 61 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 Device Parameters in Device tab determine all of the attributes of each device controlled by the HMI they are connected with The device can be a PLC a remote HMI or a PC After opening a new mtp file in EB8000 a default device Local HMI is shown in the Device List This Local HMI is used to identify current HMI which means every mtp file must at least contains one Local HMI in Device List Select Settings under the device list A dialogue Device Properties will be shown as below From this we know that the attribute of Local HMI is a HMI and the location is Local Device Properties Name ocal HMI
241. ch time m If Auto repeat is unselected the system will stop playing video and close the file after complete a video play operation m If control address is unselected the system will find the first file in the designated directory and start playing it 342 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 26 Data Transfer Time based Overview Data transfer Time based object is the same as Data transfer Trigger based object it also transfers the data from source to destination register The difference is the way to activate data transfer operation The Data transfer time based object conducts data transfer operation based on time schedule it can also transfer data in the unit of bits Configuration Click Data Transfer Time based Object icon on the toolbar the summary of data transfer objects is shown as follows m frn Dats Tene Tinea gr Data Transfer Time based Object 1 Local HMI LB200 Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bitis 2 Local HML W250 gt Local HML W260 Mode Word Time interval 2 0 second s transfer langth 1 words settings Press the New button in the above dialogue box the Data Transfer Time based Object dialogue box appear as shown in the picture below set item and press OK button the object will be created 343 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Transfer Time based Object Attribute
242. ched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup Finish 15 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 10 Start EasyBuilder Pro project from menu Start All Programs EB8000 fey EBSoo0 AB Data Type Editor a EasyBuildersooo E EasyConverter TP EasyDiagnoser EasyPrinter me Easy Simulator All Programs ga Project Manager RecipeEditor 7 il i Log OFF LE Turn OFF Compute A oJ ReleaseMote i start gt Uninstall EasyBuilders000 The description of each item in EasyBuilder Pro menu Item Description F AB Data Type Edito When using AB Tags this tool can be applied to edit Tags ata lype Editor structure EasyBuilder Pro editing software Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log Communication monitoring tool via online simulation Remote printer server Tool for executing simulation without installing EasyBuilder y EssySimulator Pro SJ Project Manager EasyBuilder Pro project management oe Tool for setting format of Recipe data Users can open Recipe Hi RecipeEditor l data or data in External Memory here Notes for EasyBuilder Pro version and latest information To uninstall EasyBuilder Pro HMI i Series support downloading uploading project via USB cable After installing EasyBuilder Pro Please go to Computer Management Device Manager to check if USB driver is also installed if not please refer to
243. ck format but necessary in single line format without else The statement will be executed when the lt Condition gt is TRUE Optional The else if statement will be executed when the relative lt Condition n gt is TRUE Optional see lt Condition gt Optional The else statement will be executed when lt Condition gt and lt Condition n gt are both FALSE Must be used to end an if then statement 18 4 4 Selective Statements The select case construction can be used to perform selective group of actions depending on the value of the given variable The actions under the matched case are performed until a break command Is read The syntax is as follows Default case free Format Select Case variable Case value Statements break end Select Example Select Case A 440 E WE NTEK Case 1 b 1 break end Select Default case Format Select Case variable Case value Statements break Case else Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break Case else b 0 break end Select Multiple cases in the same block Select Case variable Case value1 Statements Case value2 Statements break end Select Example Select Case A 441 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Case 1 Case 2 b 2 Case 3 b 3 break end Select syntax description Select Case Must be used to begin the statement var
244. cording to the date they are established No 0 No 1 gt No 2 If the value in LWO is 3 the first data to be displayed will be data No 3 FY EL 20100604 No 4 IEE EV RL 20100605 WO SKE EV ize EL 20100608 No 17KB EV 4 3 EIEL 20100609 No 1 AEE EVITER EIEL 20100610 No 0 1I2EBR EV 4 As for LW1 2 modes can be selected a Number of days History control PLC name Local HMI s Address yy z o O 16 bit Unsigned Enable reading multiple histories Miber of days ji The range of History Data to be displayed will start from number in LWO The value in LW1 represents how many days to be included from the start to days before Example As illustrated below if value of LWO is 1 LW1 is 3 then the range of data will start form 20100609 and include data of 2 days before while 20100609 itself is counted We can see that in this example since data of 20100607 does not exist the data displayed will only include 20100609 and 20100608 315 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EEL 20100604 No 4 LEE EVT EYEL 20100605 No 3 HEB EVT tie EL 20100608 No 2 17EBR EVT 43 4EB EVI HR EEL 20100610 No 0 12EB EVIR b Index of the last history History control PLC name Local HMI we Address Lyy w oo 16 bit Unsigned Enable reading multiple histories Mode E EE Range of data to be displayed will take value in LWO as a start point and value in LW1 as an end Ex
245. cription Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a number Source can be either a variable or a constant Result must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result LOG10 source result result is 2 end macro_command RAND RAND result Description Calculates a random integer saved into result Result must be a variable macro_command main short result RAND result result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time 454 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command 18 6 2 Data Transformation BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a binary type value Source into a BCD type value result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BIN2BCD 1234 result result is Ox1234 source 5678 BIN2BCD source result result is Ox5678 end macro_command BCDZ2BIN source result Description Transforms a BCD type value source into a binary type value result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BCD2BIN 0x1234 result result is 1234 source 0x5678 BCD2BIN source result result is 5678 end macro command 455 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual DEC2ASCIll source result start len Description Transforms a decimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array
246. ct to HMI to start operating When EasyDiagnoser is unable to get connection with the HMI to be watched it is possible that HMI power is not ON or Port No is incorrect This may cause EasyDiagnoser to connect then disconnect with HMI continuously Please check if the Port No in EasyDiagnoser settings is same as that of the project The way to change it is described before 6 When EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI simply execute macro_1 Output window will then display the output of the TRACE function 547 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual i Weintek MT Diagnostic Too macro command main Short a GetData a Local HMI Li a a 1 SetData a Local Jj TRACE Lwo d a A Devices end macro command E Local HMI 548 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 13 The Usage of String Operation Functions String operation functions are added to macro which provides users a more convenient way to operate strings The term string means a sequence of ASCII characters each of which occupies 1 byte The sequence of characters can be stored into 16 bit registers with least significant byte first For example create an ASCII input object and setup as follows General Data Entry Security Shape Font _ Description Mask Use UNICODE Reverse high low byte Read address Address
247. ction established with the target HV 11 26 32 Looking for the target HMI 4 543 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The possible reason of not being able to get connection with HMI can be failure in executing simulation on PC Another reason is that the Port No used in project for simulation on PC is incorrect or occupied by system Please change Port No as shown compile project then do simulation again System Parameter Settings 2s Extended Memory Printen Backup server Model Syster Setting HMI model M T6OTOH M TS070iH M TL00 M T1001 800 x 480 HMI station no p Port no 8005 d at MODBUS server s port no When opening EasyDiagnoser the Port No should be set the same as that in project Only in this way can the communication succeed select HHI Default HM 192 168 1 103 Tina h1T397 O01 192 168 1 117 nicolas _mt1 04xsh Search 192 168 1 118 nicolas 871001 192 168 1 208 ikexin_Mi T807 0H search All 192 168 1 226 sugan hmi 192 168 1 233 Demo Joeyvi oS 20097002 or later supports 1021681 297 Memn SF 1200 Project Port e005 jal Hel Marne The three successive ports of the project port no are preserved for HMI communication Take the setting above as example Port No is set as 8005 therefore port 8005 8006 and 544 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 8007 will be preserved In this case when executing simulation on PC please make sure that these
248. curity class of User is set as below only objects with class A C E and none can the user adjust For more information please see Chapter 10 Security of Objects User 1 VJ Enable Password 1111 Ma O Mc Op Me OF Project password MTP file Users can set password to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab Users have to input the password set here when they want to edit the MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 Tick Enable then click Setting and the window is as shown below Enable User 10 User 11 _ Enable Password 19954561 range 1 4294967295 User 12 C Enable Oo ox Project pasword MTP file Z Enable Before editing project a pop up window will ask password for access the project L BasyBuilderS000 Fie Teol Help O A Bee EasyBuilders000 Password 4 Limited to 3 times 83 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MTP files are protected by additional encryption please follow the steps below a EB8000 V440 or later can open old version EB8000 projects using the password Originally set in old version EB8000 b The old version EB8000 can t open the projects that are built in EB8000 V440 or later which are protected by password if necessary please disable don t tick Enable the password first 84 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 6 Font Parameters in
249. d data and the settings shows as below Project Manager melect the folder to save download data AOUE Project i Recipe F W PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe 4 RW A PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log os Insert SD card or USB flash drive to PC and click Browse to assign the file path and then click Build to set all contexts of the download data EB8000 will then build the sources into SD card or USB flash drive Note The path of download data should avoid designating root directory of PC For example c also directory name such as f is illegal and should be written as f 420 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data Use the Data Transfer Trigger based object to transfer Recipe Data to the appointed address or save the data of the designated address in RW and RW_A as well Please refer to the Data Transfer Trigger based object section for more information 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically In order to prolong the life of flash memory of HMI EB8000 will save Recipe Data automatically every minute to avoid losing data when HMI shuts down EB8000 provides user with LB 9029 save all recipe data to machine set ON system register bit function to save Recipe Data manually EB8000 will save Recipe Data when user sets ON to LB9029 But when user sets ON to LB 9028 reset all recipe data set ON EB8000 will
250. d so on source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant 456 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual macro_command main short source char result 4 source 0x56 78 HEX2ASCII source result O 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is 7 result 3 is 8 end macro_command FLOAT2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII Source result start len Description Transforms a floating value Source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main float source char result 4 source 56 8 FLOAT2ASCII source result O 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is result 3 is 8 end macro command ASCII2DEC ASCII2DEC source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a decimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start 457 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Source and len can be a constant or a variable b
251. d the ET is added to the kept value The Q remains OFF Point 4 When the ET reaches the PT the TI be turned OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and Tl remains OFF Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the IN turns ON the timer measurement pauses Point 4 When the IN turns OFF the paused timer measurement continues Point 5 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R 384 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 31 Video In MT8000X series provide Video Input function Users can install surveillance camera then monitor the factory any time they want The video images can also be stored in devices and play them with Media Player or analyze them on PC This function can be utilized in different aspects Apart from monitoring factory it can also be used in driving device or Building Automation monitoring For hardware MT8000X series provide 2 channels for Video Input Users can freely switch channels to monitor and capture images without being influenced when pause playing The captured images will still be real time external image input The supported formats are NTSC and PAL Yideo In Objects Properties Ed General Profile Encode f
252. d time 12 00 00 Write start value 10 Write end value 0 At start time turn OFF the specific bit At end time turn ON the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON 3 3 3 OFF __ 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 361 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee ee E E 09 00 00 12 00 00 Action address Specify the address where the scheduler performs actions on 362 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Power ON Select the action to perform when power is turned on start end e Enable action If the MT8000 power is turned ON within the scheduler range the start action is performed If the MT8000 power is turned ON outside of the scheduled range the termination action is performed Inside the scheduled range Start time Power ON End time Start action Termination action Outside the scheduled range Power ON Start time End time Termination action Start action Termination action Disable If power is turned ON but the time is later than the Start Time the action is not automatically performed However the termination action is automatically performed Also if the termination action is not set the schedule range is unable to recognize and the action is not performed Word write These settings are active only when Action Mode is set to Word value Settings Write 363 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
253. ded Memory Editor Hew document File Edit View Window Help D h iel Sl EJ New document 4 Users can view and modify the data listed 5 In Save As select the correct format and file name to create a recipe or emi file Export to CSV File After opening a recipe or emi file select Save As and choose file format as CSV Import CSV File Under Recipe Editor file gt Import CSV File choose a CSV file to open After editing users can save it as a recipe or emi file so that it can be downloaded to HMI 633 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 25 EasyConverter This application program is utilized when converting the history record of data sampling dtl or event log evt stored in HMI to Excel csv that is readable on PC installed with Microsoft Excel The completed conversion can be exported to Excel 25 1 Introduction In Project Manager clicking EasyConverter will pop up the application program E Easy Converter File Edit View Options Help a ae a P There are four functions as follows 1 Export to Excel 2 Scaling function 3 Multi File Conversion 4 Command line 634 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 2 Settings of EasyConverter 25 2 1 How to Export to Excel When open the file a setting dialog will pop up as follow sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 16 bit Unsignec 16 bit Unsiane Scaling te Offset
254. deo image to object size 2 1 16 Magnification from 25 400 Set 1 for 25 2 for 50 3 for 75 and so on k Status control address 3 340 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 09 08 02 01 00 Reserved a10 ojo sia bit Bit 00 open file bit 0 file closed 1 file opened Bit 01 play file bit 0 not playing video 1 playing video Bit 08 command error bit 0 command accepted 1 incorrect command or parameters Bit 09 file error bit 0 file format accepted 1 unknown file format or reading fi When playing a video the system will turn ON open file bit and play file bit If the file is unable to be scanned or the command is incorrect the command error bit will be set ON 01 1 If file format is unsupported or disk I O error happens during playing e g user unplugs the USB disk the file error bit will be set ON 01 2 Refer to the following figure the value of status at each state would be Stop status Pause status 1 open file bit Playing status 3 open file bit play file bit Playing play command 1 2 3 ae command switch pause command Finish Stop e Pause stop command 5 Users should only set values to Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 and regard the other registers as read only Restrictions 341 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual m The system can only play one video file ea
255. der8000 User s Manual The correct process of inputting password 1 Input the passwords to the system reserved register LW 9220 password 2 Words 32 bits 2 Use LW 9219 User no 1 12 1 Word 16bit to designate current user Note value in LW 9219 must be 1 12 which represents User 1 User 12 respectively If the input password is wrong state of LB 9060 password error will be set ON If the input password is correct state of LB 9060 returns to OFF automatically The passwords of user 1 to user 12 can be obtained from system reserved registers LW 9500 user 1 s password to LW 9522 user 12 s password 24 words in total Users can change passwords even when the HMI is in operation When state of system reserved register LB 9061 update password set ON switches from OFF to ON EB8000 will use the data saved in LW 9500 to LW 9522 to update the password and use the new password in future Note The user operable classes of objects won t be changed due to the change of password When the state of LB 9050 user logout switches from OFF to ON current user will be forced to logout the system At this time only the object defined as None can be operated LW 9222 classes can be operated for current user records the operable classes for current user bit0 1 means the operable object for current user is class A bit1 1 means the operable object for current user is class B
256. dicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of hexadecimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 20 char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringBin2HexAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 14 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2HexAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 3c int src3 Oxta2b3c4d char dest3 6 bool success3 success3 StringBin2HexAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name StringMid Syntax success StringMid source start count destination start or success StringMid string start count destination start Description Retrieve a character sequence from the specified offset of the source string Preteen peice tnt semiran miten nnn 492 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start For source start the start offset of the substring is specified by the index value For static source string source the second parameter start specifies the start offset of the substring The count parameter specifies the length of substring being retrieved Destination must be an on
257. dicator and the Target Value of Target indicator all come from designated register See the picture below 251 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shape _ A thibute Type Normal v zm span Bar width ratio Se Bar color style Frame Backerourd Bar co T C Target indicator v Enable Color B Targetvalue 20 2 Tolerance Alarm mdicators Low lint E O at 2S Low color a High colo B Targetalannzerolspan dynamit address Enable PLE name Local HMI t Setting The following table shows the read address of low limit high limit and target The Address means the device address for example if the device address is LW20 and data format is 16 bit The Alarm Low limit is LW 20 The Alarm High limit is LW21 The Target indicator is LW22 The Zero is LW23 The Span is LW24 Data Alarm Target Format High limit indicator 252 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 16 bit Address Address Address Address Address format 1 2 3 4 32 bit Address Address Address Address Address format 2 4 6 8 253 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 16 Meter Display Overview The meter display object can display the value of word device with meter Configuration Click the Meter Display icon on the toolbar and the Meter Disp
258. dress_ offset is the address offset in the PLC 481 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example StringGet read data _1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 lf address_offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringGet read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If StringGet uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address offset PLC type FATEK FB Series W 1 10 FATER_FB s0 PLC I F R5 232 x PLC default station no 2 COM ICOM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on the value of the number of data_count since that the read_data is restricted to char array type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_data read char 8 bit char 8 bit l 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table reading 2 ASCII characters is actually reading the content of one 16 bit register macro_command main char str1 20 read 10 words from LWO LWS9 to the variables str1 0 to str1 19 since that 1 word
259. e Window O11 Window no Size Width 480 Height Frame Width 4 Color Background Color a Pattern ee Filled Pattern color Underlay window Bottom None Middle None Top None Popup window Start pos x Do T Doo monopoly Setting Description The name shown after window is numbered The principle is to make it easy to read and be remembered For example Operate Manually etc 10 WINDOW O10 11 Operate Manually 19 Window no Number of window Numbered from 3 1999 Width and Height of the window Generally the resolution of base window and that of HMI is identical For example if the HMI used is MT6100i the resolution is 800 480 Then the newly built window width will be 800 and height 480 The Width of the frame of the window Range from 0 16 the default is 4 97 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Background Underlay window The Color of the frame of the window Users can select a color they like from the list or simply click Custom to adjust a self defined color If the Width of the frame is set 0 then this setting will be ignored Default BREEEEE SE REE 8S e ann f a E E stor Color The color of the background of the window Pattern The pattern of the background of the window If needed users can choose a pattern they like from pattern style that pops up after clicking butt
260. e USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM2 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM3 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM4 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM5 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM6 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM 7 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM8 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON EM9 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON 592 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual We WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 9 Storage Space Management LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD card free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LW 9070 16bit free space insufficiency warning Mega LW 9078 32bit USB 2 current free space K bytes Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 593 Li WE NTEK 22 10 Touch Position EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9041 16bit touch status word bit 0 on user is touching the screen jLw 9042 16bit touch x positon R OR TOR LW 9043 18bit touch y positon R OR TOR Lw 9044 16bit leave x position RJ RJ R Lw 9045 16bit leave y postion R R R Want to know how to trigger relevant registers to cha
261. e form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false 503 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual macro_command main char src1 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String IrimLeft src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc char set2 20 char dest2 4 success2 String I rimLeft a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abc char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 String TrimLeft src3 O dest3 0 success3 true dest3 abc end macro_command String TrimRight success StringTrimRight source start set start destination start success StringTrimRight source set start destination start success StringTrimRight source start set destination start success StringTrimRight source set destination start Description Trim the trailing specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating wh
262. e 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 You may also use PLC address to define high and low limit 306 W WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Reference line Limit from FLE PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 Note XY Plot can be drawn repeatedly up to 32 times 1 channel 32 times 2 channels 16 times The way to calculate 32 divided by the number of channels 307 Da WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Overview Alarm bar and Alarm display objects are used to display alarm messages Alarm messages are those events registered in the Event log and meet trigger conditions Alarm bar and Alarm display objects display these alarms in order of priority and triggering time Alarm bar object scroll all alarm messages in one line alarm display object displays alarm messages in multi line and each line represents one alarm message The following pictures show that the alarm message are displayed in alarm display and alarm bar objects Refer to the Event Log chapter for related information Alarm bar object FSiFZi0G 3 21 38 Event 2 when LEO ON FSiFZI0G FRZI FE Event 3 when Lett ON 13112106 13 21 38 Event 0 when LW 100 13 12106 13 21 38 Event f When LW f gt 10 Alarm display object Configuration Click the Alarm bar icon on the toolbar the Alarm bar
263. e Editor Mew Data Type Data Types User Defined Mame B 1769_DI16 1 0 H Strings 4 Predefined Description B Module DeFined AB Embedded I016F C 0 AB Embedded 016F 1 0 AB Embedded O6816 0 0 AB Embedded _ 2616 10 Descriptione AB Embedded O816 0 0 E 2 member Edit Delete i Reload Save Exit 751 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select data then click Edit since the data of the modules can be operated by bit here Binary Access should be selected then click OK to return to Data Type Editor Edit data member Mame Description Data Type INT AB 769 DIL6 I 0 AB Embedded T16F 1 0 AB Embedded OB16 7 0 AB Embedded OB16 1 0 AB Embedded O816 0 0 ALARM ALARM_AMALOG ALARM DISITAL AUS VALVE CONTROL Array Dimensions Click OK to finish setting 752 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 35 FTP Server Application In addition to backup history data from HMI to USB memory stick or EasyPrinter FTP Server can also be applied to do this After downloading project to HMI FTP Server can be used to backup history data and recipe data and also to update recipe data The files in FTP Server can t be deleted 35 1 Login FTP Server Step 1 Before login FTP Server please check the OS Image version MT6000 8000 i Series OS Image 20100818 or later MT8000 X Series OS Image 20100906 or later Step 2 Enter HMI IP ftp 192 168 1 103 login
264. e an argument For further information about how to use EasyConverter please refer to the chapter25 Easy Converter 26 4 2 Specialized Criteria Sometimes users may need a special handling for the files uploaded from a specific HMI Here is an example Specialized Criterion for the HMI with IP 192 168 1 26 23 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 665 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Or users can also specify the HMI with its name Specialized Criterion for the HMI with name Weintek_01 4 dtl EasyConverter c PathName Weintek_01 Or in the case of needing special handling for different Data Sampling history files Specialized Criterion for the Data Sampling object s folder name Voltage 5 dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage The 5 criterion can only be performed on the history files uploaded from the Data Sampling Ux objects with the folder name Voltage The 3 argument indicates this criterion accepts the qualified Data Sampling files from any HMI Users can also change the ae argument to 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 HMI name etc for narrowing the target HMI 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File The following table explains all arguments in a criterion 1 File Type This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded files this criterion targets e g dtl for Data Sampling history files evt f
265. e dimensional char array to store the retrieved substring This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 20 abcdefghijklmnoparst char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringMid src1 5 6 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 fghijk char src2 20 abcdefghijklmnoparst char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringMid src2 5 6 dest2 0 I success2 false dest2 remains the same char dest3 20 12345678901234567890 bool success3 success3 StringMid abcdefghijklmnoparst 5 5 dest3 15 success3 true dest3 12345678901 2345fghij end macro_command Obtain the length of a string It returns the length of source string and stores 493 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual it in the length field on the left hand side of operator The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The return value of this function indicates the length of the source string macro_command main char src1 20 abcde int length1 length1 StringLength src1 0 length1 5 char src2 20 a b c d e int length2 length2 StringLength src
266. e direct window object sets the popup window in configuration When system is in operation users can use the state of the designated register to control popup or close the window Configuration Click the Direct Window icon on the toolbar and the New Direct Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Direct Window Object will be created See the pictures below J p gt HRA HHO Pa ee ee 231 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Direct Window Object Dewt OSOS Trigger Read address PLO name Local HI Ww Setting Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the bit device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style Refer to the Indirect Window Object for related information Window no Set the popup window number Example to use direct window 232 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Here is an example to explain how to use the direct window object The picture below shows the settings of the direct window object In the example use LB10 to call up the window 35 Read address PL name i Lacal HMI we Setting Toggle Switeh Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Mode Toggle Attribute Sie Window Mo 35 WIN
267. ect window and Indirect window 2 A window can only be displayed once simultaneously That is to say users cannot use 2 Direct Indirect windows to open the same window in one base window at the same time 3 Windows 0 9 are for system use only while windows 10 1999 are for users to define 95 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 6 2 Create Set and Delete a Window The picture below shows the windows information window tree in EB8000 This window is always shown on left side of the editing zone There are 2 ways to check all types of windows in EB 8000 If users change Object List to Window Preview every window will be shown in pictures The following section introduces how to create and set these windows Windows T x Object list J Window preview 0003 Pala x a 3 Fast belection 4 Common Window 5 PLC Response Fast Selection 6 HMI Connection 0004 T Paseword Restacton 0 storage Space Insufficient g E Common Window o005 i7 13 10 WINDOW O10 11 PLC Response 14 dj ic 6 2 1 Create a Window There are two ways to create a window One is to select a window number in window tree and right click then select New Complete all the settings in the pop up dialogue and click OK as shown below w 10 Mam Menu 11 show Toolbar 13 Ca 14 F 15 3 Choe 16 0 liS ld 19 a 20 Text Object 96 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Window Settings Nam
268. ed Select the window title bar firstly Touching the screen for the new position the popup window will be moved Screen hard Hardcopy current display screen to the printer connected with MT8000 Before copy using this function please choose printer model in System Parameter Model printer If printer does not support color print user can select grayscale to have a better printout effect Black and white is for improving text printing quality Screen hard copy Printer HP PCL Series ISB w Mode Notification Enable Notification When the function is selected MT8000 will set the state of the designated bit device to ON or OFF after the action is completed Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to 194 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Users can also set the address in the Notification area Non ASCIll character input Below we illustrate the method to input non ascii character such as Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Greece and so on Step1 Setting non ascii fonts Go to System parameter Font and add non ascii fonts in the Fonts for non ascii strings list For example use AR MinchoL JIS for Japanese AR MingtiM GB for Simplified Chinese AR MingtiM KSC for Korean Arial for Greek please refer illustration below S
269. ed HMI Ww Setting Attribute Sye Hottetar Step 2 Set the Profile of direct window object to same size as WINDOW 200 165 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 3 Create a Numeric Input object and don t select Use a popup keypad Hew Numeric Input Object x General Data Enty Numeric Format Security Shape Font Input order _ Enable Eeyboard Hint If the keyboard iz an USB keyboard on indivectidivect window or on the same window please don t check Use a popup keypad Step 4 Add a Set Bit object set LB 0 as ON and overlay it on the Numeric Input object Add Set Bit objects on the Enter and ESC function keys respectively Set LB0 as OFF In this way when user presses either Enter or ESC will close the keyboard 166 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLO name Local HMI setting Write after button is released A thibute Set style 167 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard Users can also place a fixed keyboard in the window instead of popup keyboard or direct window The keyboard can t be moved or canceled this way Step 1 Create a Numeric Input object and don t select Use a popup keypad Step 2 Design a keyboard with function keys and place them in screen ASCITUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clear
270. ed and recovered events will be hidden When the value in LW100 1 is 1 gt Users can delete the selected events under real time mode 317 Lt WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shane Font Include categories o thio o ize d larm Event Log object Max event no Fane ME Backerournd Acknowledge Do pelect box m Format mort O Time ascending Time desending Order 4 Characters Display items Display order Se WeNCe NO Event trigger time Event tigger date Event message Sane ie Acknowledge time Event trigger date Eeim to normal time Sequence no Event mesage e d E I a Oooo A oc If Display chars is 0 it means that the system will display all of characters Date MMODAYY Tame HEMMER wt Setting Description Include Select category of events that belongs to the event display object categories category of an event is set in event log For example if the category of an event log display is set to 2 4 it will display all the active event messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter 318 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Event Display Object s Properties Event Display Category Se pame paa E aa p Include categories 0 thn E Color a Acknowledge select bo
271. ed for Macro use They cannot be used for variable array or function names gt gt lt lt lt gt and or xor not lt lt gt gt amp 4 exit macro command for to down step next return bool short int char float void if then else break continue set sub end while wend true false SQRT CUBERT LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC ASIN ACOS ATAN BIN2BCD BCD2BIN DEC2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII HEX2ASCII ASCIIZDEC ASCIIZFLOAT ASCIIZHEX FILL RAND DELAY SWAPB SWAPW LOBYTE HIBYTE LOWORD HIWORD GETBIT SETBITON SETBITOFF INVBIT ADDSUM XORSUM CRC INPORT OUTPORT POW GetError GetData GetDataEx SetData SetDataEx SetRTS GetCTS Beep SYNC_TRIG_ MACRO ASYNC_TRIG MACRO TRACE FindDataSamplingDate FindDataSamplinglndex FindEventLogDate FindEventLogIndex StringGet StringGetEx StringSet StringSetEx StringCopy StringMid StringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc StringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc StringHexAsc2Bin StringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare StringCompareNoCase StringFind StringReverseFind StringFindOneOf Stringlncluding StringExcluding String ToUpper String ToLower StringToReverse StringTrimLeft String TrimRight StringInsert 437 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 4 Statement 18 4 1 Definition Statement This covers the declaration of variables and arrays The formal construction is as follows ty
272. eeeeeeseenaes 590 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory ccccccscceccsecceeceeeceececceeeceesaeecuecueseeseesaeenaes 591 22 9 Storage Space NINA SIMS sxeecincaescentacesceniaeeceendaencenienasdanennccncmgecenssersueccannes 593 PLIO TOUCEF OSO Ere EA E E E 594 22 11 Station Number Variables cccccceccecceeeceeeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeuseteeeeeseeeeeenaes 595 22A MOORE IS CM o E E E E E E E E E E E 597 LATS NTP FICAN OM AO ena E E E EEEE 598 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication cccecc secs eeceeeeseceeeeeeceeteeeeeececeeeeeeteeeeaes 599 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings cccceccecccececeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaees 601 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM ccc ceccceceseecseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeaees 604 22 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet cc cccceccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 606 22 18 Communication Status with PLC USB cece eccceeeseeee esse eeseeeaeeeaeeeaees 609 22 19 Communication Status with Remote HM1 cccceccecesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaes 610 22 20 Communication Status with Remote PLC cceccecesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenees 613 22 21 Communication Error Messages amp No of Pending Cmd ccccccceeeeeeeees 616 22 22 NIISCCNANCOUS FUNCHONS ic ccsveresercersaersnsssadistarsagaseersedesatsenteseersnterenneraanacenees 617 22 23 Remote Print Backup Server cccccceccseeceeeeeceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeueceeeeee
273. efore being used To declare a variable specify the type before the variable name Example int a short b switch float pressure unsigned short c Declaring Arrays Macros support one dimensional arrays zero based index To declare an array of variables specify the type and the variable name followed by the number of variables in the array enclosed in brackets Arrays are 1 to 4096 variables in length Macros only support up to 4096 variables per macro Example int a 10 short b 20 switch 30 float pressure 15 433 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is array size 1 Example char data 100 array size is 100 where minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 100 1 434 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Variable and Array Initialization There are two ways variables can be initialized 1 By statement using the assignment operator Example inta float b 3 a 10 b O 1 2 During declaration chara 5 b 9 The declaration of arrays is a special case The entire array can be initialized during declaration by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets Example float data 4 11 22 33 44 now data 0 is 11 data 1 is 22 18 3 2 Operators Operations are used to designate how data is to be manipulated In each statement the operator on the left is
274. elow to operate the executing project ad Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line or On line Password O account name S1 1 amp D 8s lqiwielritiy Monnan 4 Enter sis ditiginii kt em zixte y lel aims an 557 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Password iE ea Step 2 input password Login 112 314 5 6 78 9 0 Bs oe IT YLO OER ES SIGH Enter civem LEUN zx EEK K KOK Password trees Step3 press Fion Login button y Easy View 558 Li WE NTEK Password Login Success Access Accepted LE asyView Password EE Fail Access Denied Ly asy View 539 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 14 Macro Password Protection Macro under development Password Password EEEE max 10 characters Password protect Decompilation cannot recover MACROs when checks Password protect On MACRO editing window there s the Password protect selection tick it and click Set password to set a password less than or equals to 10 characters support ASCII character only ex a hFds After setting MACRO password users will have to input correct password when opening MACRO editing window Password EasyBuilder8000 should be rebooted for typing the password again after 3 incorrect attempts
275. em parameters must also be filled in EB8000 parameter 1 Also when using S7 200 S7 300 drivers since in EB500 the high and low bytes are sent in reverse order this will cause MT500 to misread MT8000 Local data Step 3 COM Port used RS232 connect it with RS232 of MT8000 the communication is then enabled Device address RW Bit dddd 0 4095 h O f Ms LB B dddd 0 9999 679 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 29 Pass Through Function The pass through function allows the PC application to control PLC via HMI In this case the HMI acts as a converter The pass through function provides two modes Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through in Project Manager will open a setting dialogue Pass through Ethernet com port Virtual COM Part PG lt gt PLO Please install weintek virtual serial port driver 680 pu WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 1 Ethernet Mode How to install virtual serial port driver Before using Ethernet mode please check whether Weintek virtual serial port driver is installed as described below If Virtual COM port PC lt gt PLC displays Please install weintek virtual serial port driver please click Install Pass through Ethernet O Cabdi port Virtual CO Port PG lt gt PLO Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLO Connection Port HM lt gt PLC HMP If the dialog
276. em Settings Before operating HMI users have to complete the HMI system settings After this users can develop their own operation interface through EB8000 editing software The following illustrates each system setting respectively 4 2 1 System Reset Each HMI is equipped with a set of reset button and DIP switch When users use DIP switch to change modes corresponding functions will be triggered If system password is lost or forgotten users can set DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest remain OFF then reboot HMI 43 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual HMI will switch to touch screen calibration mode After calibration the pop up window appears as shown below Users will be inquired if they would like to restore the system password to the default Restore to default password Yes No 04 When YES is chosen another pop up dialog appears as below The system will ask users to type yes to confirm to restore system password to default Then click OK The default password is 111111 However other passwords including download and upload password have to be reset Project will be removed Comfirm by typing yes yes The illustration above shows the steps to restore factory settings of T and i Series HMI For X Series users will need a connected USB keyboard and press any key or space key right when the first image displayed as HMI power ON to enter the menu Select Factory Mode t
277. embers Data Type Size 60 byte s o Name Data Type Style Description External Access E YarB ool BOOL Decimal Read rite BoolArray BOOL S2 Decimal Read write WarMeal REAL Float Read rite eI Real ray REAL 5 Float Read write Yarlrt IMT Decimal Read rite a Int ray INT 3 Decimal Read write E YarDint DINT Decimal Read rite a Dint rray DIN T 3 Decimal Read write EH 745 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 3 The table above shows the defined data types in RSLogix Select Name and Data Type with mouse This can be done by pressing and holding on the first option then slide down to the bottom until the scroll rolls to the end then stop holding All the items will then be selected Press ctrl v to copy then paste to the editing window VarBool BOOL Booldrray BOOL 32 VarReal REAL Realdrray REALS VarInk INT Intarray INT 3 YarDink CIMT Dintarray DINT S Step 4 At this moment press OK to finish operating then return to the main window to view the successfully added multiple data 746 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual User Defined Name TestT ype TestTypes TestTypeb TestT ype TestTypet TestTypecE TestTyper Strings Name Data Type Descriptione Predefined VarBool BOL Module Defined Boolarray BOOL S2 VarReal REAL Realarray REAL S VarInt INT Int rray INT 3 YarDint DINT Dintarray DINT 3 Description 747 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User
278. end macro_command C49 an extended addressee s station number must be between 0 and 255 For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 illegal 300 123 means the station number is 300 but the maximum is 255 C50 an invalid PLC name PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters C51 macro command do not control a remote device A macro can only control a local machine For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 PLC 1 is connected with the remote HMI so it can not work 534 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 11 Sample Macro Code 1 for statement and other expressions arithmetic bitwise shift logic and comparison macro_command main int a 10 b 10 i b 0 400 400 lt lt 2 401 b 1 22 2 30 7 b 2 111 gt gt 2 b 3 403 gt 9 3 gt 9 3 lt 4 3 lt 8 8 b 4 not8 1 and 2 1 or0 1 xor2 b 5 405 and 3 and not O b 6 8 amp 4 4 amp 4 8 4 8 4 b 7 6 4 b 8 0x11 b 9 409 for i 0 to 4 step 1 if a 0 400 then GetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 9 GetData b 0 Device 1 4x 11 10 end If next i end macro command 2 while if and break statements macro_command main int b 10 i i 5 while i 5 20 3 GetData b 1 Device 1 4x 11 1 if b 1 100 then break end if 535 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
279. ents and Settings Nicolas At m MTP mtp XOB file name C Documents and Settings Nicolas Ami MTF 1 xob Select the languages used on the HMI CA Documents and Settings Nicolas AL EBBOO0Y410 100614 eng font MTPLE0 ttt Arial C Documents and Settings Nicolas A EBSOO0V410 100614 engi font MTP1 1 ttt Times Mew Romar gt Object size 56204 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792986 bytes Shape size 842 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes 0 error s O warnings Total size 1200966 bytes 1 15M E im l ol ol L Ti L lt Double click error messages to modity the attributes of relative objects Buld font fies 695 tb WE NTEK 30 3 Disable HMI upload function LB9033 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EB8000 provides system reserved address LB9033 When this address is set ON the HMI will disable upload function of XOB file and vice versa HMI needs to be rebooted to active LB9033 Address Tag Library Customized System No 30 al J2 Addes tag name LB 9029 LE 9033 n i LE 30353 LB 9041 LB 9044 Save event data log to AML USE disk HMI free space insufficiency alarm when CN LB S036 LE 9037 LB 9038 LB 9039 LB 9040 save all recipe data to machine set OM LB 9030 LB 9031 update COM 1 communication parameters set ON Update COM 2 commun
280. er s Manual Chapter 32 ASCII Protocol 32 1 Command List The following commands are used for communication between the ASCII host and the HMI Command Description Name RD Batch Read Reads specified data in a continuous block Batch Write Writes specified data in a continuous block Random Reads data from multiple non consecutive Read devices Writes data to multiple non consecutive devices Write Read Coil Reads the specified coils in a continuous block Write Coil Writes the specified coils in a continuous block 710 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 2 Optional Parameters Parameters settings are used as follows ASCII Server Settings COM Timeout sec Baud rate Turn around delay rms oO Data bits B Bi Protocal Parity Rober Simple Stop bits Response to write commands on O OFF Protocol Robust The protocol uses the non printable characters STX 02H and ETX 03H ACK 06H and NAK 15H and includes a 2 byte checksum Simple Some Host devices such as Motion Controllers are not capable of generating the non printable characters or calculating the checksum In this mode the data packets are formed as defined below but do not include the STX ACK ETX NAK or checksum The OxOD is at the end of the packet the packet sent by MT8000 also has a 0x0D at the end Response to write commands sets whether or not MT8000 responds to write c
281. er s Manual When read address value is 8 high limit 10 origin 5 low limit 5 Bar width ratio o display the ratio between bar and object width Below illustration displays two ratio 50 and 100 Bar To set the bar s Frame Background color Bar style and Bar color See color style the picture below _ Frame Background Bar st yle Target When the register value meets the following condition the color of filled Indicator area will change to the Target color Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of dynamic address Users can also set address in Outline tab while adding a dynamic address 250 L WE NTEK Alarm Indicator Target Alarm Dynamic Address EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Target Value Tolerance lt Register value lt Target Value Tolerance See the picture below in here Target Value 5 Tolerance 1 if the register value is equal to or larger than 5 1 4 and equal to or less than 5 1 6 the filled area s color of the bar will change to the Target color Target value 5 Tolerance When register s value is larger than High limit the color of filled area will change to High color when registers value is smaller than Low limit the color of filled area will change to Low color When select Enable the Low limit and High limit of Alarm in
282. er E EEE E E EEE E EE EE E 417 Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data ccccccccecceecsseteeeeeeceeeeeesseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeas 418 17 1 Updating Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB cable ccc cecc eee eeeeeeeeenees 418 17 2 Updating Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Flash Drive cccccceeeeeee scenes 420 17 90 Transierning Recipe Data cseccc acccrcsnssseercageragecagecetecnsaceecantesercsagesesosagenegaseeeseeecnaere 421 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically 2 0 0 0 ccccccccecceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaess 421 Chapter 18 Macro Referente ir sceiccosivnsvecinanasans vinasxceviwvdenevanvsanscuevsaeuvbeuiesilouniaasinvinaswasesis 422 18 1 Instructions to the Macro ECItOP ccc cceccecceecceece cesses eeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeaees 422 TMT ONS UCU ssccet ace scentscnteentscsisestecateesdcanisasisandeasiecedewsi send seed scbisendseninesdecese 431 lk gt D Caen ie ee rn re ee eee ee ee ee ee 432 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 3 1 Constants and Variables cccccccccccccceeceseeeeceeeeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeees 432 18 3 al ONS TS es chee ecerteeesenecnerceseieemanttescreredacacesstexeteeseeesiesiseeseacetereranaenerseseiee 432 f oo kae VNAO eer E E A EE A E E AE 432 To 2 OPO e E E E E E E 435 AENOR ae E EE EE Ra 438 18 4 1 Definition gt la beMOIN casseescecanceccarssaceccecaeesccaccaecseecsetecaeesessacacaeeceecsatecaacmasecceexe 438 18 4 2 Assignment
283. erodenaderesanssansacneceniaesa ena 569 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode DeVICE ccccceccseeceeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeees 570 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode DeVICE cceccccceccceeeeeeseeteeeeeeceeeeeeaseteeeeeeteeeeeenaes 570 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection sesceeeeserenencrenns 574 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication ennnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnrerrnrsrnnrsrrnrsnrnrnrrerrnrerrrrerrnns 9 9 2162 PO OAM COMMUNI CAUON zs caccsacvsecaseeiseancnsesataaneersareaeecaasaaaeseasaeesearsadesmianeecnenns 577 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMI anonsenonnennnnonnnnsnnnnnnnenonrerenrsennns 579 Chapter 22 System Reserved Words BitS ccccccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeseeees 581 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory ccccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 582 2 2 EE E PEE PE PEI E I E E T T A PEE P E T 582 PPA EPA 0 OS E O E A E E E EE E E AE EE E E E E E 583 PR TAI N O eraen E EEA E EE E E E E 584 22 3 User Name and PaSSWOIMK cccccccecceeceeceeceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeseeseeeeeseeseeseees 585 22A Dalal o APN ee E E E E EE E 586 22 O EVON LOO ooer E E EE E E E E 587 22 0 AMI FarOWwaleO DClatOn iasesicasssacesacasaeisaarensoiassanaernareadesnaraatesassaaeseariadesesaageenaee 589 22 f Local HMI Network Information ccccccceccsecceeeeeeseeceeeeeeceeeeeeaueceeee
284. ertain device type can also be shown in the content This device type should be the same as that of the read address of event log Format d initial sign PLC s address d end sign For example if Device type in Read address is MW when content is set as High Temperature 15d and the value in MW15 is 42 while the event is triggered the displayed content in Event Display will be High Temperature 42 Font Color Users can set Font and Color for each event The font and color of an alarm display or event display object comes from this setting As illustration below these two events use different colors and font styles 1 140907 15 02 Event 7 when LB1 1 GO I409 07 13 02 Event 3 when LIFI 20 When an event item in an event display object is touched the value is written to the assigned address Please refer to Chapter 13 Objects for information about event display object The warning alarm used when an event is triggered can be selected Click Sound Library to choose warning sound and click Play to 114 Address of Watch EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual check the sound Enable continuous beep until acknowledged or recovered Continuous beep can be set which will only stop when the event is acknowledged or recovered System register LB 9042 can be set to acknowledge all alarm events at one time The system default Beep sound is used as this continuous
285. es of 121 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual records at the same time Users can click Data Format to open the dialog to define the content in one data sampling Take the following as an example user defines three types of data Index 16 bit Unsigned Pressure 1 16 bit Signed and Temperature 32 bit Float respectively which makes data length to be 4 words in total In this way EB8000 retrieves a 4 words lengthed data each time from the assigned address to be the content in one data sampling Data Format Bite ee 1 Pressure 1 16 bit Signed 2 Temperature 32 bit Float Caution After executing off line simulation if users need to change data format please delete data log file in C EB8000 datalog and then run off line simulation again The symbol means the storage location of data files Clear address If the status of the assigned address is set ON the obtained data will be cleared and the number of data sampling will go back to zero This won t affect sampled data that is already saved in file Caution this function is used for trend display in real time mode only Hold address If the status of the assigned address is set ON sampling will be paused until the status of assigned address returns to OFF History files Assign the storage location for data sampling However when users execute simulation on PC all data will be saved to the same subdirectory of data
286. eseeeseeees 35 O20 ONG SIMUNAUOM lt ceasseseceesseeccagesaepsagesegasegsaeacseecsegeseeaseposeeaseeestenseeeseaescdeseaaeees 35 39 2 HIS SIMU ALO Me aoe seseeeeacesedesecenedeeaegneessc deeeaeecasedeucdaeedeeadeeseiesceneereaueaeeeeasoec 36 34 Download Ine PrOleCl to AMI s ssccesciscesccctsacccesdtocasesdtonntosisaaniardsecaterdtoaniesteseaierdtecaton 3 Chapter 4 Hardware Set G Sissseeeocececscedosscasecanscanecessderoderadecedarscanadendsteadenaeeadenasnsetonesanedon 42 ATTTORO OM FAW hs a n E E 42 TTU B FON r E ee E ee E 42 dT ENCO PO e nen E E E E E E EEEE 42 Ako GFeECad or SD Card oer E E N E eee 42 A gt SOMA WO OM oe E E A E E 42 aA a U EEEE Ea e E E ieandeatceendencdaaees 43 BZ OyO ROSO resseca E E E EE E EEE E EEE ENEN 43 A2 DV SGI TOODI ereere EEn E EESE EEEE ERRE Ea TEREE 45 PA EEEa CY DOAN O E E E E 46 aP AEE a CEE fC ee E E E E ee E S E 47 AZ 2 3 SY SSM NOMAN ccesceeeccerectecceretezesesestexecacesevaseusdeerieasiearseasteassenetoenoseiaeies 47 4 2 2 4 System Setting cssccisacsigtorisaneicuceisusiecieucsstasduesitnsdusse soisivustivec Jasii aasunveaateucnsestidexts 48 4 2 2 5 Touch Screen Calibration Mode c cccccccceccseeceeeceeeceeseeeeeeseeeseeeseees 57 1 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 43 HMI D wnload SUING assesseer eaa 58 Chapter 5 System Parameter SettingS cccccccccscceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecueeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeaas 61 IT DOVICO en ee 62 5 7 1 HOw 10 Controla Local PLC
287. eset count Description Sets the first count elements of an array source to a specified value preset source and start must be a variable and preset can be a constant or variable macro_command main char result 4 char preset FILL result 0 0x30 4 result O is 0x30 result 1 is 0x30 result 2 is 0x30 result 3 is 0x30 preset 0x31 FILL result O preset 2 result O is 0x31 result 1 is 0x31 end macro_command SWAPB SWAPB source result Description Exchanges the high byte and low byte data of a 16 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result SWAPB 0x5678 result result is Ox7856 source 0x123 SWAPB source result result is 0x2301 end macro_command 460 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Name swaPw SWAPW source result Description Exchanges the high word and low word data of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result SWAPW 0x12345678 result result is Ox56 781234 source 0x12345 SWAPW source result result is Ox23450001 end macro command LOBYTE LOBYTE source result Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source res
288. established with the targ No Cmd PID Device Bl inges Amesema me Error ae Smart Docking Type Name MTS8000 Series Hill Location Local Ld Block Interval Swords Polling Packages hax pose Length 256 words Package Device Station Index Address Length 401 ae LB 00000 f 1 A LB 00562 2 11 2 LB 00000 1 1201 LE 00563 I 1 Smart Docking Note EasyDiagnoser doesn t support Siemens S7 1200 Ethernet and Allen Bradley Ethernet IP CompactLogix ControlLogix Free Tag Names since both of the PLC use tag 738 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 34 AB EtherNet IP Free Tag Names When using the driver of Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix ControlLogix in EB8000 users can import User Defined Tag from CSV file of RSLogix5000 However data type of User Defined Predefined and Module Defined Structure won t be imported 7 TYPE SCOPE NAME DESCRIFTDATATYFE SPECIFIEF ATTRIBUTES 3 TAG Local 1 C AB Embedded_IQI6F C 0 9 TAG Local 1 1 AB Embedded_IQI6F I 0 10 TAG Local 2 C AB Embedded OB16 0 0 ll TAG Local 2 AB Embedded OBI16 0 12 TAG Local20 E Embedded_OEl6 04 13 TAG Array2D DINT 25 5 RADIX Decimal Cons l4 TAG Array Bool EDGL 256 RADIX Decimal Cons 15 TAG Array DINT DINT 130 RADIX Decimal Cons 16 TAG Array Real REAL 125 RADIX Float Constant IF TAG EGG INT 15 RADIX Decimal FLC ls TAG
289. et the state of LB2 to the variable a GetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 473 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description GetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW7 to the variable e note that he type of e is int GetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to f 0 f 9 Il since each integer value occupies 2 words GetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetDataEx f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command setData send_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or setData send_ data device_name device_ type address offset 1 Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send_data start send_data start data_count 1 data_count is the amount of sent data In general send_data is an array but if data_count is 1 send_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to send one word data macro_command main short send_data_1 2 5 6 send _ data _ 2 5 setData send_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 SsetData send data 2 FATEK KB Series
290. ether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success 504 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual success1 String TrimRight src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc char set2 20 char dest2 20 success2 String TrimRight a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 a bc char src3 20 ab c char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 String TrimRight src3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Nea Sen success Stringlnsert pos insert start destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert destination start Description success Stringlnsert pos insert start length destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert length destination start Insert a string in a specific location within the destination string content The insert location is specified by the pos parameter The insert string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The number of characters to insert can be specified by the length parameter This function returns a Boolean indicating whethe
291. eurrentMNCount J 25 26 S gt gt gt gt 5 gt 5 gt 5 gt get gqnturrentMNID gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 gt gt gt gt gt 27 qneurrentMIp 1 28 secDatalgqnCurrentMiID Local HMI LW 1000 29 f gt gt gt set QnCuLrenthIDassooe spo o gt gt 30 31 GetDataladress Local HMI LU 1 1 32 29 B for i toa J step 2 34 setbata value Local HMI LW adress 1 35 tempVval value EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 E walue a 6 value 6 valt Next A Greys rene iwaluel 37 adres 37 adreg 37 adre 7i adress funce adress 35 TEDi 38 Pa 35 f foo Ne fioo set gnOurrentMNCounts gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 39 gn CUr 39 gu ur 39 gut qncCurrentMCount 2 _ 40 Setha LJ 40 Setia P 40 Het dD im 40 Sptbata gnCurrentNCount Local HHI LW 1 ai f gt gt gt 41 gt gt 41 f gt gt pee f gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Set gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 42 ff gt gt gt 42 ff gt gt qzi f gt gt 42 f fP gt gt R gt gt 3 gt gt gt gt ASSErL gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt d Selecting Clear All Bookmarks will close all bookmarks 10 Macro editor provides macro code outlining function for easier viewing This function is to hide macro codes that belong to same block and display them with an icon There will be a tree diagram on the left side of edit area Users can click Fl to hide the block or to open as sho
292. everse In normal condition the ASCII code is displayed in low byte high byte high low byte order The reverse selection makes the system display ASCII characters in high byte low byte order 222 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address Notification Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system display its value and write new data to it Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object No of words To set the length of ASCII data in the unit of words Each ASCII character take one byte each word contains two ASCII characters In the example shown below the object will display 3 2 6 characters abbdef When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device About the Data Entry tab please refer to Numeric Input and Numeric Display section 223 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ASCII Input Object General
293. ew window number will be written to the Trigger address 1 ELC Control PLO name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Change window we Active only when designated window opened 10 WINDOW 010 wt Turn on back light Clear data after window changed Trigger address PLL name Setting As an example of the above configuration When writing a valid window number 11 into LWO the system will close the current window and open window 11 then write 11 into LW1 LW0 1 If you use 32 bit device as trigger address and the device type of the trigger address is in word basis then the system will write the window number into Trigger address 2 Below is the list of write address for each different type of data format 16 bit Signed Address 1 32 bit Unsigned Address 2 32 bit Signed Address 2 Note lf LB 9017 ON the write back operation will not be executed If Clear data after window changed is selected the Trigger address will be reset to 0 after new window is open b Write data to PLC current base window When the system changes the base window the new window number will 348 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual be written into the Trigger address c General PLC Control This function performs data transfer between PLC and HMI when users set appropriate value in Trigger address Control code Operation for data transfer Trigger address PL
294. f the project The settings of these objects are shown below Function Key object is used to execute macro_1 Execute macro Macro macro_1 AD 1 541 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line or On line simulation Objects Library Tools Window Help PPR Sy soia Off line Simulation Ctrl T When processing simulation on PC right click and select Run EasyDiagnoser in the pop up menu Numeric Display Function Key Exit simulation Run EasyDiagnoser Screenshot Afterwards EasyDiagnoser will be started Logger window displays whether EasyDiagnoser is able to connect with the HMI to be watched or not Output window displays the output of the TRACE function The illustration below shows that EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI 542 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual File View Options Help Command Read Write Device All E Address Type All Range No Cm PID Device SL al m JF t Devices Logger 1 E3 11 27 33 Looking for the target HMI Index 0 11 27 33 Connection established with the tart Type Name MT8000 Series HMI Location Local Block Interval 5 words Max Read Length 256 words Max Write Length 256 words When EasyDiagnoser is not able to connect with HMI Logger window displays content as shown below Logger a Ea 11 26 32 Conne
295. fficient data return_value is 1 otherwise is 0 Below is an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a MODBUS device Read Holding Registers macro_command main 468 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 Ox3 function code Read Holding Registers address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 _ read 2 words 4x_1 and 4x_2 HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0O checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 I send out a Read Holding Registers command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 Il read responses for a Read Holding Registers command INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_ value if return_ value gt 0 then read_data 0O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 data in 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 data in 4x_2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro_command 469 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Syntax Description GetData read_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or GetData read_ data device name device_type address _ off
296. figuration Click the Event Display icon on the toolbar the Event Display dialogue box appears set each items in the General tab press OK button and a new Event Display Object will be created See the pictures below 312 p WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Event Display Object General Event Display shape Font bwit O O OS Mode Write address PLC name Local HMI Setting Control address Enable event management Cancel Setting Description Select the event source format there are Real time and History for selection a Real time Write address This displays the events in the log triggered from HMI starts up till present When the events are acknowledged the value in Alarm Event Log Message Write value for Event Display object will be exported 313 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual to the write address of event display object Write value for event display Write value b History Control e Enable reading multiple histories not selected In this mode it displays event log from history record The system save the event history in daily basis The event history of each date is saved in separated files with date tags attached The History control is used to select one history record file The picture below shows the History control setting which designates a word device for History contr
297. fore connecting with MT8000 series Otherwise MT8000 will stop responding with a black screen Inkjet Printer HP DeskJet 920C 930C D2360 D2560 D2568 3 SP M D E F EPSON ESC protocol 9 pin printer RS232 port SIUPO http www siupo com SP M D E F series SP E1610SK paper width 45mm SP E400 4S paper width 57 5mm a SP MDEF Recommended SP printer type for customers outside China Please refer to manual before using printer 628 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 Axiohm A630 Micro printer Axiohm A630 from France connected via serial port 5 SPRT SP DIII DIV D5 D6 A DN T SP DN40SH dot matrix printer SP RMDIII40SH thermal printer 6 EPSON TM L90 629 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 24 Recipe Editor Recipe Editor is a Win32 application and can only run on MS Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 it allows users to create view and modify Recipe rcp and EMI emi files Additionally it can convert Recipe and EMI files to CSV format and vice versa 24 1 Introduction Under Recipe Editor file gt new the following dialogue appears Set Data Format Address range unit word Select your data format For mat Save Format Delete Format From D T 100 Data format Description Add 16 bit Unsinged Data O Delete Clear All Modify Setting Description S 630 M WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
298. from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant This function is used to clear the input and output buffers associated with the COM port macro_command main int com_port 3 PURGE com_port PURGE 1 end macro_command Name SetRTS SetRTS com_port source Description Set RTS state for RS232 com _ port refers to the COM port number 1 It can be either a variable or a constant Source also can be either a variable or a constant This command raise RTS signal while the value of source is greater than 0 and lower RTS signal while the value of source equals to 0 macro_command main char com_port 1 char value 1 SetRTS com_port value raise RTS signal of COM1 while value gt 0 479 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SetRTS 1 0 lower RTS signal of COM1 end macro_command GetCTS GetCTS com_port result Description Get CTS state for RS232 com_port refers to the COM port number 1 It can be either a variable or a constant Result is used for receiving the CTS signal It must be a variable This command receives CTS signal and stores the received data in the result variable When the CTS signal is pulled high it writes 1 to result otherwise it writes O macro_command main char com_port char result GetCTS com_port result get CTS signal of COM1 GetCTS 1 result get CTS signal of COM1 end macro command Beep Description Plays beep sound This command pl
299. fset See the picture below Numeric Display LWO Murti State LWO offset 1 a JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be added by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is equal to or larger than the value of No of States Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the write address will return to Offset and show the state 0 otherwise the value of the write address will maintain as No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states no 1 NOTE Like the word lamp object the state shown by Multi State Switch object is the value of the word device subtracts Offset Attribute Stwich style JOG4 w State no 5 Cyclic Enable 203 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be subtracted by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is smaller than the value of Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the register will change to No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states 1 otherwise the value of the word device will remain in Offset and shows the state 0 User defined mapping Users can modify the value of state illegal input and error notification Remain current state if input an illegal
300. g is set true in Excel the system will compare this device type with the user defined tag in system If no suitable tag can be found the system will set the user defined tag in event log to be false Before importing library label library and sound library please make sure library names exist in the system otherwise the system will simply use the file name of the imported excel file C Export to Excel Click Export excel button to export data in Event log to excel 108 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Category All 2 i Ma Text Mode Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer Event WORD lt 000 LW 0 Disable Disable Event l BIT i AN LE j Dia able Dis able t Enable back light when alarm occurs History files Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 v Preservation limit Days of preservation davis Print Sequence no Event trigger time CO HH MIMS HH MIM DD HH MM Event trigger date O MADD Y DDM YY O DD MM YY Ovr MM Db copy J Paste 109 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 2 Create a New Event Log Click New Event Log dialog appears with two tabs General tab Alarm Event Log Eg General Mesare wes OOOO Priori la Address type Word wt Read address Notification Enable O met ON met OFF PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Condition Trigger
301. g on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 7 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable termination action 17 359 Lyd gs WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 8 Select General tab set Write start value to 90 and Write end value to 30 i tt ae Wend vale 9 Click OK the settings appear in the Scheduler list Schedule settings guide E General tab Scheduler General Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power OM stactlend action Acton mode O Bit ON O Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLO name Local HMI Ww Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings Constant Addes Satya 90 360 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Action Mode Select the type of operation Select the type of operation performed at designated time at designated time At start time turn ON the innshichalenameee acai aeaa bit At end time turn OFF the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON l OFF Jo o 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 At start time the specific Write start value is written to the action address At end time Write end value is written to the action address Example Device address LW100 Start time 09 00 00 En
302. g the History File on the Historical Display objects as below illustration A a ne HUAN NUUNA NNN SUN n avs Natl i SAA AN ane ail nN SS 13 14 18 13 14 58 13 24 58 13 15 18 13 15 38 13 15 58 13 16 18 met j Type Alarm Event log is used to display Historical Event Display Data sampling is used to display Historical Trend Display or Data Display 376 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Item address mode Date Set the date format Data Sampling object Users have to select which Data sampling object is triggered when selecting Data sampling as Type Users should select the same data sampling object with the one selected in Historical Trend Display or Data Display LA Note 1 The system will automatically disable Mapping table when History Index mode is selected 2 When users select Drop Down List in Attribute and enable History Index mode the Option List displays in Error State When selecting Item address users have to correctly set the content of Control address and Item address Control address Address Set 1 to the data of the designated register of this address for updating items displayed in Option List using the content of designated register of Item address After updating the data in this register will restore to 0 Address 1 The next address of the designated Control address data in this address is for set
303. gCompare str1 start string2 ret StringCompare string1 string2 Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and char array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false The ret field is optional macro_command main char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret1 ret1 StringCompare a1 0 b1 0 ret1 false char a2 20 abcde char b2 20 abcde 495 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual bool ret2 ret2 StringCompare a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg bool ret3 ret3 StringCompare a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false end macro_command Name StringCompareNoCase Description ret StringCompareNoCase str1 start str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase string1 str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase str1 start string2 ret StringCompareNoCase string1 string2 Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and char array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false The ret field is optional
304. gh Ethernet 53 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Stare Wit Step 1 Enable VNC server and set the password in HMI Step 2 Install Java IE or VNC viewer in PC After installing Java IE enter HMI IP The following takes hitp 192 168 1 28 as an example 54 Ly WE NTEK i M VNC viewer for Java Microsoft Internet Explorer lolx BATF ARBRE WA BAREA TAT BH ae O O WEG Pus k O LRA FAUD g http 192 168 1 28 he E 2 Links REAL FHC Viewer Connechon Details E Seles Encryption Not supported About Options OK Cancel 7 YNE Viewer Free Edition 4 1 Copyright 0 2002 2004 Rea ME Ltd See http Jw reaknc com for information on YMC For VNC viewer enter HMI IP address and password FHC iewer Connection Details El ME Cerner 192 168 1 2b Encryption Not supported ABOUT Options OK Cancel FHC Authentication Ho Encryption H E 5j Eg Password 55 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FHC vwar Bar Jeri Mino Tatere Eqpiores Qr Mielo Ej ke iE a REAL A C weinTeK MT80001T C WEES Wiese Frea Egin i Trek i Communicatinn Beacomeas Easy Note 1 One HMI allows only one user to log in VNC server at one time 2 If users leave VNC server unused for one hour HMI system will log out automatically i HMI name
305. gs are listed as below LB 9065 disable enable COM 1 broadcast station no LB 9066 disable enable COM 2 broadcast station no LB 9067 disable enable COM 3 broadcast station no LW 9565 COM 1 broadcast station no LW 9566 COM 2 broadcast station no LW 9567 COM 3 broadcast station no 143 LWL Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 10 Security Security of objects in EB8000 includes two parts 1 User password and corresponding operable classes 2 Security settings of every single object 10 1 Settings of Password and Classes Go to Edit System Parameter Settings Security to set user password and operable classes of objects There are seven security levels classified from A to F and includes none Password should be digits from 0 to 9 and up to 12 sets of user password are available ay stem Parameter Sets Font Extended Memory Printen Backup SEIVEI Device Model General System Setting BecuLity select operatable classes for each user User 1 7 Enable Paswork 111 Ha Oe Mic CD ME OF User 2 7 Enable Peword 0 Ma Me Oc Op Oe OF User 3 F Enable Password 0 Aa MB ME OD OF OF User 4 Enable User 5 a Enable User 6 Once password is entered the objects that the user can adjust are set here For example when the security class of User 1 is set as above only objects with class A C E and none can the user adjust 144 4 WE NTEK EasyBuil
306. gt User name amp Password Set the user name and password to restrict that only authorized HMI can send requests to EasyPrinter Naming Convention for HMI Folder EasyPrinter creates different folders to store files e g hardcopy bitmap files backup files from different HMI There are two ways to name the folders a Use IP address EasyPrinter names the folder after the IP address of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix IP address Please see the following illustration 660 Ly t WE INTERK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pas 192 168 1 26 Ethemet m7 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 b Use HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder after the name of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix HMI name e Properties gt Minimize to system tray Select this option to minimize EasyPrinter to system tray instead of task bar Users can double click the icon in system tray to restore the EasyPrinter window e Properties gt Detailed message Select this option to display more detailed messages about events in the message window MT amp xxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output F T Print out to hp LaserJet 3360 PCL 5 Backup iV Save to files in e Output EasyPrinter provides two modes to output hardcopy results Print Out and Save to File a Print Out Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to print out the hardcopy result with specified printers
307. har array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than O to 9 a to f or A to F it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 0x3c int result bool success success1 StringHexAsc2Bin src1 0 result success1 true result1 is 3c short result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 1a2b3c4ad result2 success2 true result2 3c4d The result exceeds the data range of result2 char src3 2 4g char result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result3 success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 Il a to f or A to F end macro_command Name StringBin2HexAsc success StringBin2HexAsc source destination start 491 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description This function converts binary data to a hexadecimal string It converts the binary data in source parameter into a hexadecimal string and stores it in the destination buffer Source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean in
308. hat is different from any input object with Touch as Mode Keyboard e Select Use a popup keypad Specify the pop up position for the keyboard window The system displays the keyboard window on inputting data and closes it on end e Unselect Use a popup keypad The system does not automatically display keyboard window Users have to complete the input process via following methods a Design a custom keypad and place it in the same window with the input object b Use an external keyboard e Hide title bar Keypads without title bar can be selected for Numeric Input ASCII Input object e Restart the keypad if input value is out of range For Input Value object re input can be automatically requested when input error occurs 215 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual e When selecting Bit control as Mode the system will automatically unselect Use a popup keypad in Keyboard The picture below shows the Numeric Format tab included in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object which is to set the data display format Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Displays Data format 16 bit Insigned w Mask Number of dizit Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt scaling option Do conversion Engineering low Engineering high 9999 Limit Direct Dynamit limits PL
309. he content from Monitor 379 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address is detected the object compares the content with these values and selects the first matched item If no item is matched the status goes to error state and signals the notification bit register if requested For writing The system writes this value to Monitor address when user selects an item Item data Users can assign data for each item The option list object displays the data of all items in the list for users to review and select Error state a For example item 8 is the error state when specifying 8 in Item no Similarly if you set Item no to 11 then state 11 would be the error state and so on On error state the listbox style option list removes the highlight to represent no item is selected and the drop down list displays the data of error state c The item of error state is only applied to the drop down list style The listbox style list has nothing to do with this item Set default Set default values for all states i e set O for item O 1 for item 1 and so on Error Notification The system will set ON OFF to the specified bit register when error is detected The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a procedure for correcting the error 380 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 30 Timer Overview Use timer variables to enable timer instructions Timer vari
310. he current base window when the operation is activated Window no from register Print the window designated by a PLC device when the operation is activated if LWO 14 the window no 14 will be printed out Designate window no Select a base window to be printed out when the operation is activated 351 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 The system performs a background printing process when the printed window is not the current base window 2 For a window designed to be printed at background users should put neither direct window nor indirect window in it 352 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 28 Schedule Overview Schedule object is used to turn on off a bit or write a value to a word device at designated time The time schedule setting is very flexible it can be on daily basis or weekly basis For more advance application you can use a table a block of word devices to set start and terminate time then update the table at any scheduled time Configuration Click the Schedule icon on the toolbar and the Scheduler list dialogue box will appear press the New the schedule object dialogue box will appear as shown below Scheduler 353 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power OM startend action Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF O Word write Acton
311. he value is 218 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual displayed with pre defined color High limit When the value of the PLC s register is larger than High limit the value is displayed with pre defined color Blink When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit or larger than High limit the object will display data with Blinking The picture below shows the Font tab available in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object to set font font size color and aligning mode Numeric Input Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile A theabnute Font Cond sans Mis yt SIZE 13 Setting Description Attribute Color When the data is within high and low limit it will be displayed with this color Align There are three aligning modes Left Leading zero and Right The picture below shows the style of each mode 219 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Left 12 Leading zero 0012 Right 12 Size Set font size 220 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display Overview Both of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII Display object can display the value of the designated word devices in ASCII format The ASCII input object can also accept the data input from the keypad and change the value of the word devices Configura
312. he window mentioned will pop up when system displays project In case users may miss the very first image shown to press space key continuously since HMI power ON will ensure entering the system setting window Note The project and data in the HMI will all be removed once it is reset 44 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Dip Switch Touch screen calibration mode T i series FIN ide System Toolbar i X V2 series Boot loader mode H i i LF Enable front panel power switch X series if 2 8 4 4 2 2 System Toolbar After rebooting HMI users can set the system with System Toolbar at the bottom of the screen Normally this bar is hidden automatically Only by touching the target at the right bottom corner of screen will the System Toolbar pops up 45 4 2 2 1 Large Keyboard Use large keyboard to input text information Virtual Keyboard p F1 F2 Fa Fa Fs Fe F Fe Fo Ftojras rt2 Backspace EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 2 2 2 Small Keyboard Use small keyboard to input numerical information Virtual Keyboard Mura Lock j F J Home Up Fglp 4 5 Left Right 1 2 3 End Down Polini 0 4 2 2 3 System Information Network Display Network information including HMI IP address and related information system information Default HMI Network Version IP Address 192 168 1 40 Net Mask 2599 299 299 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 Version Display inform
313. here N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 18 bytes long but can be up to 410 bytes long Byte Bytes Byte Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byt Byte 1 2 3 S S 10 12 15 16 19 20 L 7 e L 1 L 4 5 6 9 11 L 2 STX Statio WD Addr No of Data Data Data 3 Data ETX Chec n Items 1 2 Data N 1 N k su m 715 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to write 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to write to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of addresses to write Must be 2 bytes long Bytes 12 L 3 The data to write Up to 99 items each with four Hex digits Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum Example Write 3 words starting from address LW201 to the HMI at station 17 11H This will write to addresses LW201 LW202 and LW203 LW201 101 0x65 LW202 575 0x23F LW203 1049 0x419 Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes 6 9 Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Bytes 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 25 26 The checksum bytes 25 and 26 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 24 31 31 57 44 30 32 30 31 30 33 30 30 36 35 30 32 33 46 30 34 31 39 03 49A The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 9A 32 4 2 2 Reply
314. hernet set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 10700 PLC 6 status ethernet set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 11000 PLC 7 status ethernet set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 11300 PLC 8 status ethernet set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 11600 PLC 9 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11900 PLC 10 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 11901 PLC 11 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 11902 PLC 12 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 11903 PLC 13 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 11904 PLC 14 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W 606 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LB 11905 PLC 15 status ethernet set on to retry R W R W R W connection LB 11906 PLC 16 status ethernet set on to retry connection LW 9600 16bit PLC 4 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9601 16bit PLC 4 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9602 16bit PLC 4 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9603 16bit PLC 4 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9604 16bit PLC 4 s port no LW 9605 16bit PLC 5 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9606 16bit PLC 5 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9607 16bit PLC 5 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9608 16bit PLC 5 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 I
315. his function is called by a statement that looks similar to this ret MyFunction 456 pressure where pressure must be integer according to the definition of function Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or variables to the function After this function is executed an integer values is return to ret Local variable Variables that are used in the function block must be declared first declaration This is in addition to passed parameters In the above example x and y are variables that the function can used Global variables are also available for use in function block Statements Statementstoexecue lt lt return value Optional Used to return a value to the calling statement The value can be a constant or a variable Return also ends function block execution A function block is not always necessary to return a value but when the return type is defined in the beginning of the definition of function the return command is needed endsub Must be used to end a function block 448 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 Build In Function Block EasyBuilder8000 has some build in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC data management and mathematical functions 18 6 1 Mathematical Functions Name SORT SQRT source result Description Calculate the square root of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be
316. his is the controlling statement The result of evaluating the variable is used as a test of comparison lt StartValue gt Required The initial value of Counter to down Required This determines if the lt step gt increments or decrements the lt Counter gt to increments lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt down decrements lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt lt EndValue gt Required The test point If the lt Counter gt is greater than this value the macro exits the loop step Optional Specifies that a lt StepValue gt other than one is to be used StepValue Optional The increment decrement step of lt Counter gt It can be omitted when the value is 1 If step lt StepValue gt are omitted the step value defaults to 1 Optional Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE for next loops may be nested met Require OO O Counter Optional This is used when nesting for next loops 443 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 4 5 2 while wend Statements The while wend construction is for stepping through an unknown number of iterations A variable is used to test for ending conditions When the condition is TRUE the statements are executed repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE The syntax is as follows while lt Condition gt Statements wend Example while a lt 10 a at 10 wend Syntax description while Must be used to begin the state
317. his list Show Object ID HMI Show the ID of objects in HMI as shown below 729 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ly WE NTEK Clear Activity List Clear all information in activity area Address Type All Device SIEMENS Si Local Hil Local H il SIEMENS S7300 Et Display EasyDiagnoser version information About EasyDiaznoser EasyDiagnaser Version 1 1 Uy Copyright 21 2006 Activity area In the activity area users can observe the communication between HMI and PLC 730 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Command Read Write v Device eo Address Type jo 22299 Ho cmd PID Device ot Index Address Length Time Error S b 1349 R 68 SIEMENS S7300 255 DBI 00000714 50 0 138 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 S14 20 0 137 R 0 Local Hhil LB O05 74 4 10 0 136 R BF SIEMENS S7300 1 255 MM 0000071 40 0 135 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 S14 20 0 134 R g Local H ll LB 00574 1 20 0 133 R 68 SIEMENS S7300 1 255 DBO 00000714 30 0 132 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 I 1 20 0 131 R g Local Hhil LB 00574 1 20 0 130 R BF SIEMENS 87 300 1 255 hl 000007 40 0 129 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 14 20 0 ws Item Description Command a Read Write Display Read and Write commands in activity area b Read Display only Read commands in activity area c Write Display only Write commands in activity area Device a A
318. iable Required The value of this variable will be compared to the value of each case Case else Optional It represents the default case If none of the cases above are matched the statements under default case will be executed Whena default case is absent it will skip directly to the end of the select case statements if there is no matched case Optional The statements under the matched case will be executed until the break command is reached If a break command is absent it simply keeps on executing next statement until the end command is reached end Select Indicates the end of the select case statements 18 4 5 Reiterative Statements Reiterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on condition There are two types of reiterative statements 18 4 5 1 for next Statements The for next construction is for stepping through a fixed number of iterations A variable is used as a counter to track progress and test for ending conditions Use this for fixed execution counts The syntax is as follows 442 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual for Counter lt StartValue gt to lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter for Counter lt StartValue gt down lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter Example fora 0 to 10 step 2 b a next a syntax description for Must be used to begin the statement Counter Required T
319. ialogue 129 Lid co WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pattern Style esii Sse _ a jj _ Duplicate these attributes to eve Duplicate all attributes of the curren How to set Shape Library ry state t state to other states Click Shape Library button the following dialog appears The currently selected shape is marked by a red frame Shape Library Library State O Y NMI 2 buttone 3 System Frame 4 System Button 2 System Lamp 6 System Pipe D Untitled States 3 Frame State O State 11 4 Untitled A Select Lib 7 1 Untitled g Delete all States All States states 3 Z Delete Cur State States 3 Frame Frame Rename 2 Green States 3 Frame l 5 Untitled EEE EHER PT TT States 3 Frame States 3 y Display Inner K Frame 130 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 Green States 3 Frame The illustration above provides information of one of the Shapes in the Shape Library as follows 2 Green The number and the name of the shape in the library States 3 The number of the states of the shape In this case it shows the Shape possesses three states Frame _ Indicates that the Shape is set with frame onl
320. ication parameters set ON agate Cii ammunication natane te et Oh disable HMI upload function twhen ON fi series onl CF free space insufficiency alarm when CN ISB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when OMJ USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON status of fle backup activity backup in process if backlight up set ON 16bit reserved free space size Mega bytes LB 9042 LE 9043 acknowledge all alarm events set ON unacknowledged events exist when OM disable remote control when OM R Sn45 memnar man communication fails when On Users can import MTS500 tag to represent the address Loca HMI Card SEL Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI E mall Ocal Ale Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI aral HMAT 696 fdas e a Bit Bit Bit LB 9029 LB 9050 LE 9031 LB 503 3 LE 9036 LB 9037 LE 9038 LB 9039 LE 9040 LE 9041 LE 9042 LB 9043 LB 9044 R AN45 Read Write Ready rite Ready yrite Read rite Re Read rite Ready yrite Read Write Read yrite Read Write Read Write Read rite Ready yrite Read Write Read rite Read Write 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 30 4 Project protection Project Key User s project can be restrained to be executed only on specific HMI for i series HMI only Please go to System Parameters Settings General Project protection
321. ice then the ETX and Checksum a Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Pe 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 L 7 Station Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data N 1 Byte Byte ETX Checksu ame The values in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 In the event of an error the reply is 718 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 4 RW Random Write 32 4 4 1 Request This command writes up to 99 independently addressed 16 bit items to LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 8 8 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 16 bytes long but can be up to 800 bytes long Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes STX Statio RW Addr Data Addr Data i ee PEPA Bytes Bytes Byte Byte L 10 L 7 L 6 L 3 L 2 L 1 L Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the first address to write data to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 13 This is the data to write to the address specified by the previous 4 bytes Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 14 L 3 The remaining addresses and data to write to the HMI Each address and data item must be 4 bytes long 719 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum calcula
322. ice Manager fishes esos tals RSLS Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM3 Properties ag F 7 General Port Settings Driver Detaile F Computer Hs Disk drives Display adapters Bits per second ERIT Sy Floppy disk controllers Data bits gt Floppy disk drives nue E IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Parity Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices stop bits Ports COM amp LPT YF Communications Port COM1 Flow control a Communications Pork COME Sid Weck tual el Por Come arcea Rete Beats ro a SA Processors ee A eer Cl mate cook le For example user changes virtual serial port from COM 3 to COM 9 Ports COM amp LPT vee ay Communications Port COMI vee Ei Communications Port COM a Printer Port LE _ SH Weintek virtual Serial Port COMB gt J Processors 683 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM3 Properties Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems Select higher settings for taster perhornance Recewe Buffer Low 1 Tranemit Butter Low 1 COM Fort Humber Select COM 9 and click OK the virtual serial port will be changed to COM 9 0 Mice and other pointing devices Ports COM amp LPT F Communications Pork COMI a Communications Port TOME F Printer Port LE ad Weintek Virtual Serial Pork COM
323. iect Window Object eneral Dessin O Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting A thibute etyle Wo title bar MA Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the word device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style To set the display style of the popup window There are two styles No title bar and With title bar a No title bar The popup window does not have title bar and its position is fix as predefined in configuration 227 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WINDOW 35 b With title bar The popup window contains title bar and its position can be dragged at online operation WINDOW 35 Example to use indirect window Here is a simple example to illustrate indirect window object The pictures show how to configure an indirect window and use the word device LW100 to change the popup window Read address PL name Local HMI Setting Set constant 35 to LWICO Set constant 36 to LM 100 Set constant 0 to LW 100 L 34 E 35 WINDOW_035 a 36 WINDOW 036 m 37 228 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Use the set word object SV_0O to set the value of LW100 as 35 and the location of indirect window will display window 35 WINDOW 33 Set c
324. ies Name MODBUS RTU OHMI PLc PLC type MODBUS RTU k WAL 90 MODBUS RTUL so PLC I F RS 495 ow v PLE default station na 1 COM COMI 9600 E 8 1 Settings COM Fort Settings COM Timeout sec 1 0 w Baud rate Turn around delay ms Data bits Send ACK delay fms o Parity Even J Parameter 1 Stop bits Parameter 2 Eoo o Parameter 3 Cancel Set and click OK a new device MODBUS RTU will be listed in the Device tab System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server kegi 2 In the setting page of each object there is a MODBUS RTU in the PLC name selection list you can then select appropriate device type and address 566 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PLE name MODBUS RTU w Setting Address Since the server is HMI the corresponding read and write address are as follows reading writing Ox 1x 1 9999 to reading writing LB O 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 1 9999 to reading writing LW 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 10000 75533 to reading writing RW 0 65533 567 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 19 2 Changing the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime Change the related reserved registers to modify the station number of a MODBUS ASCII server HMI LW 9541 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server COM 1 LW 9542 The station number of aMOD
325. igh byte While using the ASCII display object to display the string data stored in the registers data_count must be a multiple of 2 in order to display full string content For example macro_command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI LW 0 5 484 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command The ASCII display object shows abcd If data_count is an even number that is greater than or equal to the length of the string the content of string can be completely shown macro_command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI LW 0 6 end macro command macro command main char str1 10 abcde Il Send 3 words to LWO LW2 Data are being sent until the end of string is reached Even though the value of data_count is larger than the length of string the function will automatically stop StringSet str1 O Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command Name StringSetEx Description StringSetEx send_data start device_name device_type address_offset data_count Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send data device_name device_type address _ offset and data_count are the same as StringSet macro_command main char str1 20 abcde short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding 485 Ly WE
326. iler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Language 1 language 2 Language 3 Language 4 C Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Language ICNEBSOOOWS 40 eng font MTPL0 ttt Arial CUEBSOOO YS 40 engi font elTPi i ttt Times New Romani 0 error s O warnings 4 Object size 38544 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792988 bytes Shape size 878 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Total size 1184944 bytes 1 13h1 Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Compile i Build font files Users are allowed to select the languages needed for the project by clicking Language 1 to 8 34 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 3 Off line and On line Simulation There are two types of simulations On line simulation amp Off line simulation While using Off line simulation users don t need to connect PLC with PC but still see how PLC is operated via a virtual device On the contrary On line simulation is executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately set the communication parameters Note When doing On line simulation on PC if the target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is a 10 minutes simulation limit 3 3 1 Off line Simulation To execute click Off line Simulation 2 agam sE EA 71 5 EH After clicking
327. in the dialogue box as follows MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Backup files in Hardcopy DAM TSO00 When target file has existed Cyverucite it The content will be destroyed Convert Batch File Enable DAM TSO00 tonverticey def 4 In Output click the button to browse and select a path for storage of the incoming history files 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to store any incoming backup request in the location specified in step 4 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue appears 654 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Sethngs x Device Model Creneral ayete wetting mec Unity Font _ Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Use MT Remote Frinten Backup Server Note Use EagyPinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and stormg backup data Output sethings Orientation Horizontal Vertical Printer size Original size O Fit to printer margins aes 5 em Communication settings IF addres 192 168 1 26 7 in Communication settings fill in the IP address of printer server same as step 1 assign port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 11
328. indow tree users can also right click the assigned window from the window tree and choose Open to open it Similarly to close or to delete an existing window is same as the procedure above Please note that the window to be deleted has to be closed That is to say only a closed window can be deleted 101 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 7 Event Log Event log is used to define the content of an event and the conditions triggering it In EB8000 this triggered event also called alarm and its processing procedure can be saved to designated places such as HMI memory storage or external memory device The saved file is with a name in a format as EL yyyymmdd evt In this name yyyymmdd records the time that this file is built and will be set automatically by the system Take file name EL_20100524 evt as an example this shows that this created file records the event occurred on 24 of May 2010 EB8000 also provides the following system address tags to manage the event log Address Description LB 9024 refresh event log information on HMI memory set ON 9060 906 9460 cw 9462 LW 9453 16bit time tag of event log day 102 Nols ce NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9454 LW 9455 LW 10480 LW 10481 LW 10483 LW 10484 LW 10486 LW 10487 103 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 1 Event Log Management With objects like Alarm Bar Alarm Display and
329. ine OF F Line simulation is displayed on the screen 669 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Motor 1 Wie Wai ar en 02 17 11 Line ais Prev page re Easy View 670 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Multi HMI intercommunication means that HMI uses COM port to connect with a remote HMI and read write data from to PLC connected to remote HMI as below PLC Above shows the PLC is connected with HMI 1 and HMI 1 is connected with HMI 2 via COM port so that HMI 2 can control the PLC through HMI 1 An example describes how to use EB8000 to create projects used on HMI 1 and HMI 2 671 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI The following is the project content of HMI 1 in System Parameter Settings Device aystem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Frinten Backup berver Device Model lI General eyetem pettine DECUIT Device hst Mame Location Device type Interface fF Pro Local HMI Local HMI Local MT6070iH MTS07T0 Disable Wid Local FLE 1 FATEE FB Serres Local FATEE FB eries COM1 9600 E 7 1 E232 Master Slave Se COM2 115200 E 8 1 RS232 1 Due to COM 1 of HMI 1 connects PLC the device list must include Local PLC 1 in thi
330. ing the visual effect of an object For setting these please go to Shape tab in the dialog for adding new object to set up Shape Library and Picture Library Hew Hit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Ps TueDe Shape Library Inner N Frame l Interior pattem Patter Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Picture 7 Use pictur Picture gt Red BMP 33502 Backerovnd 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library Shape Library 128 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Users can tick Use shape to enable this setting and select the shape from the library Inner Tick Inner to enable this setting and select a color for inner part of the shape Click drop down button to open the Color dialogue to choose a color from the list or customize their own color and click Add to Custom Colors for system to remember this color Basic colors Hue 160 Red o Sak 240 Green o ColorSold Lum 120 Blue 255 ES AaB Add to Custom Colors Frame Tick Frame to enable this setting and select a color for the frame of the shape The way of setting is same as above Interior Pattern Click to select the style of the interior pattern of the shape The color of this pattern can also be set Pattern Style Click Pattern Style button to open the d
331. ion Data ampline Object index oo M Tend be Note if no of channels is changed you must reset HMI s data logs Distance between data samples 8 Pixel O Time Disen 100 wel Hold control Enable PLC name se Setting Address Watch line PLC name E Setting Address Cancel Setting Description Data To select data sampling object as the source of data Refer to the data Sampling sampling section for related information Object index Trend mode To select the mode of data source There are Real time and History for selection a Real time In this mode it can display the sampling data from the beginning of the MT8000 operation to the present time If previous data are required you must select the History mode to read the data from historical record You can use the Hold control object to pause the update of trend 263 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual display but it is only pause the update of the trend display and it will not stop the operation of data sampling object The picture below shows the Hold control setting page Set the state of the designated register to ON it will pause the updating of the trend display Hold control Enable FLE name Local HMI w Setting b History In this mode the data come from the historical record of the designated data sampling object in Dat
332. is is the same as the one in X axis w scaling Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving 239 INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Display ratio Limit address Distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 f X axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as X axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse g Y axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as Y axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse The size of shape in different states can be set individually as shown in the picture below Ratio Ratio Ratio 14 Ratio 16 State 2 State 3 The object s moving range can be set not only by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y but also by the designated registers Supposed that the objects moving range is set by the value of the designated register Address then the address of Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y are listed in the following table Data format Min X Max X Min Y Max Y P gt ia eo Lo 240 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 14 Animation Overview The Animation object is used to place an object on the screen at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the screen depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically the fi
333. is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 year month and day can be constant or variable index and return value must be variable The return_ value field is optional macro_command main short year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists an event log file named EL_20101210 evt with index 2 the result after execution success 1 index success FindEventLogIndex year month day index end macro command 514 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 515 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 7 How to Create and Execute a Macro 18 7 1 How to Create a Macro Macro programming can be divided into some steps as follows Step 1 Click on Macro Manager icon on the tool bar of EasyBuilder 8000 to open Macro Manager dialogue box as follows SB Aajo 2 3 4 9 BHH TT I T E Macro Manager OnAutoStart OnChangeBrent OnChangeDubai OnChangeWTI1 OnInt 516 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual On Macro Manager all macros compiled successfully are displayed in Macro list and all macros in developing are displayed in Macro under development The following is a description of the various buttons New Opens a blank WorkSpace editor for creating a new macro Delete Deletes the selected macro Edit Opens the WorkSpace editor and loads the selected macro Copy
334. istorical data log use Data Sampling object index to select the right one as shown below 325 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Backup Object General Security Shape Label bwi O O SOVICE OEW OEW A Historical event log Historical data log Data ampling object index 1 Backup position Backup Select the destination where the source files will be copied to Position a USB1 or USB2 or SD card The external device connected to HMI b Remote printer backup server To select this users have to enable MT remote printer backup server from Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters gt Printer Backup Server Save format User can select the desired format to back up the file a MT8000 Event Log File evt MT8000 Data Log File dtl b Comma Separated Values csv gt Event Log saved as csv file nave format gt Data Log saved as csv file nave format Format eS Data Log Fil Chae When back up event log in csv format users can find data fields in EXCEL as below 326 LW WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Microsoft Excel EL 20101029 xls 2 BRO RE WAW AD A0 IA Dial Creation time Fri Oct 24 10 59 25 2010 Data fields category time message 0111 19 42 Emergency DATIS 4 prO 0111 19 46 LO art flee p beh ad g 0111 19 54 Word 0 11 19 52 Word 0 gt event is triggered 1
335. ited Suppose PC is going to communicate with two HMI HMI A and HMI B the procedure for setting PC s MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of the two HMI Refer to the related chapter for details Suppose that the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set as 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Run the project of PC in EB8000 under Device tab in System Parameter Settings menu add the IP address and Port number of HMI A and HMI B as below a Foto Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list Mame Location Device toe Interface Il Local HMI Local HMI Local M T6OTOHMTS070 Disable N MI 1 Remote TF 192 169 1 2 Port 8000 MTE Name Mr a HMI PLC Location Remote Settings _ P 192 168 1 1 Port 8000 577 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 3 Select correct PLC for PLC name In General tab of Set Bit Object s Attributes If LB of HMI A is to be controlled HMI A must be selected as below set Bit Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile Oo Dwa Write addres PLE name HMI A wt Setting Write after button is released A thabnute Step 4 Use HMI MTP projects on PC and perform simulation either online mode or offline mode all data of HMIA and B can be
336. ited by the minimum and maximum limit 284 LWL re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Block Display Objects Properties General Display Area Shape Profile Data maples pamples to scroll 10 Enable scroll swatch Profile color Transparent Frame Backeround Color Horiz 5 divisionis Verti divisioni Channel Channel 0 v Fen property Color 2 am Cancel Setting Description Data Set the data samples samples to scroll frame and color of background samples Data samples SO Samples to scroll 10 Enable scroll ewacth Profile color Transparent Frame Backeround 285 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Enable Grid Disable Grid Channel Set the color and width of each trend curve Channel Channel 0 Pen property Color gt Width 1 A j 287 iJ WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual On line operation How to show a trend curve a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display NOTE data block start from control word address 2 c Write 1 to Control word address the previous trend curve remains and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve di
337. ition 119 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling Click New and the Data Sampling Object setting dialog appears as below Data Sampling Object Description i PLO name Local HMI Sampling mode Clear address Time based C Trigger based Enable Sampling time interval li second s PLC name Address Read address Hold address PLE name Local HMI 4 Setting 7 Enable Address L PLE name Address f E Data Record Max data records 1000 Auto stop History Files Data Format Data length 0 word s Save to HMI memory Save to SD card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Folder name Preservation limit Days of preservation 7 day s Sampling mode EB8000 provides two methods of data sampling Time based and Trigger based lf Time based mode is selected EB8000 samples the data in a fixed frequency Users have to set the sampling time interval maple mode Time based Tizzerbased pamplng tme internal 1 second s w If Trigger based mode is selected users can use the status of specific address to trigger the data sampling Sampling mode Time based Trigger based Mode OFF gt 0N v PLE name Local HMI Setting 120 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Mode Conditions to trigger the data sampling OFF ON This will trigger data sampling when the status of
338. ition 2 and position 3 and Backward cycle is not selected In this case when the 243 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual object moves to the last position position 3 next position will be back to the initial position O and repeat the action over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 0 position 1 position 2 lf Backward cycle is selected when the object moves to the last position position 3 it will move backwards to the initial position 0 and repeat the moving mode over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 2 position 1 position 0 Image state change State change mode There are Position dependant and Time based options When Position dependant is selected it means that following the change of position the state will change too When Time based is selected it means that the position will change based on Position speed and shape state will change based on Image update time Time interval attributes Position speed 4 O1 second s Backward cycle The following dialog shows size setup of animation object Call up the animation object dialogue box by double clicking 244 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Animation Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Po
339. ject Protection The copyright of program design must be protected EB8000 supports protection function of project file to ensure users design achievement 30 1 XOB password After project MTP is completed users can compile the file to XOB format that can be downloaded to HMI Users can set password to protect the XOB file in Compiling window A password must be input if users want to decompile the XOB file to MTP XOB password range 0 4294901 760 nr Ix Project name C Documents and Settings Nicolas A MTPLonotp XOB file name C Documents and Settings Nicolas MTP 1 xob ZOB password used in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI shGguage pe ae Password Eg Password pitti irange 0 4294901760 C Documents and Settings Nicolas A C Documents and Settings Nicolas 3 0 error s O warningis Object size 56204 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792988 bytes Shape size 842 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Total size 1200966 bytes 1 15 succeeded Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects euid font fles 694 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 30 2 Decompilation is prohibited If this box is ticked the system will automatically deny XOB password Furthermore the XOB file can t be decompiled to MTP file Compiling fx Project name C Docum
340. ject will use the value of Zero and Span and the value of register to calculate the pointer s indication position For example supposed that Zero 0 Span 100 when the value of register is 30 and Start degree 0 End degree 360 then the degree indicated by pointer is 30 Zero Span Zero End degree Start degree 30 0 100 0 360 0 108 Pointer will indicate the position of 108 degrees See the picture below 259 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Range limit To set the value of low and high limit the display color width of the sign of low high limit Below illustration use above setting to display the range mark 30 aad o N user defined radius Use user defined radius Enable Low ummm Mid High oy wia 0 o e Use user defined radius 30 Dynamic When Dynamic limits is not selected the low limit and high limit are fixed Limits value which directly comes from the settings See the example below the uncheck low limit is 30 and high limit is 60 _ Dynamit limits Low limit igh imi 260 L WE NTEK Dynamic Limits check Scale label EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When Dynamic limits is selected the low limit and high limit are decided by the register Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for Dynamic limits
341. l HMI y Device ype i Li wt Address format CODDD range 0 10500 Index Mesa e Index register The settings of read address of Object B PLE name Local HMI w Device type i LW 9203 16bit address index 3 ka Address format CODDD range 0 10500 The settings of read address of Object C PLC name Local HMI y Device type Li k ddress Format DODDD range 0 10500 Index register Now if users change value of Index 3 to 20 the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 will become those of LW120 and LW121 i e the values in LW100 20 LW120 and LW101 20 LW121 158 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Object A LW 100 Index 3 Object B Index 3 Similarly the index register can also work with bit address 1 word 16 bits in other words 1 value change of index register means the change of 16 bits See the example below When INDEX 5 is set as 0 the state of Bit Lamp LBO and LB6 are the same as those of Toggle Switch LB0 Index 5 and LB6 Index 5 and are displayed ON Object A LB O Index 5 LB 6 Index 5 Object B fo Index 5 159 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual lf users change value of index 5 to 1 the state of Bit Lamp LB16 and LB22 are the same as those of Toggle Switch LBO Index 5 and LB6 Index 5 and are displayed ON Object A LB O Index 5 LB
342. lay Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Meter Display Object will be created See the picture below The picture below shows the General tab in the Meter Display Object s Properties dialogue box 254 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Cutline I Limits l Ahape Read address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word devices that controls the display of meter Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 255 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limits Shape De eree ntact degree Backerournd Backeround Full circle Tick marks Enable Color a Coordinate Main scale sb B Length Pointer mse Pin point Radius Inner Circle Rectangle In the above dialogue box users can set the meter display object s outline Refer to the picture below for the names of each part of the meter Range mark Tick mark Corrdinate Fointer Pin point 256 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Degree set the object s start degree and end degree
343. le Users can use either way or both ways e Since EasyPrinter is running on MS Windows system it supports most of the printers available in the market e Multiple MT8000 HMI can share one printer via EasyPrinter Users don t have to prepare printers for each MT8000 HMI Additionally EasyPrinter can also be a backup server Users can use backup objects in MT8000 HMI to copy history files such as Data Sampling and Event Log histories onto a remote PC via T a Ethernet Please see the following illustration CSV Files MT8000 ia MT Remote N gt dtl Backup Server evt rep 648 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server _ Screen ge Hardcopy 1 _ Ethernet MT8000 MT Remote Print Out Printer Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object The hardcopies will be transferred to the MT Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu Options select Settings and the following dialogue appears 649 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General GEIVEI Hardcopy Port number of the server socket S005 User name Max length 12 characters admin Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Backup Namung Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP addres Use HMI name fasien HMI n
344. ling Setting Description O HMI IP Assign the IP address of HMI Firmware Check Firmware to update all of the kernel programs of HMI 37 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note It is necessary when downloading file to HMI the first time Download the font used in project to HMI Checking these the selected files will be erased before downloading Automatically using current If this is checked system will download project settings to download after to HMI according to last settings compiling x Automatically Using Current Settings to Download after Compiling 1 Firstly please go to Option Function Properties then tick Automatic save and compile when download and simulate jer8000 MIP12 mip 10 WINDOW 010 ETR Ww Alea E m Automatic save and compile when download and simulate 2 Secondly in Download dialogue box tick Automatically using current settings to download after compiling to enable this function re derG000 MIP12 mip 10 WINDOW _010 Ce 682 Sew w Zl Ree 2G 4 fi B OA mihi r E me EB File Edit View Option Dew Objects Lituay Tools 4 38 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click Download to start downloading the project Another way to download project to HMI is to set a HMI name Before using this function please input the HMI Name in the System settings window in HMI as shown below After setting the HMI
345. ll Display information of Local HMI and PLC It depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area b Local HMI Display information of Local HMI it depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI will be 731 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area c PLC Display information of PLC it depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area Select specific Station for display on the screen This function will be disabled when selecting All in Device Users can select all or a part of address types to be displa
346. log as EasyBuilder 8000 exe 122 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Save to HMI memory Save the data sampling in MT8000 HMI Caution The data can only be saved when its size reaches 4kb otherwise users need to use LB 9034 to force storing this data Save to SD card save the data sampling in SD card Save to USB 1 Save the data sampling in USB disk no 1 Numbering rule of USB disk is the disk inserted to the USB interface in the first place is numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last is numbered 3 It is not related to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the data sampling to USB disk no 2 Folder name Set the file name of the data sampling A folder name must be composed entirely of ASCII characters Preservation limit This setting determines how many days the data to be preserved For example the preservation time is set two days which means USB 1 will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday Data that is not built in this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out If today were July 1 the USB 1 will keep the data of June 30 and June 29 in the memory but the data of June 28 will be deleted History files ave to HWI menec Sae to CF cand v Save to USB 1 Ese to USB 2 Ka v Preservation lirit Ders of preservation ol days 123 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 9 Object General Prope
347. ly Time Scale To enable the time scale on the bottom of trend display Format To select time scale as HH MM or HH MM SS Font To select font style Size To select font size Recommend use font size 8 ft E a Saas PARAL AT Pe er TT KATE yt ft HH baht HHA baht HH hh HH fh HH ih HH hh 269 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The picture below shows the attribute of channel tab Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Data sampling object Channel Display Description Data type 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit BCD 16 bit BCD 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Float 32 bit Float Channel Fen property Color PLC name Cancel Setting Description Channel Set each sampling line s format and color and the display data s low limit and high limit The max channel can up to 20 channels Limit uncheck Zero Span Dynamic Zero and Span are used to set the low limit and high limit of sampling data So if the low limit is 50 and high limit is 100 for one limits 270 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual sampling line then Zero and Span must be set as 50 and 100 so all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display object Limit check When Dynamic Limits is selected the low limit and high limit are Dynamic derived from the designated word device The
348. ly use macro_id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will continue executing the following instructions after triggering the designated macro in other words the two macros will be active simultaneously macro_id can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char ON 1 OFF 0 setData ON Local HMI LB O 1 ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO 5 call a macro its ID is 5 setData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 508 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command TRACE Syntax TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is described as below flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed type Corc specifies a single byte character d
349. ly avoids inputting addresses repeatedly but also expresses the function of an address more clearly Click Address Tag Library Manager in toolbar to call up the Address Tag Library dialogue as below al S A Address Tag Librars Manager Address Tag Library Customized System No Address tag name PLC name 1 Tag Local HMI e bagel Local HMI Word L Users can import MT 500 tag to represent the address Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSW Import CSW Export EXCEL Import EXCEL Setting Description S New Adda new Address Tag Settings Mody the selected Tag Export CSV Export current Address Tag Library to the appointed space in CSV format 414 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Import CSV Import the saved CSV file of Address Tag Library to current project Export EXCEL Export current address tag library to the appointed space in XLS format Import EXCEL Import the saved XLS file of address tag library to current project The picture below shows system reserved registers Address Tag Library Customized System Wo Address tag name PLC name Address type Addres A TL LB SO00 initigiized as e Coat Mi Bi 8 000 l 2 LB S001 initialized as ON Local Hl Bit LB S001 3 LE 5002 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB S00 4 LB 9003 i
350. mat 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD depends on the format of Write address Attribute Set Style Write constant value eet value oO b Increment value JOG Increase value function When the operation is activated the Inc value will be added to the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value Upper limit A thaibute 10 Ine value Upper limit dl c Decrement Value JOG Decrease value function When the operation is activated the Dec value will be subtracted from the value of the word device and the result won t go less than the value Bottom limit Athibute Set Style Decrement value JOG Dec value 1 Bottom limit 10 d Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold increment function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be added by the value set in Inc value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit 186 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Set Style Press and hold increment OG 4 Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 JOG delay 1 Osecond v JOG speed 05 seconds e Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold decrement function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay
351. ment Required This is the controlling statement When it is TRUE the loop begins execution When it is FALSE the loop terminates return value Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE wend Indicates the end of the while end statements 18 4 5 3 Other Control Commands Used in for next and while wend It skips immediately to the end of the reiterative statement Used in for next and while wend It ends the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one The return command inside the main block can force the macro to stop wr inyana tate mnadai otwendote manne a 444 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 445 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 5 Function Blocks Function blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes It must be defined before use and supports any variable and statement type A function block is called by putting its name followed by parameters in parenthesis in the Main Macro Function After the function block is executed it returns the value to the Main Function where it is used as an assignment or condition A return type is not necessary in definition of function which means that a function block is not always necessary to return a value The parameters can also be absent in definition of function while the function has no need to take any parameters from the Main Function The syntax is as follows Definition of function with return type sub type
352. mple set Record time Before and After to 5 seconds when Capture address changes from OFF to ON system will be triggered to capture one image each second from 5 seconds before the triggering time to 5 seconds after the triggering time Note 1 Video In Object can only be used in MT8000X which supports VIP function 2 Only video image in one channel can be input at any moment while running system 3 Capture function won t be influenced by pause playing The video image that should be played while not paused will still be captured 4 Recommended Format and Resolution o pa o NTSC 720x480 360 x 240 PAL 720x 5 6 360 x 288 This function only supports NTSC and PAL format 388 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 32 System Message Use this utility to edit messages that displays in popup message boxes System Message Confirmation required Message Please confirm the operation OK Ok Cancel Cancel Font Arial Deny write command Message The system is being prohibited trom writing device registers Font rial Allow wirite cormmnand Message The system is now allowed to write device registers Font Atrial Setting Description Confirmation Display whenever security requires the user to confirm operation required The Message shown on confirmation dialogue and the text label of the 2 buttons OK and Cancel can all be set Please u
353. n Download Settings dialog and then press OK After that Pick a Directory dialog will appear Please select directory usbdisk device 0 123 and then press OK Project will be automatically updated Note Even if users only download historical files it is still necessary to reboot HMI manually 21 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 3 Transfer 2 3 1 Download Download source files to HMI through Ethernet or USB cable Press Download and the dialog displays as below Download W Project ClDocuments and SettingsiNicolasi456 xo0b Browse BW PLEASE INPUT RECIFE FILE NAME RWLA PLEASE INPUT RECIPE 1 FILE NAME Browse Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME Browse Cl Install series media playver drivers Startup screen CiDocuments and Settings Wicolasicheer_ brmp Browse i series only 05 image must be 20090415 of later Connection Ethernet O USB cable fl series only H Reboot HMI after download Reset recipe Reset event log Ll Reset data log Setting Description Check this to update all of the kernel programs of HMI It is necessary when the latest EB8000 version is downloaded the first time To assign the desired specific path for Data log Firmware 22 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Install X series media player It is necessary when EB8000 is drivers downloaded to X series the first time Startup Screen If this box
354. n Printer Operating System Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 10 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro 1 Installing EasyBuilder Pro Put the EasyBuilder Pro Installation CD into the CD drive The computer will run the program automatically and bring up a screen showing an area to click to begin the EasyBuilder Pro installation If the auto run sequence does not start browse the CD and find the root directory of Autorun exe manually The installation screen is shown below Lbwenrex EasyBuilder8000 Install a Document Library Drivers Pre ject www weintekcom 2 Click Install users will see the window below select the language and click Next following the installation instructions Select Setup Language Select the language to use during the installation Italian Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korea 1 11 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 34 Welcome to the EasyBuilder8000 4 34 Setup Wizard This will install EBBOOOY434 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel bo exit Setup 3 Users will be asked if they would like to remove the old versions of EasyBuilder Pro Please tick those should be removed and click Next to continue E Setup Eas
355. n extended memory 88 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 8 Printer Backup Server Parameters in Printer Backup Server tab are for setting up MT remote printer oystem Parameter Sethngs Ed Device Model Creneval a yeten bettin g mecurity Font Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Use MT Remote FrntenBackup server Note Use EasyPinter to configure PL for printing screen hardcopy and stormg backup data Output sethings Orientation G Horizontal Vertical Printer size Ge Original size Fit to printer margins nee o elm na a Og mm mm Communication sethngs IF addres 127 0 0 1 Port 6005 User name 111111 Password 111111 Setting Description Output settings Orientation Set how will words or pictures be printed out horizontal or vertical Printer size Set to print out in original size or to fit the set printer margins Margin set the top bottom right and left margin width Communication IP address settings Assign the IP address of a remote printer via network 89 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Port User name Password Assign the access information Port can be set from 1 to 65535 Maximum length of user name or password is 12 characters Please refer Chapter 26 Easy Printer for more information 90 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 6 Window Oper
356. n the project of HMI A in EB8000 under Device tab in System Parameter Settings menu add the IP address and Port number of HMI B as below oystem Parameter Sethngs Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Model General System Setting Security Device list Mame Location Local HMI Local MT60561 Disable N A Wiha HMIB Remote IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 MTSsoc TCP 575 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties Mame HMB HMI OPLE Location Settings IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 IF Address Settings IP address 192 168 Port no 8000 Step 3 Select HMI B for PLC name of New Set Bit Object dialogue and now HMI A can operate the content of the LB of HMI B Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shane Label Dewi O Write addres PLE name HMI E Ww Setting Write after button is released A thibute 576 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 21 2 PC to HMI Communication Ji 4 Ethernet i Deskigg Oc SLM With Simulation Function of EB8000 PC can catch data of HMI through Ethernet network and save the data files in computer PC can master HMI by operating the system reserved register LB and LW of HMI On the contrary HMI can also directly control operation of PC for example asking PC to save data from HMI or PLC The number of HMI mastered by PC is unlim
357. name since it is for user s document only 172 Read address EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the bit lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLE name s Local Device type i Address Do Syvstern tag Address Format DODD range 0 11999 Index register Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Blinking Set blinking attribute of bit lamp Blinking mode a None No blinking b Alternating image on state 0 Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is OFF state 0 c Alternating image on state 1 Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is ON state 1 d Blinking on state 0 Display the shape of state 0 in blinking when the bit value is OFF state 0 e Blinking on state 1 Display the shape of state 1 in blinking when the bit value is ON state 1 173 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 2 Word Lamp Overview A Word Lamp object displays the corresponding shape according to the value in the designated word address up to maximum of 256 states Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Numeric Display LWO
358. nd Classes ccc cccc cece eecceeece cece eeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseesseesaees 144 TOZ ECUN Ol QDI COIS ereere a E EE E EE E E EE RE ETE 146 10 3 Examples of SECUN serere ee eee 150 Chapter 11 Index Register cccecccecceecceeeceeeeeeceeeseeeceeeceeesaeeeeeseeeceeeeaeeseeeseeseueseeesaeees 155 T WMO GUC HON ssas E EE E E E RS 155 11 2 Examples of Index ReGISter cccccccceccceeceseceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseesseeeaues 156 Chapter 12 Keyboard Design and Usage ccc ccccceccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeseeeeaeees 161 12 1 Steps to Design a POP UP Keypad cccccecceecceeceeeeeeceeeeeecseteeeseeteeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 161 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct WINdOW cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 165 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard cccccccccceecceeeceeeceeeeeeceeeseeeceeeseeeseesseesaees 168 12 4 Creating UNICODE Keyboard c cc cccccccccsecc eee eeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseesseeeaess 169 i gfe 6 2 aad Reg 9 2 6 enn ene E E eee ee eee ee 171 FPS Fad BUEN enn E ERN R R ER ERER RAN ee 171 52 0 V OFC E D r E A E E E E E E E E E E E E EE E E E E 174 eRe Eo ei a E E ee 179 A CU WNO a E E E E E EE E EEE 183 MOO UNCON KOVY vesen2ccdduesaedducdaaedicadsacdeuccsar diac dacedbundancdoaedenedbacdensduesoacdiesdasedencsssediucts 191 WOOO IS WN a E E 198 OAE EEEE a nn ee ee ee 201 To dE eenn a a a E E E E E E E E E 205 13 9 Numeric
359. nected with HMI The error code is 12 since PLC No Response message window is shown W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiaznoser Command Read Write Device SIEMENS 57300 Ethernet Station jo Cm PID Device St lndex Address Length Time Error s 64 SIEMENS 57 300 Et 11 L810 00003 3 ri SIEMENS 57 300 Et 12 L810 00006 SS T SIEMENS 57 300 Et 255 DBO 00009 5 736 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 33 4 Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel WY Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Cphons Help Ls Ge eS wave AS Device SIEMENS 87 300 Ethernet L atin Wye Range 0 Mo Cmd FIL Device ot Index Address Lengtt 176 R Ha SIEMENS 57 300 Et 1 10 L610 00000 3 175 R 64 SIEMENS S7300 Et 1 11 L610 000037 3 174 R r SIEMENS S7300 Et 1 12 LB10 00006 s 3 173 R T SIEMENS 57 300 Et 1 255 B10 0000975 737 Lb WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 33 5 Window Adjustment Users can drag or use smart docking icons in editing window to place the windows to the desired position W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool FasyDiapnoser i m Ea gt File View Options Help a ees Ld i f Logger Cix Command Read Write Device ation 4 l C 10 35 14 Looking for the target HMI Address Type Range o TT Te 10 35 14 Connection
360. nge window with finger slide Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 594 L WE NTEK 22 11 Station Number Variables Address LW 10000 LW 10001 LW 10002 LW 10003 LW 10004 LW 10005 LW 10006 LW 10007 LW 10008 LW 10009 LW 10010 LW 10011 LW 10012 LW 10013 LW 10014 LW 10015 Description 16bit varO station no variable varO address 16bit var1 station no variable var1 address 16bit var2 station no variable var2 address 16bit var3 station no variable var3 address 16bit var4 station no variable var4 address 16bit var5 station no variable vardb address 16bit var6 station no variable var6 address 16bit var7 station no variable var address 16bit var8 station no variable var8 address 16bit var9 station no variable var9 address 16bit var10 station no variable var1O address 16bit var11 station no variable var1 1 address 16bit var12 station no variable var1 2 address 16bit var13 station no variable var1 3 address 16bit var14 station no variable var14 address 16bit var15 station no variable var1 5 address usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage usage 595 EasyBuilder8000 User
361. nitialized as ON Local Hl Bit LB 3003 Fi LB S004 initialized as ON Local HMI Bit LB S004 6 LB 9005 initialized as ON Local Hbl Bit LB 9005 T LB 9006 initialized as ON Local Hl Bit LB 3006 E LB 5007 initialized as ON Local Hbl Bit LB 3007 4 LB 5008 initialized as ON Local HE Bit LB 9008 Ei Soe arene epee geen DEANAR z mentees gt Users can impor MT S00 tag to represent the address Export EXCEL Import EXCEL Before using the Address Tag Library users need to add the content of the library first Click New and the Address Tag dialogue appears as below Addres Tag Tag name PLC name MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 v Address type Bit Word Perry Cg Device type Address Address format DOD range 0 255 Setting Description OO O The name of the Address Tag 415 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The name of the PLC which is selected from the device list Address type The type of Address there are bit and word types available Device type The type of the device the types available are related to PLC name and Address type The content of the address Click OK when the settings are done and a new tag will be found in the Customized library as below Address Tag Library Customized O System No Address tag name FPLC name Address type Address Reads Write 1 Alarm MITSUBISHI FxOn Fee Bit x 0 Read vyrite 2 temperature MITSUBI
362. nsmit updated graphic image but real time data only This makes transmission really quick and efficient For further information please refer to EasyAccess 81 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 5 Security Parameters in Security tab determine the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects and users password The security classes of objects are classified from A F and none for not ticking any class Up to twelve passwords can be set Only numeral setting is acceptable for password and the range is 0 999999999 oy stem Parameter Sethngs Font Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Device Model General l avaten Setting mecunity select operatable classes for each v r Ue a cea F Enable Password 0 a se MA OB OC OOD OE OF User 2 Enable Pasword 222 MA MB Oc Op Oe OF User 3 Enable Password 333 Ma ME Mc Op OF OF User 4 Enable User 5 Enable User 6 Enable User 7 According to the security setting EB8000 will control the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects once they input their passwords In EB8000 while constructing a project the security classes of objects are classified from A F and None and can be set as shown below If None is set every user can access to adjust this object User restraction Object class lor soun 82 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example when the se
363. nt Trigger Address is set to LW 0 LW 0 When the value of this address changes from 0 to 1 trigger backup LW 1 The data in this address is for specifying the start date of backup LW 2 The data in this address is for specifying the number of days for backup The Syntax is shown below 329 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ly O Set 1 to trigger backup activity Lyyo O 1 Define backup start day today the day before yesterday 0 1 yesterday n ang so on ON O 2 Define backup range Unit day max value 90 330 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 25 Media Player For the first time using Media Player object its necessary to download the project to the HMI via Ethernet EasyBuilder8000 will install Media Player drivers during the download Overview The Media Player function is not only used to play video files but also to provide uses of additional controls such as seeking Zooming volume adjusting and so on With the Media Player users can provide operation and maintenance instructions or standard procedures on video which can help to create an environment that enables any on site operators to perform tasks efficiently from clear comprehensible instructions Note The Media Player function is only available on the MT8000X Series models Configuration Click Media Player object icon on the toolbar Media Player object dialogue box
364. nt log data in MT8000 memory Save to SD card Save the event log data in SD card Save to USB 1 Save the event log data in USB disk 1 Numbering rule of USB disk is the disk inserted to the USB interface in the first place is numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last is numbered 3 It is not related to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the event log data in USB disk 2 Preservation limit After choosing the device to save the Event log users can see the 105 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Preservation limit selection This setting determines how many days the data to be preserved For example the preservation time is set two days which means HMI memory will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday Data that is not built in this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out v Preservation limit Days of preservation days To enable this setting users have to finish the settings of printer in system parameter settings Print Sequence no v Event trigger time HH MM SS HH MM O DD HH MM v Event trigger date OneMon yy ODEM yy OED MM wY Coca Do 7 1 1 Excel Editing Alarm Event Log Category fal 2 a E There is an Excel icon in the top right corner of the Alarm Event Log dialog for users to edit an Event log through Excel An editing procedure includes Edit in Excel Import from Excel t
365. o Event Log and Export to Excel A Edit in Excel EB8000 provides a standardized sample of Excel in C EB8000 EventLogExample xls for users to edit alarm event log The sample includes some dropdown lists for an easier usage 106 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ii level nie ssuceame Devis ay oar tag TEE tag Data Format Enab Bit igh Word Caution 1 System tag and User defined tag can not be set true simultaneously If both of them are set true the system will view System tag to be true and User defined tag to be false If Device type is set as User defined tag please set System tag to be false 2 The format of Color is R G B the values of R G and B should be integer from 0 to 255 3 Click Excel icon to open EventLogExample xls B Import from Excel to Event log Click Import excel button to import Excel file to Event log 107 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Category All 0 ka Enable back light when alarn occurs History files Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Days of preservation davis Print Sequence no Event trigger time HH MM SS HHM O DDO HH MM e Event trigger date O MMDD YY DDMA YY ODDMM YY OY MM Do Insert Delete Settings Caution 1 When user defined ta
366. o Yee fps ip it E am OF g J Gj iMi a iE Bopa Forig mea Lefi 134 Tig 10 Fah 13 0 Lipp 014 35 02 Porter beren is eaa and iay fee coquesis l This window lists all incoming tasks i e screen Job List hardcopy and backup requests This window shows the information about the Property Window task selected from Job List This window shows the preview image of the 3 Preview Window screen hardcopy task selected from Job List Download Progress This window shows the download progress of Window incoming requests This window shows the time and message of Message Window events such as incoming request incorrect password etc 657 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 3 2 Operation Guide The following tables describe the meaning and explain how to use all EasyPrinter menu items Enable Output e Selected EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one e Unselected EasyPrinter arranges the incoming tasks in memory EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory If the memory is full any request coming in afterwards will be rejected and users must either operate Enable Output or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks Edit To edit a screen hardcopy task Edit Print Job Orientation Scaling Original Fit To Margin Users can freely change the properties of Orientation Scaling and Margins here To delete the selected t
367. o be done Please check if all the settings in Device Properties are correct PLC default PLC should be set with a read address alone with a station no for station no HMI to locate and communicate with it If this address does not include a station no EB8000 will use this PLC default station no as the station no of PLC In addition station no can be set in the read address of PLC directly Take address 1 20 as an example MITSUBISHI FXOn Fx IT 1 20 Address AMT SUBISH FAOnir xe T 1820 DOO range 0 255 1 means PLC station no and has to be named from 0 to 255 20 means PLC address the sign is used to separate station no and address Default station When setting PLC properties station no variables can be selected no use station and used as PLC default station no LW10000 LW10015 can be no variable used to set station no variables When using this function if the station no is not specified for PLC 65 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address it will be decided by the station no variable of default station no In this example var3 is set for default station no The following demonstrates how the PLC address station no is set a The station number of PLC is 5 PLC name MODBUS RTU Address 4x 54111 b The PLC station no is decided by var7 LW 10007 PLC name MODBUS RTU Address 4x var7 111 c PLC address is
368. objects please save compile project and do the off line simulation The illustration below is initial screen of off line simulation Since no password is entered this time object ND O LW9222 shows 0000000000000000 which means current user can only use objects with none class Moreover SB_O SB_2 are objects with security levels of class A class C and at the same time Make invisible while protected is selected therefore SB O SB_ 2 objects are hidden by the system Username 1 ese 19 Password QO w bit 15 bit0 Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 152 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 4 When user enters the password of user 1 111 the display will become Username 1 LW9219 Password 111 449220 bit 15 bto Current status 0000000000000001 cwszze Logout LB9050 Class A Button Since user 1 is permitted to use objects with class A object SB _O appears and allows user to operate Now bit O in LW 9222 becomes 1 Step 5 Next when user enters user 3 s password 333 the display will become Username 3 LW9219 Password bit 15 Current status 000000000000011 1 Logout LB9050 Class A Button Class B Button Class C Button Since user 3 is permitted to use objects with class A B and C Now bit O bit 3 in LW 9222 becomes 111 and allows current user
369. of the object is OFF and Use interlock function is ticked hide the object Grayed label when disabled When the state of Bit address of the object is OFF and Use interlock function is ticked the label of the object will be grayed grayed normal This function is used to set the security class of an object Only when users permitted security class meets the object s can it be operated When Object class is selected as None any user with any security class can operate this object The following settings are also provided in the function Disable protection permanently after initial activation Once the permitted security class of the user meets that of the object the system will stop checking the security class when operating this 148 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual object permanently Which means even if the user is changed this object can still be operated freely Display warning message if access denied When the user s current security level does not meet that of the object a warning dialog appears Window 7 is set as an alert message for authority security Users can design the content of the message Make invisible while protected When a user s security level does not meet that of the object the object will be hidden Each object can be set whether to use the beeper to make a specific sound or not A system register LB9019 is used as the switch of the beeper When state of LB9019 is OF
370. ogele All Outlining Update AM Outlining 423 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The disabled items are colored grey which indicates that it is not possible to use that function in the current status of the editor For example you should mark a selected area to enable the copy function otherwise it will be disabled Accelerators are supported as described in the menu 5 Above the edit area locates the toolbar It provides Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark and Clear All Bookmarks buttons for instant use 6 Modifications made to the editor will enable the undo function Redo function will be enabled after the undo action is taken To perform the undo redo action right click to select the item or use the accelerator Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Y WorkSpace a Ae he macro command main abe abe abe end macro comma r 2 s g 5 Undo Undo WorkSpace elect All Cilt Toggle Bookmark Ctrl F Macro ID Next Bookmark F2 E we Previous Boobmiak Shum e m Ae Ae he Clear All Bookmarks Toggle Al Outlining Update AU Outlining macro command maint abge end macro comtmiarndd 424 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WorkSpace 1 z macro command maini 4 abc __ 5 end ma Undo Cth Redo Redo Works pace select All Chita T
371. oggle Bookmark Cti F2 Next Bookmark Fi Previous Bookmark shfttFe Clear All Bookmarks Toggle All Outlining Update All Outlining macro command main i abe abe abd end macro command 7 Select a word in the editor to enable the cut and copy function After cut or copy is performed the paste function is enabled 425 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Works pace Works pace as t Ge Aa gt 44are macro command main Undo Redo ut ind ac Paste Ctl Lopy Cth eelect All Cilta Select All Chita Toggle Bookmark CtlitF2 Next Bookmark Fa Previous Bookmark htt F2 Clear All Bookmarks Togel Al Outlining Update Al Outlining Togel Bookmark CtltF2 Next Bookmark F Previous Bookmark Shift F2 Clear All Bookmarks Togel l Outlining Update AM Outlining 8 Use Select All to include all the content in the edit area Works pace Ho A he Ae he L 2 macro command main 3 4 Wie al OI SE oat f 1 12 6 MEPE Undo Cil 7 Redo Ctl g end macro corms Cant tlt Copy Ctl Faste Ctl elect All Torele Bookmark ChiF2 426 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 If the macro code goes very long for easier reading bookmarks are provided The illustration below shows how it works a Move your cursor to the position in the edit area where to insert a bookmark Right click select
372. oject EasyBuilder 8000 Te EB Fie Edit View Option Display mode Landscape Use template Under Device Tab click New button to correctly set up the Device Properties for communicating with the PLC 30 Lid es WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Font Extended Memory Device Model Device Properties MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 OHMI PLC Location Local Settings PLL type W 1 10 MITSUBISHI FAOM so PLE I F RS 405 Avy w PLE default station no oF COMI 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 a Max read command size twords Max write command size words Click OK device MISUBISHI FXOn FX2 is added to the Device List oystem Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server avaten pettine Mame Location Device type fF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local MTS104iH 00 x Disable NA Local PLC 1 MITSUBISHI FEOn Local MITSUBISHI FXOn COM1 9600 E 7 1 R845 44 Interface 34 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Now if users would like to add a new object such as Toggle Switch click the icon on the tool bar aw IEE A New Toggle Switch Object dialog will be shown as below Correctly set the parameters of the object click OK and place the object wherever users like in the window Hew Togele Switch Object Ed General Security
373. ol History control Device type LW we Address 100 System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned v The system selects history record by an index Index O refers to the latest history record normally it is history record today Index 1 refers to the history record one day before the latest and so on The current value in History control register is used as the index to select corresponding history record Here is an example to explain how to use History control The history control register is LW100 supposed that the history records saved in system are EL 20061120 evt EL 20061123 evt EL 2006112 7 evt EL 20061203 evt Where 2006xxxx is the date of system saved history record The following table shows the corresponding historical record displayed be event display object according to the value of LW100 Value of LW100 Corresponding Historical Record O EL_20061203 evt EL_20061127 evt EL_20061123 evt 314 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EL_20061120 evt e Enable reading multiple histories selected Definition Displays a list of events triggered in multiple days Illustration Take LWO to be the History Control Address as an example the range of data to be displayed will be formed by LWO and LW1 while value in LWO represents the first history data to start with Example As illustrated below for showing it clearer the history data is numbered ac
374. ommand 502 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Name String ToReverse Description success String ToReverse source start destination start success StringToReverse source destination start Reverse the characters in the source string and store it in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of reversed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char dest1 20 bool success success1 String ToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 edcba char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String foUpper abcde dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command Name String TrimLeft success StringTrimLeft source start set start destination start Description success String TrimLeft source set start destination start success StringTrimLeft Source start set destination start success StringTrimLeft source set destination start Trim the leading specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in th
375. ommands Responses On Responses Off Note If set to 1 the Turn Around Delay setting Parameter 2 has no affect 711 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 3 Network Support 32 3 1 Wiring The MT8000 ASCII protocol shall support network wiring using RS485 2 wire 4 wire or RS232 32 3 2 Addressing The protocol shall support each MT8000 having a unique Station ID Valid Station ID shall be from 1 to 255 32 3 3 Broadcast Messages MT8000 doesn t support Broadcast Message 712 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 Command Usage 32 4 1 RD Batch Read 32 4 1 1 Request This command reads up to 99 consecutive 16 bit items from the LW memory area of HMI The command is always 14 bytes long Byte 1 Bytes Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 2 3 5 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to read from Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of addresses to read up to 99 Must be 2 bytes long Byte 12 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes 13 14 The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12 Example Read 3 words starting from address LW100 from the HMI at station 10 OAH This will read addresses LW100 LW102 Byte 1 Bytes 2
376. on system will play the channel set in Input channel automatically 386 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Fideo In Objects Properties General Profile Description Encode format Control addres Use contol function Use Definition Capture the image of the input video Capture Illustration Function A Capture address the Control Address that triggers system to capture the image of video Storage medium To choose where to save the video image Available storage SD card USB1 or USB2 VIP 1 video image will be saved in file VIP 1 in the chosen storage and VIP 2 video image in file VIP2 Record time To set a period of time for image capturing The longest period can be set starts from 10 seconds before triggering Capture address to 10 seconds after triggering In this case there will be 21 images captured including the one captured at the triggering moment The time interval for capturing is once in each second The captured jpg file will be named in the following format Before or after Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg The moment that Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg 387 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Capture address Use capture function PLC name Local HMI a Address Storage medium OSSD USE 1 OUSE Record time Before seconds After seconds Take the illustration above as sa
377. on of the pattern Fatterm Style Pattern color The color of the pattern Filled Tick to determine if a window is filled with the color and pattern set for the background Bottom Middle Top Up to three base windows can be specified as underlay windows for each base window from Bottom to Top The objects but not the backgrounds in underlay windows are displayed in this order in base window X Y Base window can also be used as pop up window Use X and Y to set the coordinates indicate where in the screen will this base window pop 98 2 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual up The origin of the coordinates is the left top corner of the screen Monopoly If the option is checked when a base window used as a pop up window appears users are not allowed to operate other windows before this base window Is closed If a base window is used as a keyboard window Monopoly is automatically enabled Another way to create a window is to select Window from menu in EB8000 and then select Open Window to open the dialogue Please refer to the illustration below Window Help Cen Window Cascade Tile 110 WNDOW 010 Open Window Window name Fast Selection Common Window 320 234 PLE Response 155 73 HMI Connection 300 100 EEEa Password Restriction 300 100 Storage Space Insufficient 226 80 WINDOY O10 a20 234 Keypad 1 Integer 164 213 keypad 2 Integer 198 234 key
378. onal macro_command main short data_log_ number 1 year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101210 dtI with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution success 1 and index success FindDataSamplinglndex data_log_ number year month day index end macro_command Name FindEventLogDate Description return_value FindEventLogDate index year month day or FindEventLogDate index year month day A query function for finding the date of specified event log file according to file index The date is stored into year month and day respectively in the format of YYYY MM and DD 512 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 Index can be constant or
379. onstant 35 to LIVIO Set constant 36 to LW I00 Set constant O to LM I00 Use the set word object SW_1 to set the value of LW100 as 36 and the location of indirect window will display window 36 Set constant 35 to LM I00 Set constant 36 to LWO Set constant O to LICO No matter window 35 or 36 is displayed on the indirect window location press SW_2 to set the value of LW100 to O will close the popup window The other way to close the popup window from indirect window object is to configure a function key with close window Once you press the function key the popup window will be closed 229 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed simultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 230 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 12 Direct Window Overview Direct window object is to define a popup window location position size a bit device and a predefined valid window number When the content of the bit device is set ON OFF the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the content of the bit device is reset The system will only take action when the content of bit device is changed OFF ON ON OFF The difference between the Direct window and the Indirect window is that th
380. or Event Log history files 2 Command Line The exact command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file is qualified 3 a HMI IP address This argument specifies the HMI this criterion b HMI name targets 4 Condition 1 e If the file type is dtl This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling objects this criterion targets e Others No use Condition 2 No use reserved for further use 666 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria EasyPrinter examines criteria in ascending order every time a file is uploaded Once the file is qualified for a criterion it stops the examination and starts over for next file Therefore users less specific criteria downward Take the 5 criteria mentioned in the previous sections for example the correct order is dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs S PathName Voltage dtl EasyConverter c S PathName EasyView dtl EasyConverter c S PathName 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c PathName evt EasyConverter c PathName 667 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 27 EasySimulator EasySimulator enables users to perform Online Offline simulation without installing EayBuilder software To achieve that users have to prepare the following files in one folder 27 1 Prepare Files 1 driver gt win32 driver 2 320x234 bmp Rat eae
381. ormat HTSC s Captur addres Use capture function PLC name Local HMI Ww Storage mediom OSD USE 1 OUSE 2 Record time Before seconds After seconds Control addres PLC name Local HMI Address LW we oo 16 bit Unsigned Setting Description Use Definition For inputting external video image into HMI and play Control it with HMI 385 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Illustration Control addres Use control function PLC name Local HMI E Suppose Control Address is designated as LW100 A Users can set Control Address 0 to enable stop Video Input function LW100 0 gt Stop Playing LW100 1 gt Input video image in VIP 1 and display it in screen LW100 2 gt Input video image in VIP 2 and display it in screen LW100 3 gt Input video image in VIP 1 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image LW100 4 gt Input video image in VIP 2 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image Users can set Control Address 1 to control the displaying of video image LW101 1 gt Pause Continue playing If users change value in Control Address 0 the system will keep the new value If users change value in Control Address 1 system will execute the corresponding command first then erase the new value and set it back to 0 If not using Control Functi
382. ory Printen Backup Server Use MT Remote Frinten Backup Server Note Use EagyPinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and stormg backup data Output sethings Crientation Horizontal Vertical Printer size Original size O Fit to printer margins ia 5 am Communication settings IF addres 192 168 1 Port 8005 User name admin Password 111111 7 In Output settings assign appropriate values for left top right bottom margins Note The margins are all assigned to 15mm in the example 8 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of the printer server same as step 1 assign the port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 651 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual In Menu Objects gt Buttons select Function Key and assign Screen hardcopy to MT Remote Printer Server Hard copy screen to USB disk or printer a SCRE TL hard copy Printer iy ke JII E F LULL BELYeEL MT Remote Printer Server USB disk 1 USB disk 2 Notification Place the Function Key object in the common window window no 4 and users will be able to make screen hardcopies anytime when needed Compile and download project to MT8000 HMI Press the Function Key object set in step 9 to make a screen hardcopy Users can also use a PLC Control object to make screen hardcopies Users cannot
383. oup and Input Order the system picks the one at bottom layer to enter input state first e When selecting Touch as Mode Refer to the following illustration when users complete inputting data on AE_ 2 the system transfers input state to AE_0 The reason why not transferring to NE_0 is because the Input Order Group of NE_0 is different from that of AE2 213 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Stop sequential input function after input If the objects in one group are not set with this function the input order would be Order 1 gt Order 2 gt Order 3 gt Order 4 gt Order 1 gt Order 2 gt And the loop goes on until the ESC button is pressed lf one of the objects in the group is set to Stop sequential input function after input Take Order 4 Object as shown below the input order would be Order 1 gt Order 2 gt Order 3 gt Order 4 gt fin Upon the completion of input of Order 4 Object press ENTER the input will stop at this point 214 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Input order V Enable Inputorder 4 Order 1 Input order Enable Inputorder 1 Stop sequential input function after input e When selecting Bit control as Mode a Users have to specify an Input Order for the object b No need to set Input Order Group because all the input objects with Bit control as Mode have the same Input Order Group t
384. ow Write data to PLC current base window Bo General PLE control ee 4 LBS00 Back light controliwrite back Press the New button and the PLC Control dialogue box appears Set all the attributes of PLC control and press OK button a new PLC control object will be created 346 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ELC Control PLC name Local HMI has Attribute Type of control Srema enn C Acti Change window Active Only Wiuvrite data to PLCt current base windows General PLO control _ Turn on back Back light control write back Back light control Sound control Trigger address a Screen hardcop PLC name Address Liy Ww o 16 bit Unsigned Lo x caret Setting Description Attribute amp Type of control Trigger To set the type of control Click the select button and you can drag down a address list of all available PLC control functions Attribute Type of control SAE Eaa lel Change window write data to PLEicurrent base window General PLE control Back light contraliwrite back Back light control Sound control Device type Screen hardcop Trigger address a Change window This is used to change base window When the value of Trigger address is written in a valid window number the system will close the current window and open the window designated by the Trigger address The 347 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual n
385. ow to use multi language feature First of all create a Text Object 411 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Text Object Eg Text _ Us bitmap font meer A ttribute Font 4 Color a eize 16 s _ Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to Movement Dive No movement Content Next create a Numeric Input Object Set its Read address as below The Read address in use is the system reserved register LW 9134 412 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Numeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Deesiien Read address PLE name Local HMI we Setting Address Lw 9134 16bit language mode se Address Ed PLC name Local HMI as Device type LW 9154 16bit language mode v Address System tag Address Format DODD range 0 10500 The following illustrations are the results of simulation When the value of LW 9134 is changed the content of the Text Object will also be changed automatically English LW9134 language mode fal 46 SZ SIMPLE LW9134 language mode 2 ebay oO H KOREAN LW9134 language mode 413 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library Users are generally recommended to define commonly used addresses in the Address Tag Library when start to build a project It not on
386. pad 3 Integer 200 170 Keypad 4 Integer 304 213 keypad 5 HEX 306 220 ASCII Small 312 130 ASCI Upper 5 312 150 ASCI Lower S 312 130 Window No Window Name and Size are listed in the Open Window dialogue Click New and choose window type from Select Window Style dialog Complete all the settings and click OK a new window is created 99 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select Window Style Exit Once the base window is built its window number sticks with it and can t be changed But the size color and name of the window can still be modified 6 2 2 Window Settings EB8000 provides three methods to modify window attributes a Right click on the designated window from window tree and select Settings to open the Window Settings dialogue to change the window properties 11 Show Too 12 13 Object epmcen 15 Securiby 16 Communi 1m M ra b Right click directly in the window without selecting any object and then select Attribute Or click in EB8000 menu without selecting any object can also open the Window Settings dialogue 100 LW WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual c Select Window from menu in EB8000 and select Open Window a dialogue appears Designate a window to modify then choose Settings to open the Window Settings dialogue 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a Window TO open an existing window not only double click the window No from the w
387. parameter into a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer Source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main float src1 1 2345 char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringFloat2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 1 2345 float src2 1 23456789 char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringFloat2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true but it might lose precision float src3 1 2345 char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringFloat2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name StringHexAsc2Bin 490 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Syntax success StringHexAsc2Bin source start destination or success StringHexAsc2Bin source destination Description This function converts a hexadecimal string to binary data It converts the hexadecimal string in source parameter into binary data and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and c
388. pe is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_offset is the address offset in the PLC For example StringSet read_ data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringSet read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address_ offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on the value of the number of data_count since that send_data is restricted to char array type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_data send char 8 bit 1 char 8 bit 2 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table sending 2 ASCII characters is actually writing to one 16 bit register The ASCII characters are stored into the WORD register from low byte to h
389. pe name where define the type of name Example int A define a variable A as an integer type name constant where define the type of array name Example int B 10 where define a variable B as a one dimensional array of size 10 18 4 2 Assignment Statement Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the right side of the operator to the variable on the left side An expression is the combination of variables constants and operators to yield a value Variable Expression Example A 2 where a variable A is assigned to 2 438 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 4 3 Logical Statements Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a Boolean expression The syntax is as follows Single Line Format if lt Condition gt then Statements else Statements end if Example ifa 2 then b 1 else b 2 end if Block Format If lt Condition gt then Statements else if lt Condition n gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else if a 3 then b 2 439 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual else b 3 end if Syntax description if Mustbeusedto begin tre statement lt Condition gt Required This is the controlling statement It is FALSE when the Must precede the statements to execute if the lt Condition gt evaluates to fer e sense ienetine Serstow ease It is optional in blo
390. pel pb a Fide nare stew pi Fie of type hae ib ply al New Lib Click the button to add a new Shape Library Hew Library ed Library name Test Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Shape Library in Library from current project EasyBuilder 8000 Delete All States Delete all states of the selected Shape Delete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Shape Rename Rename the selected Shape Place Export the Shape to be placed to current window 393 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 2 Ae g st a Reoarmes op TE ie Bag ee oes J Shape Library ied Ley em OOOOH b O 4 ew bis Emishki Faaiseh Lh DSim T Shai u ani F Er eram Sbit I Sakr t eee Z Shes T otee ee Delete Cur iiie borer inat iner Alaisiial S The following shows how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states to it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Shape Library New Library Library name TEST A new Shape Library TEST will be added to the Shape Library dialogue At this moment no Shape is in the library Library state aa bad 1 2 E a 5 6 7 button i buttonz System Frame System Button System Lamp i p States 0 A 0 A A ea None None None None 394 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 2 Add a state to the selected Shape
391. position StringFindOneOf source start target position StringFindOneOf source target Return the position of the first character in the source string that matches any character contained in the target string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character in the source string that is also in the target string If there is no match it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 sdf bool pos pos1 StringFindOneOf src1 0 target1 0 pos1 3 char src2 20 abcdeabcde bool pos2 pos2 StringFindOneOf src2 1 agi pos2 4 char target3 20 bus bool pos3 pos3 StringFindOneOf abcdeabcde target3 1 pos3 1 end macro_command Name Stringlncluding success Stringlncluding source start set start destination start success Stringlncluding source set start destination start success Stringlncluding source start set destination start success Stringlncluding source set destination start Description Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is not in the target string The source string and
392. printer backup server IPO IPO IP 1 IP2 IP3 LW 9771 16bit remote printer backup server IP1 IPO 1P1 IP2 IP3 LW 9772 16bit remote printer backup server IP2 a Dow LW 9773 16bit remote printer backup server IP3 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ew rw RW LW 9774 6 words remote printer backup server user E acd o LW 9780 6 words remote printer backup server password 619 Ly 22 24 EasyAccess EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual BSS WE NTEK LB 9051 disconnect set OFF connect set ON EasyAccess server LB 9052 status of connecting to EasyAccess server For further information on EasyAccess please visit http www ihmi net 620 Ns were 22 25 Pass Through Settings EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SS em T LW 9900 16bit HMI run mode 0 normal mode 1 3 test mode COM 1 COM 3 LW 9901 16bit pass through source COM port 1 3 R W R W R W COM 1 COM 3 LW 9902 16bit pass through destination COM port 1 3 R W R W R W COM 1 COM 3 621 L W We INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 26 Disable PLC No Response Dialog Box L LB 9192 disable USB 1 PLC s PLC No Response dialog eal when ON LB 9195 disable USB 2 PLC s PLC No Response dialog lal when ON LB 11960 disable PLC 1 s PLC No Response dialog when LB 11961 disable PLC 2 s PLC No Response dialog when ae LB 11962 disable PLC 3 s PLC No Response dialog when a es disable PLC 4 s
393. r Data Types User Defined Name TestStruct Strings Predefined Description E Module Defined Data Type Descriptione lt arms Umenber Step 3 Input in Name and Data Type then click OK to leave Add data member Mame Description Data Type Binary Access User Defined H Strings H Predefined H Module Defined Array Dimensions Dim 2 Dim 1 Dim 0 Show Data Types by Groups 743 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 4 After adding all data members click OK The built data type will be listed on the left side D AB Data Type Editor Data Types E User Defined Mame Test5truct TestType TestTypeB TestT ype TestTypeD TestTypec TestTy per Description Dats Type Descriptione H Strings INT Predefined Module Defined f Note After changing Name or Description of a data type OK must be clicked to activate revision 744 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 34 3 Paste Step 1 When adding new data members this function allows users to add multiple data at one time The way is to click Paste in the AB Data Type Editor window 1 lines Step 2 The way to edit is to input data name in each line first then use space or tab key to leave a space in each line And then input data type or click Sample to see some reference It is recommended to directly copy and paste from RSLogix5000 to avoid errors Description M
394. r month day index or FindDataSamplingIndex data_log_ number year month day index Descripti A query function for finding the file index of specified data sampling file on according to the data sampling no and the date The file index is stored into index year month and day are in the format of YYYY MM and DD respectively Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold addres l Local HMI LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable Local HMI LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable data sampling no 511 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dtl 20110111 dtl The file index are 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtI gt index is 2 20110110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is O return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data_log_ number year month and day can be constant or variable index and return_value must be variable The return_ value field is opti
395. r the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of string after insertion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char str1 20 but the question is char str2 10 that is char dest 40 to be or not to be bool success 505 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual success Stringlnsert 18 str1 3 13 dest 0 success true dest to be or not to be the question success Stringlnsert 18 str2 0 dest 0 success true dest to be or not to be that is the question success Stringlnsert O Hamlet dest 0 success false dest remains the same end macro_command 506 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 507 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 7 Miscellaneous Name SYNC_TRIG_MACRO SYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro synchronously use macro_id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will pause until the end of execution of this called macro macro_id can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char ON 1 OFF 0 setData ON Local HMI LB O 1 SYNC_TRIG_ MACRO 5 _ call a macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 end macro_command Name ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro asynchronous
396. rary dialogue appears as below 391 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual gz EE Call up Shape Library Shape Library Library Frame Lerma Select Lib jarrow arrows Mew Lib Eaa E i button Wnattach Lib buttons button System Frame D Untitled 1 Untitled 2 B Delete All States System Button States 1 3 States 3 _ States System Lamp Frame Frame Delete Cur State Rename Place 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled States 3 States 3 States 3 States 3 ME Frame Frame Frame Frame Display v Inner X Frame State O State 11 Setting Description Library Shape Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Shape from the list Select the state to be displayed by current Shape If the selected Shape isn t displayed it means that the Shape does not exist or the state of the Shape isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Shape Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 392 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Uiptn O E pills Doct mi arroencplb Ta bettors ph i A Ti bettors ph Tbuttori pb Tidnipb a Bi frame ph Se MTN000_Demo 1i H pb EMTA Demo bihi dpb TAHTA Demo p0ti0 0p gd Bp
397. ration in the dialogue is defined in System Message object and can be changed by user Click System Message icon in tool bar and the dialog appears Content in Message0 is for operation confirmation 3 Fast te EE 4 ome zd og 5 PLCE FA a 6 HMI C Ea H 7 Passe 10 WIN Confirmation required Message 0 Please confirm the operation Font Arial System message bax 1 Message 1 Please input the password Font Aria System message box 2 Message 2 A system enor Font Arial When this feature is applied to an object whether or not an object is allowed to be operated will be decided by the state of appointed bit 147 Lyd WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual User restriction address or called Enable address Enable address must be in the form of Bit address The content of the address is set in the following dialog Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled C Graved label when disabled Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF PL name Local HMI w Setting Fox example suppose Use interlock function is checked for an object and the Enable bit address is set to LB0 The object can be operated only when the state of LBO is ON The Interlock feature also provides the following settings Use interlock function Enable disable the interlock function Hide when disabled When the state of Bit address
398. rce of a picture for state 1 and select the correct transparent color for it After the settings are completed click the Finish button 403 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Get Piche Picture file State C C Documents and Settingsihi bmp and EAE bmp Browse State 1 Width 105 Height 103 Size SF 602 bytes Transparent T T Below shows the complete picture created A new picture F Yellow can be found in the Picture Library dialogue From the information we know the picture is in the format of bitmap and with two states Library Graph name 0 F Yellow 1 Total states 2 Image size 30054 0 BMP 404 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language Usage Label Library is used in the Multi Language environment Users can design the content of Label Library to meet their demands Select the suitable label from Label Library when text is needed 15 1 Introduction The system in operation will display the corresponding text to the language in use according to the settings EB8000 supports 8 different languages simultaneously Click Label Library Manager and the dialogue appears as below jala g Label Library Manager Label Taz Library BHOOBOooeo Save Label File Load Label File Export EXCEL File ImportEXCEL File D tion Indicates the current state each Label has maximum of 256 states state no O 255
399. re below X axis time range Time E axis time range C Pixel Time Distance condis Select Time the Distance is used to set the X axis in unit of time elapsed See the picture below 265 We WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 20 seconds a Ooa a gt ee l Otherwise select Time for X axis time range and go to Trend Grid for enable Time scale function Please refer Time scale on the following Watch line Enable PL name Lacal HMI Setting Using the Watch line function when user touches the trend display object it will display a watch line and export the sampling data at the position of watch line to the designated word device You may register a numeric display object to display the result Please refer to the following picture 266 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Match line vem a A a no a Oa a CE e eT 4 L W300 Watch line function also can export sampling data of multiple channels The address registered in watch line is the start address and those sampling data will be exported to the word devices starting from start address The data format of each channel may be different the corresponding address of each channel is arranged from the first to the last in sequence For example LW300 Ch 0 16 bit Unsigned LW301 Ch 1 32 bit Unsigned LW303 Ch 2 32 bit Unsigned
400. ress OK button and a new Moving Shape Object will be created See the pictures below io oH ie ATH 235 Wana z Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Moving Shape Object General shape Label Description PLC name Read addes PLC name Address Ww 16 bit Unsigned Attribute Mode No of states Min X Display ratio etate Limit address PLC name Address 16 bit Unsigned i Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the word devices that control the display of object s state and moving distance Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The table below shows the address to control object s state and moving distance in each different data format 236 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data format Address to Address to Address to control object control Moving control Moving state Distance on the distance on the X axis Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 For example if the object s read address is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned LW100 is to control the objects state LW101 is to control the object s moving distance on the X axis and LW102 is to control the object s moving distance on the Y axis The picture below shows th
401. ress to Address to 238 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual control object control Moving control state Distance on Moving the X axis distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 d X axis w scaling The object is for X axis movement with scale Supposed that the value of the designated register is DATA the system uses the following formula to calculate the moving distance on the X axis X axis move distance DATA Input low Scaling high Scaling low Input high input low A ttribute Mode X axis wf scaling 0000 Wo of states 800000000 Input low 0 Input high 600 Sealinglow 300 Sealinghigh 1000 000 For example the object is only allowed to move within 0 600 but the range of the register s value is 300 1000 set Input low to 300 and Input high to 1000 and set Scaling low to O and Scaling high to 600 and the object will move within the range Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 e Y axis w scaling The object is for Y axis movement with scale and the formula to calculate the moving distance on the Y ax
402. rnet com port HMIIP 192 168 1 37 Get Heil Communication Parameters H Al work mode Unknown Source COM Port F HM COM 1 Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Even Stop bits Destination COM Por Heil PLG COM 2 wt Baud rate Gand Data bits Parity Even wt Stop bits Start Pass through Stop Pase through HMI IP Assign HMI IP address Get HMI Communication Parameters For getting the settings of source and destination COM port The parameters come from reserved addresses detailed as follows Source COM port and Destination COM port LW 9901 Source COM port 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM3 LW 9902 Destination COM 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM3 port COM 1 mode settings LW 9550 PLC I F O RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 5 600 5 115200 LW 9552 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9553 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd 688 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9554 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits COM 2 mode settings LW 9555 PLC I F O RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9556 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 5 600 5 115200 LW 9557 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9558 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9559 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits COM 3 mode setting 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW 9562 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits
403. ro cCorm ned To solve this problem right click to select Update All Outlining to retrieve correct outlining WorkSpace macro command main if 1 then if 1 then end if end macro Cornna arnc l 2 3 3 5 13 The statements enclosed in the following keywords are called a block of the macro code a Function block sub end sub b Reiterative statements i for next ii while wend c Logical statements i if end if d Selective statements select case end select 430 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 2 Macro Construction A Macro is made up of statements The statements contain constants variables and operations The statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output A Macro is constructed in the following fashion Global Variable Declaration Optional Sub Function Block Declarations Optional Local Variable Declarations End Sub macro_command main Required Local Variable Declarations Statements end macro_command Required Macro must have one and only one main function which is the execution start point of macro The format is macro_command Function_Name end macro_command Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block Its value remains valid only within the specific block Global variables are declared before any function blocks and are valid for all functions in the m
404. rs input state when turning ON the designated bit register and ends input state when turning OFF Notice that if there is another input object already in input state turning ON the designated bit register won t make this input object enters input state until the previous one ends inputting data Allow input bit Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type address Address System tag Index register of the bit register that controls the object enters and ends input state Users can also set address in Data Entry tab 212 Input order EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual By setting Input Order and Input Order Group users can continuously input data between multiple input objects The system will automatically transfer input state to the next input object after users complete inputting data i e press ENT e Enable Select Enable and set Input Order to enable this feature Furthermore users can also select Group to set Input Order Group a The range of Input Order 1 511 b The range of Input Order Group 1 15 c The Input Order Group of an input object with Group unselected is 0 Criterion of searching the next input object a The system only searches it among the input objects with the same Input Order Group The system picks the input object with smaller Input Order to enter input state before another one with bigger Input Order If two input objects have the same Input Order Gr
405. rst register controls the state of the object and the second register controls the position along the predefined path As the PLC position register changes value the shape or picture jumps to the next position along the path Configuration Click the Animation icon on the toolbar move the mouse to each moving position and click the left button to define all moving positions one by one When settings of all moving positions are completed click the right button of the mouse a new animation object will be created See the pictures below Fl aul Ayimeation AH 0 positien D pasition 0 State 0 pasitian i postion 4d f pasikian s pasihan 2 To change the object s attributes you can double click the left button of the mouse on the object and the Animation Object s Properties dialogue box as shown in the picture below will appear 241 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ammation Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Dessin A thaibute no of states 8 v Foston Controlled by register O Based upon time interval Read address PLO name Local HMI v Setting Cancel Setting Description Attribute Total no of states To set the number of the states for this object a Controlled When select Controlled by register the designated register controls the by register object s state and position Read address If
406. rted by the above formula as 10 15 0 x 50 10 20 0 40 and the result 40 will be displayed on the numeric input object 217 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Scaling option Do conversion Engmeerimne low Enemeering high Limits Direct O Dynamit limits Input iow Input high Limits To set the source of the range for the input data and to set the warning color effect Direct The low limit and high limit of the input data can be set in Input low and Input high respectively If the input data is out of the defined range the input value will be ignored Dynamic limits O Direct Dynamit limits PLC name Local HMI s Setting Set the low limit and high limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register The data length of the designated register is the same as the input object itself In the above example the low limit and high limit are derived from LW100 and the following explains the usage of the low limit and high limit from designated address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for designated register Users can also set address in Numeric Format tab Designated address Input Low Limit Input High Limit 16 bit format LW100 LW101 Address 1 32 bit format LW100 LW102 Address 2 Low limit When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit t
407. rties The contents of general properties settings of an object include Selecting the connected PLC Setting reading and writing address Using shape library and picture library Setting text content ae aN SS Adjusting profile size 9 1 Selecting PLC It is required to designate which PLC to operate while using some objects as shown below PLC name represents the controlled PLC In this example there are 2 PLC Local HMI and Allen Brandley DF 1 These listed available PLC devices are sourced from Device List in System Parameters Settings PLC name Allen Brandley DF1 k Local MT Allen Brandley DFI 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing Address 124 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PLO name Local HMI wt Setting i PLC name a fala ha Device type LE ka 4ddress format CODDD range 0 11999 Index INDEX 0 16 bi v Index register The picture above shows a reading address or writing address contains PLC name This is for selecting device type Different PLC are with different selections of device type Address Device type Address Address Format Index Address Set the reading and writing address System tag Address tag includes system tag and user defined tag Click Setting beside PLC name and tick system tag This allows users to use the preserved addresses by system for particular p
408. ry When touch and hold the area the bit device will be set to ON and the bit device will be set to OFF once the finger removes from area Periodical toggle The state of the bit device will be switched between ON and OFF periodically Operation s time interval can be selected in the combo box showed in the picture below tme anaal Set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object opens is opened the bit device will be automatically set to ON 181 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is opened the bit device will be automatically set to OFF set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is closed the bit device will be automatically set to ON set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object closes is closed the bit device will be automatically set to OFF Set ON when When the backlight is turned on the bit device backlight on is automatically set ON Set OFF when When the backlight is turned on the bit device backlight on is automatically set OFF Set ON when When the backlight is turned off the bit device Set OFF when When the backlight is turned off the bit device Users can use set bit object to activate macro commands Macro commands have to be built before configure this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Set style Attribute Macro
409. s PLE pame MITSUBISHI Feon Fee We Address var2 123 E The syntax of variable of station number varN address The range of N is integer from 0 15 address means PLC address 16 variables are availble varO var15 These variables of station number read values from address LW 10000 LW 10015 The list below shows variables and its corresponding system reserved address LW var0 LW 10000 var LW 10001 var2 LW 10002 var3 LW 10003 var4 LW 10004 vars LW 10005 var6 LW 10006 var LW 10007 var8 LW 10008 var9 LW 10009 var10 LW 10010 vari 1 LW 10011 var12 LW 10012 var13 LW 10013 var14 LW 10014 var15 LW 10015 141 L WE NTEK For example varO reads value from LW 10000 when value in LW 10000 is 32 var0 234 32 234 the station number is 32 similarly var13 reads value from LW 10013 when value in LW10013 is 5 var13 234 5 234 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 142 Lyd WEINTEK 9 6 Broadcast Station Number EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MT6000 8000 provides two ways for users to enable using broadcast command First is to set it directly in system parameter settings Device tab PLC type MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 V 1 00 MITSUBISHI_FAON so PLC I F RS 485 PW PLC default station no 0 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 W Use broadcast command Second way is to use system tag to enable or disable broadcast station number or to change it Corresponding system ta
410. s case is FATEK FB Series The communication parameter must be set correctly 2 Due to COM 2 of HMI 1 is used to receive commands from HMI 2 users must add a new device Master Slave Server for setting communication properties of COM 2 Picture above shows the parameters of COM 2 are 115200 E 8 1 and uses RS232 These parameters are not required to be the same as PLC but the data bits must set to 8 In general a higher baud rate for COM 2 is recommended for communication more efficient 672 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI The following is the project content of HMI 2 in System Parameter Settings Device System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General SystemSetting Security Device list Name Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local MT6070iH MTS07O Disable F TEE FE Sernes COM 1 master slave FA TEE FB Series LOMI1 115200 E Local HMI Due to the PLC that HMI 2 reads from is connected with HMI 1 thus HMI 2 views PLC as a remote device Therefore it is necessary to add a Remote PLC 1 into the device list and in this case is FATEK FB Series The way to create Remote PLC 1 is described below Step 1 Create a new device FATEK FB Series for PLC type PLC default station no must be the same as the connected PLC PLC type FATEK FB Sei Y
411. s for MB and another is for MW For MB command Offset byte 0x02 The operating sign to MB Ox Address Low byte Ox Bit Address High byte For example MB12 gt 1 16 2 18 is 0x12 and 0x00 Ox00 or 0x01 The data of MB address eee insist eohetbbe ort OO 5 e owe checksum xor from O byte to fifth byte For MW command oftset byte ox01 The operating sign to MW Ox Address Low byte Ox Bit Address High byte If there is a 0x10 included in address and insert a 702 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual sending byte The byte has to be even due to operating for word If byte is 0x10 then insert a 0x10 after it the byte will move to next position The data of initial address for corresponding address for 1 2 byte n is byte of data if data includes 0x10 and then insert a 0x10 the sending byte number remains same then n n 1 and so Below is an example for observation process of communication If Master has a Ox0a in MW3 according to this protocol master will communicate with slave immediately and slave will put the Ox0a in corresponding MW3 the procedure is as following Master sending ST X 0x02h Slave receives STX 0x02h from master and sending ACK Ox06h to master Master receives ACK Ox06h from slave Master sending 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 as shown below offset oyte 0x01 The operating sign for MW OO 1 0x03 Address Low byte Bit Address High byte
412. s index 20 32bit address index 23 32bit address index 24 32bit address index 25 32bit address index 26 32bit address index 27 O T 32bit address index 31 ORW HMI R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W w w 597 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 13 MTP File Information LW 9100 LW 9116 LW 9118 LW 9120 LW 9122 LW 9123 LW 9124 16bit project name 16 words 32bit project size in bytes 32bit project size in K bytes 32bit compiler version 16bit project compiled date year 16bit project compiled date month 16bit project compiled date day Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication Read Write Control Address Description Local Remote MACRO HMI HMI LB 9055 MODBUS server COM 1 receives a request when ON LB 9056 MODBUS server COM 2 receives a request when ON LB 9057 MODBUS server COM 3 receives a request when ON LB 9058 MODBUS server ethernet receives a request when ON LW 9270 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM 1 LW 9271 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server COM 1 LW 9272 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM 1 LW 9275 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM 2 LW 9276 16bit
413. s using the new functions starts from creating a macro ends in executing simulation 1 How to read or write a string from a device Create a new macro Edit the content Works pace aie zi macro command main i 3 4 Char str 20 5 6 2oringGet Sstr O Local HMI LW UO 20 7 stringset str O Local HMI LW SO 20 5 5i end macro command The first function StringGet is used to read a string from LWO0 LW19 and store it into the str array The second function StringSet is used to output the content of str array Add ASCII Input and Function Key a objects in window 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro _1 551 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FK_0 N idea Read address PL name Lacal HMI wr Setting Address PLC name Local HMI Device type Li Address oOo System tag User defined tag Address Format DODD range 0 10799 Index register Read address PLL name Local HMI wg Setting PLC name Local HMI we Device ype Ly k Address System tag User defined tag Address Format DODD range 0 10799 Index register 552 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line or On line simulation Follow the steps below to operate the executing project
414. se the same font for the labels of Message OK and Cancel Additionally only when selecting Label Library for Message the use of Label Library for OK and Cancel 389 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual buttons can be enabled System Message Confirmation required Message Please confirm the operation Use label library fi Cancel Cancel Font Times New Roman Deny Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function write command only is turned ON Allow Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function write command only is turned OFF 390 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library EB8000 provides Shape Library and Picture Library features to add visual effects on objects Each Shape and Picture includes up to 256 states This chapter expatiates on how to create Shape Library and Picture Library For usage of shape and picture library please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties 14 1 Creating Shape Library A shape is a graph composed of lines rectangles and circles A complete Shape can possess more than one state and each state can include two parts frame and inner See State O State 1 the illustration below The frame and inner of a shape can be used separately or together by an object Click Call up Shape Library and the Shape Lib
415. seeeseeaes 740 34 2 AQNO ING WD Ala TOC geste receet cancenetacsaeee ces ecenedeannen densanes tonne santennesastecsaeerseenases 142 AS FSC E E E E E E E 145 944 WISE CMAN COU Saas ciacdiacszcedieecnertyucc EER EEEE EEEE EE E TEE EESE EEEE 148 J4 WIOCGUIC CIINCG rE EEAO EEG 149 Chapter 39 FTP Server ADDIICAUON asesesnastunesonatuosdcoodereaunadunasusedenesssedaneaesadunancsadnnoneseaened 153 Oe WOO IG i OCINE se sccscsesanessnsserssaracocacesaeonseenstoassonssoaceevieesscasssasecasecacccesesescesteeasere 153 35 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data cccccccccceeseeseeseeseeeeeeeees 153 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 1 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation Software Download EasyBuilder Pro configuration software from EasyBuilder Pro CD or visiting Weintek Labs Inc s website at http www weintek com to obtain all software versions available including Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese English Italian Korean Spanish and French version and latest upgraded files Hardware Requirements Recommended CPU INTEL Pentium II or higher Memory 64MB or higher Hard Disk 2 5GB or higher Disc space available at least 10MB CD ROM 4X or higher Display 256 color SVGA with 800 x 600 resolution or greater Keyboard and Mouse Ethernet for project downloading uploading RS 232 COM At least one available RS 232 serial port required for on line simulatio
416. select Controlled by register option it is necessary to set the read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for the read address 242 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b Based upon time interval Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object In the table below it describes the address that control shape s state and position in different data format Data Format Address to control Address to control ii ee rae For example if the designated register is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned then LW100 represents object s state LW101 represents position In the picture below LW100 2 LW101 3 so the object s state is 2 and position is 3 pasitian D boston Q position d pasitian 4 POSITION 2 POS ian I w100 2 wo Wi0l 3 lf Based upon time interval is chosen the object automatically changes status and display location Time interval attributes is to set the time interval for states and positions Time interval attributes Postion speed O01 second s Image ce change Backer oye Imase update time 01 condis Position speed Position changes speed the unit is 0 1 second Supposed that Speed is set to 10 the object will change its position every 1 second Backward cycle If the object has four positions position 0 position 1 pos
417. ser s Manual address Notification Notification on valid input system writes to When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device When inputting invalid values it can now automatically set the status of designated address 211 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Homeric Input Object Eg General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Mode Touch Ww Input order Enable Input order A Group E a stop sequential mnput function after input Keyboard Use a popup keypad Hide title bar Window no 50 Keypad 1 Integer v Popup position 00 relative to HMI screen m 6 oO oO Hint If the keyboard is an USB keyboard on mndivectidivect window or on the same window please don t check Use a popup keypad Restart the keypad if input value is out of range Setting Description S Touch The object enters input state when a user touches it Bit control The object ente
418. set 1 send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send_ data device_name device_type address offset and data_count are the same as SetData macro_command main int i bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 for i 0 to 29 b i true next fori 0 to 49 477 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual dli i 2 next i fori Oto9 f i i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 setDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words SetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command GetError err macro_command main short err char byData 10 478 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual GetDataEx byData 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 1 10 read 10 bytes if err is equal to O it is successful to execute GetDataEx GetErr err save an error code to err end macro_command PURGE PURGE com_port Description com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges
419. set 1 Receives data from the PLC Data is stored into read _data start read_data start data_count 1 Data_count is the amount of received data In general read_data is an array but if data_count is 1 read_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to read one word data from PLC macro_command main short read_data_1 2 read data 2 GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 GetData read data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro_command Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model Creneral evstem pettine meCULITY Device list Mame Location Device type Local HMI Local HMI Local MiT60S61 220 x Disable MA N A Local Ser MODBUS RTU Local Free Protocol COMI Ee 0 Remote F 1FATEE FE beres Remote IP210 66 117 2 FATEE FB series COMI Ris Device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding 470 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual method is BCD
420. set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start 499 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Description This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc char set1 20 abc char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringIncluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 gecabba char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringIncluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 abc char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 StringIncluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command success StringExcluding source start set start destination start source set start destination start success StringExcluding source start set destination start success StringExcluding success StringExcluding source set destination start Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters that are not in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is also in the target
421. set to the conditions on the right Operator Descripton Exame o Modulo division return A B 5 remainder 435 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Comparison Description Operators lt lt Less than or equal to if A lt 10 thenB 5 Greater than ifA gt 10thenB 5 Greater than or equal if A gt 10 then B 5 to Equal to if A 10 then B 5 Not equal to if A lt gt 10 then B 5 Logic Operators Description Exampe or fiogeor MA gt 100rB gt SthenC 10 No iogcainot inotAthenB 5 Shift and bitwise operators are used to manipulate bits within char short and int variable types with both signed and unsigned The priority of these operators is from left to right within the statement lt lt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the A B lt lt 8 left a specified number of positions gt gt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the right a specified number of positions Bitwise Operators Description Example amp BitwiseAND fasBaot O O Ti wer fase oo wer O asro O One s complement Jaee OOOO 436 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Priority of All Operators The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest is as follows Operations within parenthesis are carried out first Arithmetic operations Shift and Bitwise operations Comparison operations Logic operations Assignment Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserv
422. sition After completing all settings when users execute PLC application on PC the HMI will be switched automatically to pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC will be suspended this moment and it will be resumed if the application closes as follows Weintek Virtual Serial Port PLC At this moment the application is controlling PLC directly via virtual serial port 686 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 2 COM Port Mode Source COM Port Destination COM Port soa i PLC PC Application Source COM Port The port is used to connect HMI with PC Destination COM Port The port is used connect HMI with PLC When using COM port mode of pass through users should correctly set the properties of source COM port and Destination COM port 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode There are two ways to enable COM port mode of pass through function 1 Use Project Manager 2 Use system registers LW 9901 and LW 9902 LW 9901 pass through source COM port 1 3 COM1 COM3 LW 9902 pass through destination COM port 1 3 COM1 COM3 Note When finish using Pass Through function users should click Stop Pass through to disable it so that HMI can start to communicate with PLC Start pass through in project manager Click Pass through button in Project Manager to set the communication parameters 687 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pass throuzh Ethe
423. sition Pinned mize shape rectangle size Trajectory Setting Description SSC lt CS s sS Shape To set the size of the shape rectangle size Trajectory To set the position of each point on the moving path 245 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 15 Bar Graph Overview Bar graph object displays PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value Configuration Click the Bar Graph icon on the toolbar the Bar Graph dialogue box will be shown up fill in each items of settings click OK button a new Bar Graph Object will be created See the picture below G2 2 pm eye E LE oek ne The following picture shows the General tab of the bar graph object 246 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Bar Graph Object General Cutline shape Read address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Cancel Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word devices that controls the bar graph display Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The following picture shows the Outline tab of the bar graph object 247 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Bar Graph Object General Cutline Shape j Attribute type Nomi V
424. splayed Word Address Last displayed graph a Display Control No of Data 40 20 w Data 3 Data 1 NOTE During the period between c and d do not change the content of Control No of Data and Data it might cause error for trend curve plot How to clear a trend curve a Write 2 to Control word address all the trend curves will be cleared b The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve is cleared 288 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Word Address Cl No of Data 40 30 20 w Data 3 Last displayed graph 40 4 Data 6 Clears the previous Data 7 graph display Even if there is data the graph does not display How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display Note data block start from control word address 2 c Write 3 to Control word address the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Last displayed graph F Conia Redraw screen No of Data 40 40 Data 1 7 Data 2 20 Data 3 Data 1 10 Data 4 Data 5 Clears the previous a graph display then uses ai the current data to display the graph ag
425. ss Read address Separated address for X and Y data Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Index register for read address The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW100 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW101 X data 2 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW103 X data 4 reads value from reading address LW104 X data 5 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW102 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW103 297 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual X data 0 reads value from reading address LW104 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW105 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW106 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW10 7 If you check Separated address for X and Y data it allows you to set different address for X and Y axis respectively Read address PLC name Local HMI peparated address for X and Y data data PLL name Setting Address Liy w 16 bit Unsigned Y data P
426. st Selection button which is used to Enable Disable Fast Selection window 93 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual control Every setting of the Fast Selection button is in System Parameter Settings Please refer to the dialog below oy stem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System pettine SEeCUrTy Fast selection button Atuibue Enable Position Left vy ide bution when HMT starts Apart from Enable Disable Fast Selection window by Fast Selection button system register also provides the following addresses for users to Enable Disable certain functions in order to control fast selection window button The related registers are listed below Please refer to Chapter 22 system reserved words and bits for more details LB 9013 FS window control Enable open Disable close LB 9014 FS button control Enable open Disable close LB 9015 FS window button control Enable open Disable close 6 1 4 System Message Window Window no 5 8 are the defaults of system message windows Window Description Window no 5 is the PLC When the communication between PLC and HMI is Response message disconnected this message window will pop up window automatically right on the window opened previously Window 6 is the HMI When failing to connect with remote HMI this message connection message window will pop up automatically window
427. stant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short checksum XORSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is 0x1 end macro command Description Calculates 16 bit CRC of the variables from source start to source start count 1 Puts in the 16 bit CRC into result Result must be a variable Data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short 16bit_CRC CRC data 0O 16bit_CRC 5 16bit CRC is Oxbb2a end macro_command Name ouer O 466 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual OUTPORT source start device_name data_count Description Sends out the specified data from source start to source start count 1 to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet Device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device Data_count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable To use an OUTPORT function a Free Protocol device must be created first as follows Device Model General System Setting Security l Device list Mo Mame Location Device type Interface IF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local MT6056i 320 x Disable Nih ad Local Server MODBUS ETU Device scal Free Protocol COM Ii 3200 E 5 1 RS232 Device Properties Name MODBUS RTU Device CHMI O
428. starting address BYTE 2 command 3 low byte of starting address BYTE 3 command 4 high byte of quantity of registers BYTE 4 command 5 low byte of quantity of registers BYTE 5 command 6 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 6 command 7 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 So a read request is designed as follows char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 524 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 starting address 4x_1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read _ no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 Lastly use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC OUTPORT command 0O MODBUS RTU Device 8 send read request After sending out the request use INPORT to get the response from PLC Depending on the protocol the content of the response is as follows the total byte is 9 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command function code BYTE 1 command 2 byte count BYTE 2 command 3 high byte of 4x_1 BYTE 3 command 4 low byte of 4x_1 BYTE 4 command 5 high byte of 4x_2 BYTE 5 command 6 high byte of 4x_
429. string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is 500 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc char set1 20 ge char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringExcluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 cabbage char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringExcluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 ge char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 StringExcluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command String ToUpper success String ToUpper source start destination start success StringToUpper source destination start Description Convert all the characters in the source string to uppercase characters and store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful
430. sult result is 2 end macro command ASIN ASIN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic sine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro_command main 452 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual float source result ASIN 0 8660 result result is 60 source 0 5 ASIN source result result is 30 end macro_command Name ACOS ACOS source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic cosine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ACOS 0 8660 result result is 30 source 0 5 ACOS source result result is 60 end macro_command ATAN ATAN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ATAN 1 result result is 45 source 1 732 ATAN source result result is 60 end macro_command 453 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Name LOG LOG source result Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a number Source can be either a variable or a constant Result must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result LOG source result result is approximately 4 6052 end macro_command LOG10 LOG10 source result Des
431. sult won t go less than the value in Bottom limit Attribute Set Style Automatic JOG down to low limit Dec value E Bottom Lint E Time terial 1 0 second is i Periodical bounce Periodically bouncing function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in Upper limit and then subtract the value set in Inc value from the value of the word device with the regulated interval set until the result value reaches the value in the Bottom limit For example the value in the word device will change periodically from 0 10 then from 10 0 Attribute set style Periodic step up dow to hieh i Low limit 0 High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval j Periodical step up Stepping up function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in the High limit and the 188 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual value of the word device will return to the value of the Low limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of O 1 2 9 10 0 1 2 A thri
432. syBuilder8000 User s Manual float source result COS 90 result result is O source 60 GetData source Local HMI LW O 1 COS source result result is 0 5 end macro_command TAN source result Description Calculate the tangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result TAN 45 result result is 1 source 60 TAN source result result is 1 732 end macro_command COT source result Description Calculate the cotangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result COT 45 result result is 1 source 60 COT source result result is 0 5774 451 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command Name SEC SEC source result Description Calculate the secant of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SEC 45 result result is 1 414 source 60 SEC source result if source is 60 result is 2 end macro_command CSC source result Description Calculate the cosecant of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result CSC 45 result result is 1 414 source 30 CSC source re
433. t Es ESCI UNICODE FK_14 is used as the ENTER key and its settings AS CILVUNICODE mode OBackpace OC O Ex ESCI UNICODE Function Key s other than FK_11 and FK_14 are mostly used to input number or text For example FK_0 is used for inputting number 1 and its settings ASCITUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clear Es ASCI UNICODE Select a suitable Picture for each Function Key object GP_0O is a picture object which is placed in the bottom layer as the background wuUue Step 3 Go to General tab in System Parameter Settings and click Add in Keyboard Add a keyboard dialog appears Select WINDOW 200 and press OK 162 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Add a keyboard window Window no 200 Keyboard Cancel As illustrated below a new item 200 Keyboard will be added to Keyboard in General tab in System Parameter Settings oy stem Parameter Settings x Font Extended Memo Printen Backup server Device Model reneral system pettine mec wcity Fast selection button Ate Position C Hide button when HMI starts CTBT SAveT Back light saver None w minute is pcreen sawer None aye minute ts Options Starup window no 10 WINDOW O10 we Common window Above base window we Object layout Eeyboard caret color po RW A enabled
434. t remote HMI 4 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9818 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP3 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9819 16bit remote HMI 4 s port no R R W R W LW 9820 16bit remote HMI 5 s IPO IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9821 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP1 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9822 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP2 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9823 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9824 16bit remote HMI 5 s port no R R W LW 9825 16bit remote HMI 6 s IPO IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9826 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP1 IP address R R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9827 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP2 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9828 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP3 IP address R W R W R W IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 611 z z N N N N N N z N N N N Z Z zs z N N 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LW 9829 LW 9829 16bit remote HMI 6 s port no LW 9830 16bit remote HMI 7 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9831 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9832 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9833 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9834 16bit remote HMI 7 s port no LW 9835 16bit remote HMI 8 s IPO IP
435. t HMI data logs and event logs 75 hana z LW WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 3 General Parameters in General tab determine all properties related to screen display oystem Parameter Sethngs Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General aysen pettine SECUrItY Fast selection button Atte Position Hide button when HMI starts PCTRENL SVEL Back leht saver minute is _ Enable back light when alam occurs MCLEE Swer minute is Saver window no Options Set widow no Common window Object layout Eeyboard caretcolor i RW A enabled Event Use LWO4 50 9455 as time tags of event logs BCD se Extra no of events Eewboard 50 Keypad 1 Integer 51 Keypad 2 Integer 52 Keypad 3 Integer 53 Keypad 4 Integer 54 Keypad 5 Integer 55 Keypad 6 Integer 56 Keymad 7 HEX Project protection 1 series only Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294901 750 Tf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Use LY 9046 9047 to change HMI key LBSO46 indicates check result hey error when status i on Setting Description Fast Setting all the attributes for fast selection button that is designated as selection window number 3 button a Attribute 76 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Diable Enable Enable or disable fast selection window Select Enable and click Set
436. tatus with PLC USB ejm ies LB 9190 auto connection for PLC USB 1 when ON CAESAREA LB 9191 PLC status USB 1 set on to retry connection LB 9193 auto connection for PLC USB 2 when ON LB 9194 PLC status USB 2 set on to retry connection 609 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 19 Communication Status with Remote HMI Read Write Control Address Description MACRO HMI HMI LB 9068 auto connection for remote HMI 1 when ON R W R W R W LB 9069 auto connection for remote HMI 2 when ON R W R W R W LB 9070 auto connection for remote HMI 3 when ON R W R W R W LB 9071 auto connection for remote HMI 4 when ON R W R W R W LB 9072 auto connection for remote HMI 5 when ON R W R W R W LB 9073 auto connection for remote HMI 6 when ON R W R W R W LB 9074 auto connection for remote HMI 7 when ON R W R W LB 9075 auto connection for remote HMI 8 when ON R W R W R W LB 9100 remote HMI 1 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9101 remote HMI 2 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9102 remote HMI 3 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9103 remote HMI 4 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9104 remote HMI 5 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9105 remote HMI 6 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9106 remote HMI 7 status set on to retry connection R W R W R W LB 9107 remote HMI 8 status set on to retry connection R
437. te 754 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E GREE te HAJR LEAD se88 O O g Orm Pax FF recipe_a rcp Note After updating recipe rcp HMI must be restarted in one minute or use LB 9048 and LB 9047 to restart HMI Set LB 9048 to ON and then set LB 9047 to ON to successfully restart HMI LB 9047 reboot HMI set ON when LB9048 is ON LB 9048 reboot HMI protection 755
438. ted as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 32 4 4 2 Reply If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 32 4 5 RC Read Coils 32 4 5 1 Request This command reads up to 99 consecutive coils from the LB memory area of HMI The command is always 14 bytes long Byte 1 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 3 5 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute 720 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to read from Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of coils to read up to 99 Must be 2 bytes long Byte 12 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes 13 14 The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12 Example Read 12 coils starting from address LB100 from the HMI at Station 7 This will read coils LB100 LB111 Byte 1 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 2 3 5 The checksum bytes 13 and 14 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 12 30 37 52 43 30 31 30 30 30 32 03 222 The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 22 32 4 5 2 Reply The reply length is L N 8 Where N the number of requested devices If the command is s
439. teeeeeenaes 619 DZ BAGY CCC 5 E TEE T E ssaeenisasasesieosacecieoaseeisoae 620 2220 TASS ROU Se CIO arses E E E A E E 621 22 26 Disable PLC No Response Dialog BOX cccccccceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeceeeaeeeseeeaees 622 22 2 HMI and Project 0 See ee eee 623 22 28 Fast Selection Window Control cascrscecosancoxceduntaceedanenasedaneavedunancsadaneensedenearsadeneds 624 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2229 WUE ODECE FUN CO as ges sere seater rerne NEEE EEN E E 625 22 30 Local Remote Operation Restrictions ccccecceecseeceeeeeeceeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeenaes 626 Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers aicscsnsosnsconnanannannnenonnsnsasasnsemuaseeranrasrensnannnenananness 627 Chapter 24 Recipe EdilOl e serresosrer ineen en rer E ear E O E E EE EE UNN EE OES 630 2A MEMEO OUIGUION e osaconnasseaenetoansonesonnssinad E NE E E REESE 630 24 2 Settings of Recipe Editor ccc cccccsceceeeceeeeeeceeeceeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeesaees 632 Chapter 25 EasyConverter cccccceeccceccceeeceeecnseeceeeceueecaeeceeeceueesaeeceeeseaeesseesseeseasenaees 634 201 INU OdUCUON ession espns ee e ad e io ade a a a ae EEES 634 29 L CUNS Or E aS VOC ONV CMe i asccsscossecsdcansscnicanssonsnenssanasaracanseanseaaicontsosicosteonieansecrael 635 25 2 1 How to Export to Mi gt 6 ER ee eee ee ee ene ee ee ee eee 635 20 2 2 HOW 10 USE Scaling FUNCION accdcacecandenrecsadessaescdesuacacdesadasdeerseasdeavsceantearneasiens
440. ten Backup Server Model General System methine SECUYITY Location Device type Interface Local MT6056T MTSO56T Disable Ne MODBUSs server Local MODBUS Server EthemetiIP Local Port s000 564 Ne WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 19 1 2 Read from Write to MODBUS Server HMI the client can read from write to another HMI the server via MODBUS protocol Add a new device in the project of client If client s PLC I F is set as Ethernet please select MODBUS TCP IP as PLC type and fill in the correct IP the IP of server HMI and Port no Name MODBUS TCP IP Ethernet CHMI PLE Location EE i v PLC type MODBUS TCP IP Ethernet K Y 1 50 MODBUS TCPIP so PLC I F Ethernet v PLC default station no 1 Use UDP User Datagram Protocol IF 192 168 1 111 Port s000 Settings IE Address Settings IPaddress 192 168 1 111 Port no e000 Timeout sec 1 0 Turn around delay trois o Send ACK delay rms 0 Parameter 1 o Parameter o Parameter 3 0 Cancel If the client use RS232 485 interface the PLC type must be set as MODBUS RTU Please make sure the communication parameter setting is correct 565 Lid gs WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Propert
441. th of output string is limited to 256 characters The argument part is optional macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a s1 3276 7 f1 1 234567 end macro_command 3 Newly Added LB9059 disable MACRO TRACE function when ON When set ON the output message of TRACE won t be sent to EasyDiagnoser 4 Users can directly execute EasyDiagnoser exe from Project Manager In Project Manager current HMI on line will be listed users can simply select the HMI to be watched Please note that Project Port should be the same as Port No used in project file 546 L EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WE NTEK ii Project Manazer Sigles HMI IP Password Select HMI fx Type MTSO00 x Series Settings m i Hbi Mame Default HMI 192 168 1 103 Tina MT 31 O01 Connection 192 168 1 117 nicolas rte 04h Ethernet Search 192 168 1 118 tnicolas_ 91007 192 169 1 208 fkevin_MTS070iH HMP Search All 192 168 1 211 MT8070iH Katte 192 166 1 226 susan hmil 15 20091002 or later supports 197 168 1 233 Memes lnewi Project Por 8000 t Utility EE EasyBuilderso00 SESE EasyAddressviewer EasyPrinter m aia EasyDiagnoser EER Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk 5 Download proje
442. the HMI by CF card or USB memory stick This function is to build this kind of download data as shown below Build Download Data for CF Card USB Disk Project Manager select the folder to save download data POUICES Froject PLEASE INPUT XOB FILE NAME Recipe K W1 PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe A RV 44 PLEASE INFUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME 20 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Insert CF card or USB stick to PC and press Browse to assign the file path or directory name and then press Build The whole contents of the source files will be downloaded to USB stick or CF card Select the folder to save download data Project Press Browse to assign the desired Recipe RW specific files for download data Recipe A RW_A Data log Note The path of download data should avoid designating root directory of PC For example c also directory name such as f is illegal and should be written as f 2 2 1 Steps to Download Project via USB or CF Card Take downloading data to the folder named 123 K 123 in USB stick for example When USB stick project or recipe included is inserted to the HMI a pop up Download Upload dialog will appear after few seconds Please select Download and input Download Password Check Download project files and Download history files i
443. the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 5 Turn the IN to OFF before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains OFF Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Tl remains OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the ET equals the PT the Q and TI are turned OFF Point 4 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and the ET reset to O Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 6 Turn the IN to ON before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains ON Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Tl and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 2 When the ET equals PT the TI and Q are turned OFF Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 4 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains OFF 383 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Accumulated Off delay Point 2 When the IN turns OFF and if the ET is less than the PT the TI be turned OFF The ET is in the retentive state Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON The timer measurement starts again an
444. the angle range is 0 360 degrees The following pictures show several results of different settings Start degree 290 End degree 70 2 Start degree 120 End degree 240 K Start degree 40 End degree 140 2 Start degree 225 End degree 315 Background Set the object s background color and profile color Full circle When the Full circle is selected the object will display the whole circle 257 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual otherwise the object will display the defined degree range See the picture below Full cirele non full circle Transparent When the Transparent is selected the object will not display the background and profile color See the picture below To set the tick mark s number and color Pointer To set Pointer s style length width and color Pin point To set pin point s style radius and color The following pictures show the Limit tab and the sign of low and high limit set in the Limit tab 258 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limite Shape Value zen 0 E o Range lirit v Enable Low M Mid l High With 3 F Use user defined radius v Damamnic limits PL name Lacal HMI Ww Setting cale label Font Ari w Cancel Setting Description To set object s display range Meter display ob
445. the control address coming from Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type select the device type where the control address coming from Control address Control address is used to control the display of XY curve for each channel 1 Plot XY curve Write 1 to control address the system will plot the XY curve the previous XY curve if exists would not be clear The system will reset the control address after operation complete 2 Clear XY trend curve Write 2 to control address the system will clear all the previous XY curves and reset the control address after operation complete 3 Refresh XY trend curve Write 3 to control address the system will clear the previous XY curve and plot the new XY curve and reset the control address after operation complete 296 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual No of data address This address store the number of XY data Each channel can have up to 1023 XY data Setting the channels detail for graph display Read Address PLC name select the PLC where the control address coming from Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object PLC addre
446. the object s Label tab Hew Bit Lamp Object Ed General Security Shape Label Use label Use label hbrary Label tag MENNA AET Use bitmap font Label pump Alamna E T LF 2 Attribute Font Color a mize 16 l we C Italic C Underline Duplicate these attributes to Movement Direction No movement Content When Use label library is selected Content dialog shows the content of selected label tag and the settings of Font type are also included in the Label Library 410 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 5 Settings of Multi Language When users would like to have the object s text to show multi language except for using Label Library it needs to use the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode The value of LW 9134 can be set from O to 7 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different Languages The way of using LW 9134 will differ if the languages are not all chosen when compiling the downloaded file For example If 5 languages are defined by user in Label Library as Language Traditional Chinese Language2 Simplified Chinese Language3 English Language4 French and Languaged Japanese If only Language 1 3 5 are downloaded by user the corresponding language of the value in LW 9134 will be 0 gt Language Traditional Chinese 1 gt Language3 English 2 gt Languaged Japanese Another example below demonstrates h
447. the state of the bit device will be set to ON or OFF Configuration Click the Toggle Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Toggle Switch Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item and press OK button a new toggle switch object will be created See the pictures below 198 Y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Togele Switch Object General Security Shape Label Read address PL name Setting m Invert senal Write address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Write when button is released Attribute Sitch style Macro Execute macro Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address System tag Index register of the bit device that control the display of toggle switch state Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address 199 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address Attribute System tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write when button
448. the written project file to HMI but still see how it is shown and operated on PC Users don t need to connect PLC with PC under this mode On the contrary On line simulation is executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately set the communication parameters When simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 minutes simulation limit Before executing On line Off line Simulation features please select the source of XOB file Look wc C praeci hai 7 om Ej a00 xob Sa enti 21 _demo cob ej aoe0test xob SS MTP co St 20061016 00b Tf RemoteHML xob E Button oah Tierplteti i xob f Drect vdo xob z Test xob E indirect Window xob El Test_AB_OF1 xob Gal MTS xob Tl Tast label xob EEUMT 12_demoZ0061005 00b T TestAddressIndex mob S MT812_demo xob Ti TestMutLarg xob S MTOI FHN web i S MTEDDUDemo besk wob Hy Documente x f Brania ah t IS mt 120_deeng_203 20b My Computer a Fie nam ES My N Files of type MT S000 dowedoad faf xob When executing on line off line simulation right click to use two functions 25 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Exit simulation Run EasyDiagnoser Screenshot a Run EasyDiagnoser Execute EasyDiagnoser to monitor current communication status b Screenshot Capture and save current screen image as picture file in the screenshot folder under installation directory 26
449. ting the number of items 377 L WE NTEK Mapping tab EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Item address This address is for storing the contents of the items ASCII Use ASCII as item contents UNICODE Use UNICODE as item contents such as Chinese characters The UNICODE to be used must also be used in other objects EasyBuilder8000 will then compile these font files in advance and save to HMI when downloading only in this way the UNICODE can be displayed correctly The length of each item As for item length its now restricted to less than 1024 when number of items times The length of each item Note The system will automatically disable Mapping table when Item address mode is selected 378 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Option List Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label Item data E met default Error notification Enable Set ON O Set OFF Setting Description Mapping table This table displays all available states items their item data and values To change the number of available items please refer to Option list tab gt Attribute gt Item no Item The system lists all available items Each item represents a state that will be displayed in the list This field is read only Value Here user can assign value for each item basing on the following two criteria a For reading If any change of t
450. tings to set the attributes including color and text b Position Select the position on the screen of HMI where this button appears If Left is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom left if Right is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom right Screen a Back light saver saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here back light will be off The setting unit is minute Back light will be on again once the screen is touched If none is set the back light will always be on while using b Screen saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here The current screen will automatically switch to a window assigned in Saver window no The setting unit is minute If none is set this function is disabled c Saver window no To assign a window for screen saver a Startup window no Designate the window shown when start up HMI b Common window Above base window Below base window Above base window The objects in the common window window 4 will be shown in each base window This selection determines the layers these objects are placed above or below the objects in the base window c Keyboard caret color 77 L WE NTEK Event Keyboard Project protection i series only EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set the color of caret that appears when inputting in Numeric Input and Word Input objects d O
451. tion Click the ASCII Input or ASCII Display icon on the toolbar and the New ASCII Input Object or New ASCII Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item press OK button a new ASCII Input Object or ASCII Display Object will be created See the pictures below Ast I i SILL ee A i E LEE PASLAR Pa The difference between the New ASCII Display Object and New ASCII Input Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab of the New ASCII Input Object 221 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ASCII Input Object General Data Entry Security Shape Font bwa O Mask Use UNICODE Reverse highwlow byte Read address PLO name Local HMI Setting Notification O Set ON Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PL name Local HMI v Setting Cancel Setting Description Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all texts Use Click Use UNICODE to display data in UNICODE format Otherwise the UNICODE system displays the character in ASCII format This feature can be used with function key UNICODE Not every Unicode has corresponding font stored in the system The font of UNICODE is only available for those Unicode character that registered function key R
452. tting 0 disable 1 enable Bit 01 Setting on individual day 0 disable 1 enable NOTE 1 If setting on individual day is OFF the system still reads all 11 word devices but ignores the end time data 2 If setting on individual day is ON be sure to enter all start and end time information If 2 or more of the start end day bits are turned ON simultaneously 370 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual an error occurs d Start End Day Start Day Time setting address 3 End Day Time setting address 7 Designates the day used as a trigger for the start termination action 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Bit Bit 00 Sunday 0 none 1 select Bit 01 Monday 0 none 1 select Bit 02 Tuesday 0 none 1 select Bit 03 Wednesday 0 none 1 select Bit 04 Thursday 0 none 1 select Bit 05 Friday 0 none 1 select Bit 06 Saturday 0 none 1 select e Start End Time Start Time Time setting address 4 to 6 End Time Time setting address 8 to 10 Set the time values used for the start termination actions in the following ranges Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 If you specify a value outside the range an error will occur NOTE The time data format shall be 16 bit unsigned system doesn t accept BCD format 371 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Prohibit tab Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Prohibit PLE name Local
453. tual_com 5 4B Tags Extended Memory E Printer Backup SEIVEI General Svetem pettine Location Device type Interface MT 6070iHMTS070 Disable Local PLC 4 Allen BradleyE Locel Allen Bradley E Ethemet P 192 168 1 130 Port a File name AB Tags v Open _ My Network Files of type RSLogis 5000 Import Export File CSV EazyHuilderd000 A Import tag information succesfully 4 Project description Step 4 In object dialog select PLC click Tag and select a controller tag Mew Hit Lamp Object General Security shape Eead addres PLC name Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix t nal Setting Tag o 4 Name Data Type Description ee Controller Tags ArayBool BOOL 256 be bl BOOL i VarBooal BOOL Blinking Mode IE ca 741 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 34 2 Adding New Data Type Step 1 Right click on the assigned data type usually labeled as User Defined then click New Data Type to start editing D AB Data Type Editor Data Types H Mame pa Strngs Nev Dete Tore Predefined Description H Module Defined Data Type Descriptione 0 member Step 2 Input the Name of the data type Description can be skipped For adding data member click Add 742 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual AB Data Type Edito
454. twork EB8000 provides following methods for data transmission 1 HMI to HMI communication 2 PC to HMI communication 3 Operating the PLC connected to other HMI There are two ways of Ethernet communication one is to use RJ45 straight through cable with hubs Another is to use RJ45 crossover cable with no hubs but this is limited to the condition of point to point connection HMI to HMI or PC to HMI The following illustrates ways of how to set up and perform the Ethernet connection x 4 Control center iL a Ethernet Swich Hub Ethernet a crossover cable Ethernet b d s LN OOODgLN crossover cable 5 4 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication Ethernet crossover cable QOOUE LIN Different HMI can monitor and control each other s data through Ethernet network With system reserved register LB and LW one HMI can master performance of other HMI s One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of other 32 HMI simultaneously Here is an example of communicating two HMI HMI A and HMI B When HMI A wants to use a set bit object to control the address LB123 of HMI B the procedure for setting the Project files MTP of HMI A is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of the two HMI Refer to the related chapter for details Suppose the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set as 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Ru
455. uage 2 8 only font size can be changed and other settings follows language 1 Bee Aon Lamp Obert Rew Ward Lamp Objet i Generel Security Sheane Fabal Qemerl Sscunty Share Label Cita hitai Citi bal it Use ale iry basel kig Laba D lie bel ia kalel mg Laka 0 ie tse batnap Joni lake Ll Dhow itera focal LobelLiiery Lengo J tangas 2 Sie 0 IE Ii lake lt MAH tobiie Foni lige Laft w Abm mT Uair Di plkab pam aftnilreiet t Dipitet he sinbi i Bary 2 Every angone AD Every dale Every language All Mow nasil T ET Destia Ho riaria we Diribin Laven Cenei 178 L WE NTEK 13 3 Set Bit EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Overview The Set Bit object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode defines a touch area users can activate the touch area to set the state of the bit device to be ON or OFF When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration Click the Set Bit icon in the toolbar and the New Set Bit Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Bit object will be created See the pictures below ru Leja lt fa 30 ua th er Dor F g 179 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Set Bit Object
456. uccessful the reply length will be at least 9 bytes but could be as long as 107 bytes It consists of the STX followed by one byte for each requested device then the ETX and Checksum Byte Bytes Byte Byte Byte Byte Bytes 1 2 3 S 2 3 4 5 L 4 4 5 STX Statio RC Data Data Data Data 4 n 1 2 3 Data N 1 721 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Byte Byte Byte L 3 L 2 L 1 L If the HMI contains the following data The values in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 L 2 In the event of an error the reply is Byte 1 Byte 2 3 Byte 4 5 Byte 6 32 4 6 WC Write Coils 32 4 6 1 Request This command writes up to 99 consecutive coils to the LB memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 14 722 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 15 bytes long but can be up to 113 bytes long Byt Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Byte Bytes 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 L 4 1 ST Station WC Addr No of Data Data Data 3 X Items 1 2 Data N 1 Byte Byte Byte L 3 L 2 L 41 L ETX Check sum Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to write to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of
457. ue below pops up during installation please click Continue Anyway Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Weintek Virtual Serial Port has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows P Tellme why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the corect operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue 4nyaray I 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual After process is completed the virtual COM port is displayed as follow Virtual COM Por PG lt gt PLO Cabia 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port Open System Properties gt Device Manager to check if the virtual serial port is installed successfully Ports COM amp LPT a Communications Pork OMS af Communications Pork OM F Printer Port LP sf Wieintek Virtual Serial Port COMB gt l Processors gE SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers 3 System devices lInivercal Serial Bore conkeollerc lf users want to change the number of virtual serial port please click Weintek Virtual Serial Port to open Port Settings Advanced as follows 682 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Dev
458. uled time in operation Scheduler O Contant General Time Set Prohibit Time setting address PLL name Lacal HMI w Setting etatus Acton mode otart tone daw ntact time how etext time minute etext time fecond End time idaw End time hourt End time rine End time econdi i Cancel User designates the Time setting address as the top address used to store time settings data The 11 word devices are automatically allotted Normally the format of the above word devices is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen only 0 15 bits are effective and users should zero the 16 31 bits a Control Time setting address 0 368 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The layout of the Control word is shown below Users set the time acquisition request bit ON 01 to make the system reads the Action mode Start time and End time and uses them as the new scheduled time 15 U Bit Reserved 0 fixed ol Bit 00 time acquisition request bit 0 no action 1 perform time read NOTE The system would not read start and end time data unless the time acquisition request bit is set ON b Status Time setting address 1 The layout of the Status word is shown below When the system competes the read operation it will turn the time acquisition complete bit ON 0 gt 1 Also if the read time data is incorrect the error notification bit will be t
459. ult LOBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x34 source 0x123 LOBYTE source result result is 0x23 end macro command HIBYTE HIBYTE source result Description Retrieves the high byte of a 16 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result HIBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x12 461 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual source 0x123 HIBYTE source result result is 0x01 end macro_command LOWORD LOWORD source result Description Retrieves the low word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result LOWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x5678 source 0x12345 LOWORD source result result is Ox2345 end macro command HIWORD HIWORD source result Description Retrieves the high word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result HIWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x1234 source 0x12345 HIWORD source result result is 0x0001 end macro_command 462 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 4 Bit Transformation GETBIT source result bit_pos Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data source into result Result s value will be O or 1 Source and bit_pos
460. upload indicator Local HMI Bit LB 9011 Read only LB 9012 data download upload indicator Local HMI Bit LB 9012 Read only LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF Local HMI Bit LB 9013 Read Write LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF Local HMI Bit LB 9014 Read Write LB 9015 FS window button control hide ON show OFF Local HMI Bit LB 9015 Read Write LB 9016 status is on when a client connects to this HMI Local HMI Bit LB 9016 Read Write LB 9017 disable write back in PLC control s change window Local HMI Bit LB 9017 Read Write 18 0012 dieshla maiice ciurenr fcat ON 1 acal HMT Rt 1R 0n1i2 Road Airita wan aunt WN Users can import MT500 tag to represent the address New Delete Delete All Settings Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSV Import CSV 581 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory 22 1 1 Bits Local Memory A 12079 DDDDD D a a Local Word Bits LW_ BIT 1079915 DDDDDdd DDDDD address dd bit no 00 15 Retentive 0 65535f DDDDDh Memory Bit DDDDD address Index h bit no 0 f Example 567a RW_Bit address 567 LW 9000 bit offset a Retentive RW_ Bit 0 524287f DDDDDh Memory Word DDDDD address Bits h bit no 0 f Retentive RW_A Bit 0 65535f DDDDh Memory A Word DDDDD address Bits h bit no 0 f 582 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 1 2 Words Local Memory
461. urn bits ON when state changes or malfunctions gt Status control address 3 The system will write file index when starting to play a video gt File index control address 4 Start time The system will write video start time when starting to play a video unit sec Always 0 gt Start time control address 5 The system will write video end time when starting to play a video unit sec gt End time control address 6 Update Enable video The system will write video elapsed time into playing playing time register in every update period time seconds playing Update Update period of playing time range between 1 to time period 60 sec Playing Update the video elapsed time periodically unit Video time sec gt Playing time control address 7 SD Play video files in SD card USB4 Play video files in USB1 Video USB2 Play video files in USB2 Folder name The name of the folder storing video files Users file store must put video files in a folder e g example instead of root directory location 337 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 Folder name couldn t be empty 2 Folder name couldn t include lt gt 3 A folder name must be composed entirely of ASCII characters Auto repeat When finish playing a video file the system will automatically play next video Attribute e g video 1 gt video
462. urned ON 01 15 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 time acquisition complete bit 0 null 1 read operation complete Bit Bit 01 error notification bit 0 no error 1 start or end time format is incorrect NOTE After system reads the time data and turns the time acquisition complete bit ON be sure to turn Control time acquisition request bit OFF Once this bit is turned OFF the system will set both the Status time acquisition complete bit and error notification bit to OFF 369 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ca m 4 v I I I I I I I I i i I HMI turn ON time acquisttidh I I I I i ON completion bit 5 8 i i Time acquisition i 1 6 i See ON l I l l Time acquisition request bit gp el PLCI trig l l Dg l 4 o 4 4 HMI confirmi time acquisition HMI confirmi time acquisition request bit is ON request bit is OFF pata reaa HMI read i completion bit OFF HMI set Wi Y l l l en an error occurs HMI turn ON error vid a ON eee 1 5 g Error notification bit notification bit l l l 1 HMI set OFE lt gt communication time lag HMI turn OFF the bit lt user turn OFF the bit c Action mode Time setting address 2 Enable and disable the Termination time action and Setting on individual day 15 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 Termination time se
463. urpose These address tags are divided into bit or word LB or LW After selecting System tag not only will the Device type displays the content of the chosen tag Address will also display the register chosen as shown below 125 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address PLC name Local HMI s Device type LB 9000 initialized as ON k Address Les000 MB ystern tag Address Format DDDDD range 0 11999 Index register The illustration below shows a part of system tags For further information please refer Chapter 16 Address Tag Library and Chapter 22 System Reserved Words and Bits Address PLC name Local HMI we Device type initialized as ON LB 9001 initialized as ON LB 900 2 initialized as ON LE 9005 initialized as ON Pm mmm ethene i RI Address Address format Index register Deciding to use Index register or not please refer to Chapter 11 Index Register for more information Selecting Data Type EB 8000 supports data types that are listed below Selecting correct data type is necessary especially while using address tag 16 bit B 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Float 126 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 127 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library Shape Library and Picture Library are used for enhanc
464. uses same registers as Local PLC1 674 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LB 9150 When ON auto connection with PLC COM 1 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC When ON auto connection with PLC COM 2 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC When ON auto connection with PLC COM 3 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC Description These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM 1 LB9200 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9200 LB9201 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9455 so On When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM2 LB9500 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9500 LB9501 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9755 SO On When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM3 LB9800 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9800 LB9801 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 10055 so on When O
465. ust be input if user wants to edit MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 Enable User 10 Enable User 11 _ Enable Password 19854561 range 1 4294967295 User 12 Project password MTP file 7 Enable After setting each time when try to open the project a window pops up for password input Password fe Limited to 3 times Note When using Window Copy function if the source file is protected by MTP password users have to input correct password for EasyBuilder8000 to execute window copy 698 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Window Copy Source project CADocuments and Settings Nicolas 666 mtp er aai EasyBuilders000 Password Limited to 3 times Source project is protected with password 699 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication MemoryMap communication protocol is similar to IBM 3764R it is used when memory data is with low variation High variation may cause MemoryMap overloading MemoryMap is used for communication between two devices When setting the MemoryMap with two devices one has to be set as Master and another is Slave In normal condition Master and Slave do not communicate except when the assigned memory data in one of them has changed Once data is identical the communication will stop So this is used for keeping the consistency of assigned part of data between two devices
466. ut result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source O source 1 source 2 source 3 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 5678 end macro_command ASCII2ZHEX source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source O source 1 source 2 source 3 ASCII2ZHEX source 0 result 4 result is Ox5678 end macro_command 458 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Name ASCII2FLOAT ASCII2FLOAT source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a float value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 float result source O 5 source 1 6 source 2 source 3 8 ASCII2ZFLOAT source 0 result 4 result is 56 8 end macro_command 459 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 3 Data Manipulation FlLL source start pr
467. variable year month day and return value must be variable The return_ value field is optional macro_command main short index 1 year month day short success if there exists an event log file named EL_20101230 evt with index 1 the result after execution success 1 year 2010 month 12 day 30 success FindEventLogDate index year month day end macro_command FindEventLoglndex return_value FindEventLogIndex year month day index or FindEventLogIndex year month day index Description A query function for finding the file index of specified event log file according to date The file index is stored into index year month and day are in the format of YYYY MM and DD respectively The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory 513 Lig WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file
468. wend end macro_command 3 Global variables and function call char g sub int fun int j int k int y SetData j Local HMI LB 14 1 GetData y Local HMI LB 15 1 g y return y end Sub macro_command main int a b a 2 b 3 fun a b setData i Local HMI LB 16 1 end macro_command 4 if statement macro_command main int k 10 J forj 0 to 10 KU J next if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if 536 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 else SsetData k 2 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 1 1 else if k 2 1 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 2 1 end If if k 0 O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 3 1 else if k 2 2 then setData k 3 Device 1 4x 4 1 else SetData k 4 Device 1 4x 5 1 end If end macro_command 5 while and wend statements macro_command main char 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if afi 120 then c 200 break end if i i 1 537 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual wend setData c Device 1 4x 2 1 end macro_command 6 break and continue statements macro_command main char 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali
469. will be automatically written into the word device Attribute met otyle met value When the backlight is turned from on to off the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute Set Style Set when backlight off met value 5 190 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 5 Function Key Overview Function key object is used to change base window pop up window and close window It can also be used to design the keypad buttons Configuration Click the Function Key icon in the toolbar and the Function Key Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press the OK button a new function key object will be created See the pictures below 191 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Foncthon Key Object General Security Shape Label Dewa O OS Activate after button is released Change full erveen window O Change common window Display popup window 50 Keypad 1 Integer v O Reto to previous window Close window ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Ex ASCII UNICODE O Execute macro Window title bar Hard copy screen to USB disk or printer O Screen hard copy Notification O Set ON Set OFF PLL name Local HMI Ww Setting Function Key object provides the following operation modes Setting Description Active after If this function is
470. wn below 428 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Works pace WorkSpace 2 6 27 GetDataf OK O Local HMI LB 28 29 6 for J O to 3 30 Tiro roro set qncurrencH 31 qnlurrentMCount 1 32 setDatatgqnCurrentHhCount Lock 33 Sad Be Bea RS BRB a ith g Maansa ba ailan ablaa bina agja if OF E 1 then 36 KE KE i 37 SetData K Local HMI 38 else 39 40 end if 41 ff RS gt gt 5 gt 5305 gt set gnCurrentM 42i gutcurrentM counts z 43 SetDatal qnCurrentNCount Lock 44 ff2PPPrreeeer set qNCULEeNncH asf next J 46 a7 TEDD gt gt 8SSERD 3 gt gt gt gt gt gt 45 f GetbatalgqnmacrolD Local HM 45 qnolurrentHip qninacrolp 26 socal H Drace ta niitlina far navut a gor J 0 to 3 S gt gt gt gt 3 gt 5 gt 5 gt gt set gnt qnlurrentMCount 1 sectDatalgqnelurrentHCou TED gt set gnt l TEDD set gnt qnolurrentMCount lt 2 sectDatalgqneturrentMCou TED gt set gnt next J TEDD gt gt gt assert 4g 7r GetbataignmacroID L 49 qnmnacrolb gncurrentMI 50 ffSetDataligqnmacrcollb Ler 51 f GetbDatalgnCount Loca 52 qnlount qneurrentMCou 53 7r Setbatalgqntount Loca 5 qntestyYal gnuturrent Me WorkSpace Macro ID DR AA 2 6 27 GetData OK O Lo zg m kii 57 of f gt RDEPRPDP DP a85 45 fi Getbhata gnmacrol 45 qniacraoalIp gnCuUrEI 50 SetdData gnmacrol 51 i GetData gnTount 52 qnlount gn urren 53 f Setd
471. wn below CoV iri PUR Oe WE NTEK MT8000 Series ee WeEINTER Inama tibet ee Teese h IF Communication Becomes Easy Easy Firn 6 1 2 Common Window Window no 4 is the default common window Objects in this window will be displayed in other base windows but it does not include popup window Therefore objects in different windows whether shared or same will be placed in common window for example the logo of the product or a common button When system is in operation Clicking Function Key and selecting Change common window allow users to change the source of common window For example users can change the common window from window 4 to window 20 92 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Window no 20 Window O20 k 6 1 3 Fast Selection Window Window no 3 is defined as the Fast Selection Window This window can coexist with base window Generally speaking it is used to place the frequently used operation buttons as the picture below Geib dim lt G 11 0903010107010 Trice t Communication Becomes Fassy When using Fast Selection Window window no 3 should be created first and then users need to set each function of Fast Selection button The Fast Sel button in the picture above is the Fa
472. word is confirmed directory names of the SD card etc will be displayed in Pick a Directory window as below pccard gt CF card SD card usbdisk gt USB device 58 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pick a Directory Select the download path for project and click OK for downloading Note Users have to create download data from Build Download Data for CF USB Disk in Project Manager Generally Project Manager divides downloaded files into two directories MT8000 Project storage History When users download the history data this directory will be created An example which shows the directory of target file is shown below USE DiskACF Card Data Select the folder to save download data F download JUse user defined start screen 59 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The structure of saved data is as the diagram below F downl oad T mt 000 history Users have to select the top layer of the directory of the target file when downloading In other words take the structure above as an example download must be selected instead of choosing mt8000 or history Take the illustration below as another example If USB disk only stores mt8000 directory but don t include history data In this case users must choose disk_a_17 the top layer of target file that contains file of mt8000 to correctly download the file Pick a Directory Directory usbdisk disk_a_1 F pc
473. x Qq0 Format Acknowledge You may select Click or Double click to acknowledge a new event style When a new event comes up the operator can Click or Double click to acknowledge the new event the system will change the text color of that event and export the write value registered with the event to the designated register Take use of this feature the user can register a popup window and put the warning message in the window then configure an indirect window object when the event is acknowledged the write value is written into the read address of the indirect window and call up the popup window Max event The maximum number of events to be displayed in the event display no object When the number of events is larger than the maximum the oldest event will be removed from the event display object Color Set the color of events in different states a Acknowledge b Return to normal c Select box The system draw a highlight box around the latest acknowledged event Acknowledge 13 12 19 7 Event f When LW f gt 10 5 1312348 Event 2 when LB10 ON A AEE IAS IO CRAMER ORD aa 13 12 15 Event 2 when LBTfO ON 13 12 14 Event 1 When LW 1 gt 10 EENE ET F r 5 Event 0 when LWO 100 Sequence no Return te normal Select box 319 4 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual trigger date trigger time notification time return to normal time 0 f2Zift
474. y The illustration below shows that the Shape is set with inner and frame States 2 Inner Frame Note About all the settings in Shape Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the shape after the setting is completed 131 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pietre oo Background E 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library Picture Library Users can click Use picture to enable selecting a picture from the library How to set Picture Library Click Picture Library button and Picture library dialog appears The currently selected picture is marked by a red frame 132 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Petare Lihrary Eg Library State io o butto nl O PB Red LPB Green 2 PB Yellow 3 PB Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 BMP 100x100 BMP 100x100 BMP 100x100 State O State 11 e 4 Lamp Red S Lamp Green amp Lamp Yellow F Lamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30354 bytes 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 BMP 100x100 BMP 100x101 BMP 100x100 Import Picture Modify Picture Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After O PB Red States 2 30054 b
475. y W W W set ON LB 9023 delete all event log files on HMI memory set W W W ON LB 9024 refresh event log information on HMI memory W W W set ON LB 9034 save event data sampling to HMI USB disk SD card set ON LB 9042 acknowledge all alarm events set ON LB 9043 unacknowledged events exist when ON PR R J R LB 11940 delete the earliest event log file on SD card set W W W ON LB 11941 delete all event log files on SD card set ON LB 11942 refresh event log information on SD card set ON LB 11943 delete the earliest event log file on USB 1 set n ON LB 11944 delete all event log files on USB 1 set ON LB 11945 refresh event log information on USB 1 set ON LB 11946 delete the earliest event log file on USB 2 set ww wo ow ww LB 11947 delete all event log files on USB2 setON ON w w W LB 11948 refresh event log information on USB 2 set ON Pw low w LW 9060 16bit no of event log files on HMI memory PR R J R LW 9061 32bit size of event log files on HMI memory PR R R LW 9450 16bit time tag of event log second 1 ORW RW RW LW 9451 16bit time tag of event log minute 1 ORW RW RW LW 9452 16bit time tag of event log hour 1 ORW RW RW LW 9453 16bit time tag of event log day 1 ORW RW RW LW 9454 16bit time tag of event log month 1 ORW RW RW LW 9455 16bit time tag of event log year 1 ORW RW RW LW 10480 1
476. y will not change accordingly Ch 2 35 7 21 52 16 09 07 O O 0 3576 21 52 16 09 07 O 0 3575 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 3574 21 52 16 09 07 O 0 E ae ee 3571 21521160007 0 0 3570 2152 16 09107 0 0 309 2152 enenr o o Configuration Click the History Data Display icon on the toolbar the History Data Display dialogue box show up on the screen Fill in each items and click OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below la amp T istory Data Display 273 2 Da WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shane Data sampling Object mdex 0 Enable Color Column interval 0 O Profile color Transparent Frame a Date Pe WETICE NO O Time ascending Time descending History control PLC name Local HMI s Setting Cancel Setting Description Select the corresponding Data sampling object where the history data comes Sampling from Set grid enable or disable 274 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ch 2 4 3982 2202160907 0 0 3981 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 3980 22 02 1609107 0 0 16 0907 Jae 3978 22 02 16 09 07 0 O 3977 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 P3976 2202 16708107 0 0 180S a 3974 122 02 160007 0 0 u eee Color Set color of grid Column interval Set space of column r3e87 21571100007 1 0 eer 2r oor
477. yBuilderS000 4 34 EBSO00 Remove Information Find other version of EBBOOO that has been installed Would you want bo remove EBROOO Select the version that you want to remove EBSOOoY410 EBsOOoyd2o EBSOOOV421 EBSOOoY430 EBSOOOY433 12 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 Designate a new folder for EasyBuilder Pro installation or choose the folder recommended and then click Next iG Setup EasyBuilder8000 4_34 Seles Select Destination Location Where should EasyBuildersooo V4 34 be installed Setup will install EasyBuilder6000 V4 4 into the Following Folder To continue click West IF you would like to select a different Folder click Browse At least 417 6 ME of free disk space is required 5 Users will be enquired to select a start menu folder to save the program s shortcuts Click Browse to designate a folder or use the folder recommended then click Next iG Setup FasyBuilder8000 74 34 Saks Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the Following Start Menu Folder To continue click West IF you would like to select a different Folder click Browse ss000 13 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 6 Users will be enquired if there
478. yed on the screen This function will be disabled when selecting All in Device Set the range of address types to be displayed This function will be disabled when selecting All in Address Type Click to start stop capturing communication message Error Please refer to the section coming later Polling Packages Polling Packages T yy x Fackage IO Device Station Index Address Length it 4 1 Local Htl LB 00562 S14 a Oh Local Hl LB 00574 1 BY tae SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet M 00000 1 t BS 3 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet 10 08610 000007 3 BY ts SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet 11 08610 0000313 FO Cs SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet 12 08610 00006 3 715 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet C8610 0000975 mem peser OO Package ID Use the information of package ID to check the PID in activity area for finding the problem Displays HMI and PLC type Station Displays PLC station number Index Display objects used index register numbers 732 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address Length Displays device type address Length how many words of the Package Object Screen IL Address 41 Local Hh LB 00562 1 8 i0 Local Hh LB 00574 1 67 32 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet M OOOO s 1 Toggle amp 10 30 M OOOO Toggle amp 10 29 M OOOO Toggle amp 10 29 Mi OOOO Toggle amp 10 25 Mi 00000 Toggle amp 1
479. ystem Parameter Settings Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fonts for no aacu strings AR Minchol JI Mingti GE Add Delete Step2 Design non ascii input keypad Create window11 for non ascii input keypad keypad design is shown below H 10 WINDOW 010 H 11 SimpleChinese_Keyboard fe e x CLEAR ENTER Those objects on the window are function keys with input code in accord with the label For example to input fy function key create a function key object General ASCII UNICODE mode type in jaj in the column as below illustration 195 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual aT i Function Key Object s Properties VDJ P ste d L A ints 4 General Security Shane Label Profile a A 42 Deseription TH Activate after button is released ial O Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Retum to previous window O Close window ASCITUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Clear Es ASCII UNICODE Go to Function key Label and then select Use label type jaj in the content and in the Attribute Font select AR MingtiM GB it must be the same as setp1 s setting as illustrated below The label of non ascii function key must use the same Font For example in Simplified Chinese keypad the fonts all use AR Mingti
480. ytes BMP 100x100 The illustration above provides information of one of the Pictures in the Picture Library as follows Picture O PB Red The number and name of the Picture Total states 2 The number of the states of the picture Image size 30054 The size of the Picture bytes Image BMP The format and resolution of the Picture BMP means format 100x100 bitmap Picture and its format can also be JPG PNG DPD 133 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note About all the settings in Picture Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the picture after the setting is completed Preview e 4 see o 134 Ly WE NTEK 9 3 Setting Text Content EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Go to Label tab while adding new object to set the text content as shown below Hew Bit Lamp Object Ed General Security Shape Label Use label Use label ibrary _ Use bitmap font Label Library 0 aa ttribute Cole sels Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to Movement Dineion let F contin Content z Tracking Duplicate this label to every state Use label Check Use label and click Label Library button to add and edit the text EB8000 supports Windows true font 135 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Use label library Check Use label library to choose a l

EB8000 Serial User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents